Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPP - 17364 SOUTHCENTER PKWY - BEST BUY - PERMITS AND PLANS17364 SOUTHCENTER PKWY ASSOCIATED PERMITS D16-0004 19-5-060 08-F-473 16-5-039 08-5-146 00-F-157 00-F-154 R4SWZ,44 1471,1151 CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE MARSHAL'S OFFICE 206-575-4407 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. **PLEASE PRINT** SITE LOCATION 1� �Y DLI 1l 1 0 lr f King Co. Assessor's Tax No.: J Site Address: F 1 ki �O cr // ( (Q 1! / Suite Number: Floor: Tenant Name: New Tenant? - Yes No Property Owner's Name: Ki� TiA (II /n 0 o IJ'(/ �nn 11n Mailing Address: 2) O( Y r► I r, J'1i( /2 I v( CONTACT PERSON -if there are questions about the submittal. City State Zip Name: ► Y l li t 7� P1 f'7A�C( Company Name: f ► 0 V' v ' vvrc- '=-(e, S T (V 1' V 101^ Mailing Address: E-mail Address: Day Telephone: 10 11 KrAni- via 1D02 - State Zip Fax Number: J Contractor's City of Tukwila _ o1 1 I 0 NICET III number: Business License number: Total number of new/relocated devices or sprinkler heads: Wrrnn �!'J Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ OO. Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): rm.) ko(V/i'o J�-5 �JI//Cl vifr r_ 1464- ill Ul VU,, PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Fire Marshal to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review -Every permit issued shall become invalid unless the work on the site authorized by such permit is commenced within 180 days after its issuance, or if the work authorized on the site by such permit is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days after the time the work is commenced. The Fire Marshal is authorized to grant, in writing, one or more extensions of time, for periods not more than 180 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OR WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER OR AUTHORIZED AGENT: Plan Permit App.doc 8/22/14 Date: 1 Day Telephone: 20 (6, 1 102 TFD FP Form 8 CORRECTION NOTICE/REINSPECTION FEE Inspector: 6/1 Permit number: TUKWILA FIRE MARSHAL'S OFFICE Office: 206-575-4407 Fax: 206-575-4439 Email: Fire Marshaltukwilawa.ov Business Name: er .40/Type - Fe-Sin11144d N t fly2- -1 & 7O F,9 -P. Ron( e"r- of Inspection: c /fid J/' Location Address: l �3 G¢ s p Date : �"7�r1— Contact Person: /��0X �Sarar� e v 6, Phone No. : 264 -S1-4 -9-(o(-4— ACTION REQUIRED : - Fe-Sin11144d N t fly2- -1 & 7O F,9 -P. Ron( e"r- / ni 6'S frfre-F jrOCom tvt v N tLkt9-r/n/ W/ C 7 2# Z 7.) Fiir.w19-T /44pt iTei) 5` ?9, `1N"l 21: e a 4/1117 - % _.------1 _ril t CORRECTION OF ABOVE ITEMS ARE REQUIRED BY : FAILURE TO Signatur Billin IN THE ISSUANCE OF A INAL ITATI 1 /TICKET. ailing Address : Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: ❑ A $100.00 Reinspection Fee is required. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. ❑ Ticket Issued. Citation # Correction Notice Reinsp Fee2.doc Revised 6/17/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 100 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: .� Type of I/lion: n;-1,4f Address:Contact Suite #: Y � / 73� `j,0641PXf P rson: Pre -Fire: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: ST bGs tit WL - ‘y' ,1-c,Cti`/ Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: ,. Date: S/3/M Hrs.: /. Q $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Projectzut,Type 't of Ins ection: A Address:Contact Suite #: ?3(Q cr go P'( erson: Special Instructions: Pre -Fire: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. j -,14r required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 64/X— iel SWE,"' .eVolig‘Atil A#1 Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: Date: .5A l` Hrs.: 1-0 $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip:: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project:8E_ 5, Type of Inspecti 7n - Suite #: 17364— ,S c_ / p Address: P1� �T Conct on: Persl3� (AiirkiiCl Special Instructions: Phone No.: m ti ST— Br". / SO V6—d 9i2 -r 612- 7Z0 F/. -whiz .9- p p vo9-L Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sprinklers: `/..e' Fire Alarm: m c' -L F/int- Monitor: peg-vvvcr- f Q. M y ST" B&--- On) S , • 1, Pl4- ,e72-01_ 17 w its A/O r %-'62vosA r r - Occupancy Type: m ti ST— Br". / SO V6—d 9i2 -r 612- 7Z0 F/. -whiz .9- p p vo9-L fig/ 47-'x/ S , S �-rD ty N6 b tae a� 7r e-&-- x'72- C_4 a/42- �'Z 0� ,v/G d Needs Shift Inspection: NO Sprinklers: `/..e' Fire Alarm: m c' -L Hood & Duct: r"/0 Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: Date: j24//6 Hrs.: $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. CaII to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 CORRECTION NOTICE/REINSPECTION FEE Inspector: tH.C.3 Permit number: TUKWILA FIRE MARSHAL'S OFFICE Office: 206-575-4407 Fax: 206-575-4439 Email: Fire Marshal tukwilawa.gov Business Namet of Inspection: //,--e 4/4,-44-t -CAci RwirType Location Address: /736cf SG /lei G c77.64~-- Air Ai iet-4cg4 Art1/574"Al Date :3 �� l G Contact Person : 1/,, ISUCI�fv‘;'Dn � Phone No. : A, rat. (022. (o?! 3 ACTION REQUIRED : — /I/./4 72 k 140 f -✓d it , ,14.41.t_ G c77.64~-- Air Ai iet-4cg4 Art1/574"Al oR-rontz - T. -c,-- Tr "friad- c,,,s/frxel- 1,47/ 0„.6‘.0.1 / f �"e /A "--- /cg7t774? 6/tet. adGS4e6/ A CORRECTION OF THE ABOVE ITEMS ARE REQUIRED BY : (O l V /6 FAILURE TO CO u ' MAY RESULT IN THE ISSUANCE OF A C MI L CITATION/TICKET. Signatur Billin ailing Address : Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: ❑ A $100.00 Reinspection Fee is required. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. 0 Ticket Issued. Citation # Correction Notice Reinsp Fee2.doc Revised 6/17/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 100 1 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: (2;4V� Type of Ins ection: SZV Address: 1 3 Suite #: s I.L. , S Contact Person: Special Instructions: Permits: Phone No.: f;z Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: sktocli Needs Shift Inspection: tv Sprinklers: Y<J Fire Alarm: NN.,\,,,,,;_, Hood & Duct: N..ct. Monitor: Pre -Fire: •.z_s Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: \ Date: INAki 0 Hrs.: $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 City of Tukwila Fire Department FIRE WATCH REQUIRED Due to the inoperative fire protection system(s) in your facility, you are required to provide a fire watch per City of Tukwila Ordinance #2437, section 16.40.120-D and Ordinance #2436, section 16.42.100-C (see reverse side). The fire watch shall be maintained until the system(s) are operational as determined by the Tukwila Fire Marshal's Office. FAX paperwork to 206-575-4439 to verify the completion of repair work and/or the restoration of system monitoring, in order to end the fire watch. The fire watch is required 24 hours a day. Designated employees may serve as the fire watch during business hours, while performing their regular job. Fire watch personnel must be aware of, and accept the duties of the fire watch. After hours fire watch personnel must be on location and must patrol the building following the close of business. Every two hours they must call 206-971-8737 and leave a message stating the following: 1. Your name. 2. Street address of firewatch location. 3. Time of day. 4. If everything is OK, state all clear. If you discover an emergency during your patrol , call 9-1-1 immediately to report it. Date: 4/11/ f Inspectors: Frn ' Start time: Z1 - Reason For Fire watch: 7'a /' /IID 7-- Incident #: BIZ! Alt1"1 C c.14 -r-7/.167 /A/(c jy W2-41.- j 5 %*-Io jl Business Name: ?EST- g uci Business Address: (� 4 56v (. jvn.- Business Phone: Person in Charge: 4i?( 5d-/6 4 &irZ 1 Signature: Y - Owner/Manager Rev. 7/29/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 41 W - Fire Marshal's Office Tukwila Fire Marshal's Office • Phone: 206-575-4407 • Fax: 206-575-4439 • Email: FireMarshal@tukwilawa.gov ice' Ditl-u A -co S77(.k+v1 1Un.a L! est' P'—f /73ay s C PY goriFictriviij D F ZIsr444"44 /a/ CCadiI cl ESL IL, 4191,4c f ro /O'.0$ CIHQ /S, 3v Ga, 73 tea LIGHTING LEGEND SEE E-1.7 SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION SYM. TYPE GENERAL DESCRIPTION 0 DL 3" RECESSED CAN DOWNLIGHT TL TRACK LIGHT 'n �S `>t SURFACE (UNIVERSAL) EMERGENCY FLOOD LIGHT /73<,tvsc� CEILING TILE; 2' X 2' FROST SHADOWLINE-BEVEL, USG#414; COLOR STANDARD WHITE. CEILING GRID; DONNDX 1518 COLOR TO MATCH CEILING TILE STANDARD WHITE. PAINT SUPPLY & RETURN GRILLES AND DROP DOWN FILM SCREEN COVER PLATE TO MATCH CEILING TILE. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO FURNISH & INSTALL BACKING FOR BBY PROVIDED PROJECTOR MOUNTING PLATES. CEILING SPEAKERS FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER. PROVIDE TWO (2) EXTRA 12 GA SEISMIC WIRE DROPS FROM PRFFAB CEILING 9TR U TURE. NOV 15 2006 Tukwila Fire 15?C 0 co 4 t.u. 0 1 nv - '750? / 1 Tia i / I © ®� - j -"FPrc - I TL/a i T4 L = // t: Eft& TL/a DL - DL/ET O 0 4 ...„ i i :_ --- - .~ _ - I_ s �� - - r;; -- ; - a- + 0 »;". TL/c ~ II I TL/c 1 0m._ TL/c 0 / © - ©Illt A, /73<,tvsc� CEILING TILE; 2' X 2' FROST SHADOWLINE-BEVEL, USG#414; COLOR STANDARD WHITE. CEILING GRID; DONNDX 1518 COLOR TO MATCH CEILING TILE STANDARD WHITE. PAINT SUPPLY & RETURN GRILLES AND DROP DOWN FILM SCREEN COVER PLATE TO MATCH CEILING TILE. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO FURNISH & INSTALL BACKING FOR BBY PROVIDED PROJECTOR MOUNTING PLATES. CEILING SPEAKERS FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER. PROVIDE TWO (2) EXTRA 12 GA SEISMIC WIRE DROPS FROM PRFFAB CEILING 9TR U TURE. NOV 15 2006 Tukwila Fire 15?C 0 co 4 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 3'-6" / 4'-0" 161'-3" 1' 3'-11/2" �/ 3'-11/2" �-3"/ 4-0" / 3'-6" N m \ 1' INSTALL PANELS CLOCKWISE FROM DOOR 3'-9" i 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4'-0" 4' 4'-0" o O A O O N0 O O O0 24'-0" • 24'-9" m Elf 0 ACCEPTED Without Comments As Noted In lied Per The Attached Letter These plans have been reviewed by The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau for conformance with current city standards. Acceptance is subject to errors and omissions which do not authorize violations of adopted stanaaras and oramances. The responsibility for the adequacy of design rests totally with the designer. Additions, deletions or revisions to these drawings atter this date will void this acceptance and will require a resubmittal of revised drawings for subsequent approval. Final acceptance is subject to field test and inspection by The Tukwta Fire Prevention Bureau. Date: /1-1-1--0 c- By: �!1 NOTICE A completed, signed, Tukwila Fire Department Pre-test Certificate must be presented to the Inspector prior to commencement of Acceptance Testing of any Fire Alarm and Detection Systems. Failure of test will result in a Re -inspection Fee and termination of the testing. fUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT Please call: 575.4407 and give this job No. Oc _F_ and exact address for shut. ,,iwn or restoration aporovmI CheOpoint® Security Systems Group, Inc. April 12, 2000 Lt. Don Tomaso Tukwila Fire Department 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, WA 98188 Dear Mr. Tomaso, Project: Best Buy #447 South Center Parkway & Minkler Blvd. Tukwila, WA 98108 Enclosed you will find three sets of communicator submittal plans and specification booklets for the above project. A Radionics D9112 Fire Communicator will be installed for central station connection. The FACP will be provided and installed by the fire alarm contractor under a separate submittal. The monitoring of the Fire System will be through Checkpoint Security Systems Group, Inc. Monitoring Company. UL listed Central Station (UL #S4993-1). Communicator will be installed to local requirements, NFPA 72, and Manufacturer's specifications. Please mail two sets of approved, stamped, and signed plans back to me at the Checkpoint Corporate Office address below. If there are any questions or concerns, please contact me at (800) 957-6674. Sincerely, Mark Snodgrass Designer, Fire Alarm Systems Corporate Office 6640 Shady Oak Road, Suite 300 Eden Prairie, Minnesota 55344 (612) 943-3853 • FAX (612) 943-3854 Distribution Center 6500 Carlson Drive Listed Eden Prairie, Minnesota 55346 Central Station (612) 946-4350 • FAX (612) 943-3809 Chec/pobit® Security Systems Group, Inc. April 14, 2000 Lt. Don Tomaso Tukwila Fire Department 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, WA 98188 Dear Lt. Tomaso, Project: Best Buy #447 South Center Parkway & Minkler Blvd. Tukwila, WA 98108 Per our conversation on 4/13, I have attached check number 2767 for $110.00 payable to "Tukwila Fire Department" for plan review fees. If there are any questions or concerns, please contact me at (800) 957-6674. Sincerely, Mark Snodgrass Designer, Fire Alarm Systems Corporate Office 6640 Shady Oak Road, Suite 300 Eden Prairie, Minnesota 55344 (612) 943-3853 • FAX (612) 943-3854 Distribution Center 6500 Carlson Drive Listed Eden Prairie, Minnesota 55346 Central Station (612) 946-4350 • FAX (612) 943-3809 BEST BUY #447 TUKWILA, WA A D9112 AMP. CALCULATION TABLE AC Power ON Normal Current AC Power OFF Minimum Current In Alarm Maximum Current Model Quantity Each Each Each Number Used Unit Total Unit Total Unit Total D9112 1 0.25 x Quant. 0.250 0.25 x Quant. 0.250 0.5 x Quant. 0.500 D125B0.02 x Quant. 0.019 x Quant. 0.123 x Quant. D127 0.013 x Quant. 0.012 x Quant. 0.045 x Quant. D928 1 0.014 x Quant. 0.014 0.014 x Quant. 0.014 0.045 x Quant. 0.045 D129 0.025 x Quant. 0.025 x Quant. 0.026 x Quant. D192C 0.015 x Quant. 0.026 x Quant. 0.05 x Quant. D1255 1 0.104 x Quant. 0.104 0.106 x Quant. 0.106 0.206 x Quant. 0.206 D8125 1 0.048 x Quant. 0.048 0.047 x Quant. 0.047 0.048 x Quant. 0.048 D8126 0.003 x Quant. 0.003 x Quant. 0.004 x Quant. D9127 3 0.003 x Quant. 0.009 0.003 x Quant. 0.009 0.004 x Quant. 0.012 D8128A 0.027 x Quant. 0.027 x Quant. 0.046 x Quant. D8129 0.02 x Quant. 0.02 x Quant. 0.02 x Quant.+ D8130 0.005 x Quant. 0.005 x Quant. 0.054 x Quant. D185 0.245 x Quant. 0.3 x Quant. 0.3 x Quant. Ratings of other devices in the system which are not shown above: DS250 0.003 x Quant. 0.003 x Quant. 0.048 x Quant. NS121575 0 x Quant. 0 x Quant. 0.175 x Quant. MB -G6-12 0 x Quant. 0 x Quant. 0.06 x Quant. RIBUIC RLY 0 x Quant. 0 x Quant. 0.014 x Quant. TOTAL A = 0.425 TOTAL B = 0.426 TOTAL C = 0.811 * If the column C total exceeds 1900 mA, a D8132 is required to provide an additional 1900 mA. (16.2.2) NFPA 72A Local Systems require 24 hours of standby plus 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of the 24-hour period. Two batteries must be installed in the D9112 system to meet the basic standby requirements for an NFPA 72A installation. You must use battery ampere hour (A.H.) calculations to verify compliance with NFPA 72A. The following formula includes the calculation for 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of the 24 hour period, as well as a 10% contingency factor which allows for depletion of battery capacity with age. FORMULA FOR NFPA 72A AMPERE HOUR CALCULATION: ( 0.426 x 24 ) + ( 0.811 x 1112 ) + 10% = 11.321 Column Hours Column 5 min. Contingency Total A.H. B Total C Total Factor Total A.H. requirements must not exceed A.H. capacity of batteries: Two D126 batteries = 14 A.H. (16.2.3) NFPA 72C Remote Station Systems require 60 hours of standby plus 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of the 60 -hour period. A D8132 Battery Charger Module with additional batteries installed in a separate D8109 or D8108A enclosure may be required in the D9112 system to meet the basic standby requirements for an NFPA 72C installation. You must use battery ampere hour (A.H.) calculations to verify compliance with NFPA 72C. .1 Add one D8132 module, bringing total panel power to 2800 mA and battery capacity to 28 A.H. ❑ Add two D8132 module, bringing total panel power to 4200 mA and battery capacity to 42 A.H. Checkpoint Security Systems Underwriters Laboratories Inc.® Northbrook, IL Santa Clara; CA , Melville; NY Research Triangle 6t�f�;f� Camas; WA ` :: A not-for-profit organization dedicated to public sa and committed to quality service . ..{'' : Applicant ID No: 690817-001 Service Center No: 0 Expires: 31 -MAR -2001 COMPLIANCE THIS IS TO CEI TIFI( that the 'Alafnr' SeiVice Company ndicated below is Included by Undet irriter8 Laboratories Inc. (UL) In" its;Ftoduet.. Directories "as eligible to use ,the UL Listing Mark in:connectton:with. Certificated Alarm Systems.' _The 'only evidence of Compllertce with UL's requirements is the" Issuance `cf UL Certificate for the Alarm System and the Certificate is current under UL's Certificate Verification Service. Listed Service From: EDEN PRARIE, MN A/amt Service Company: (690817=00.1) CHECKPOINT SECURITY SYSTEMS GROUP INC SUITE 300 6640 SHADY OAK RD EDEN PRARIE, MN 55344 CHECKPOINT SECURITY SYSTEMS GROUP INC SUITE 300 6640 SHADY OAK RD EDEN PRARIE, MN 55344 The Alarm Service Company is Listed lathe following Certificate Service Categories: UUFX PROTECTIVE SIGNALING SERVICES -CENTRAL STATION * * * THIS CEFTIFICATE EXPIRES ON 31 -MAR -2001 *** 0 i 01 01998 UL Form CS -CC 5M/3198 01 :vTk!fziRT* 0747 Nov 15 2006 8:26RM Symmetric Electric 253-770-7621 p.2 GENT GEC, GES & GEH sic SERIES CORPORATION . GEC3 $c GES3 SERIES fl 5marter Y i s i o n UL 1971 COMPLIANT CAN/ULC S526 -M87 Compliant VISIBLE AND/OR AUDIBLE SIGNALING APPLIANCES I. INTRODUCTION The Centex mode's GEC/GEs/GEH (horn/strobe, strobe and horn) and Gentex models GEC3/GES3 (horn/strobe and strobe) are high quality audible and/or visible signaling appliances. The high intensity strobe utilizes a Xenon flash tube that generates a high-intensity flash visible from all angles. This appliance is intended to provide a visible, audible or audible/visible, depending on the model, notification signal for the purpose of life safety and property protection. • The GEC3 and GESS are provided with a slider switch which allows for candela selection at the installation she. The intensities which can be selected are 15Cd, 30Cd, 60Cd, 75Cd, or 110Cd. The GEC and GES are fixed candela units, the candela intensities which can be ordered, we 15Cd, 30Cd, 60Cd, 75Cd, 110Cd, 177Cd and 15/75Cd. This appliance is Ideal for any occupancy that requires notification appliances per the applicable dependable alarms are required. The strobe is fisted in compliance with UL 1971, Signaling Appliances for the Hewiginai building or fire code - wherever7Visible Signal Devices for Fire Alarm Systems (15/75Cd model is additionally Nsted in compliance with UL1838). g and CAN/UL 5528-M87 Visible iI. LOCATION This appliance is intended for use in Fire Alarm Systems and is to be installed in accordance with this manual, the recommendation of the local authorities having jurisdiction, and other NFPA documents that provide standards on notification appliances for protective signaling systems. The GEC/GES/GEH and GEC3/GES3 are Intended for indoor installations only. This appliance is not weatherproof for outdoor or drip proof applications. Wall mounted strobe and horn/strobe appliances shall have their entire lens at heights above the finished floor of not less than 80 in. (2m) and notreater 96 In. (2.4m)"`. Spacing shah be in accordance with Table A. If a room configuration Is not square, the room size that will entirelyencompass mm g than subdivide the room into multiple squares shaft be used. Wall mounted horn only appliances shall have their tops above the finished floors at heightsroom or of not less than 90 In. (2.30m) and below the finished ceilings at heights of not less than 6 in. (152mm). Different mounting heights shall be permitted by the AftJ the sound pressure level requirements of NFPA 72 are met. provided Table A Maximum Room Size f Minimum Requ red Light Output LEfteotive intensity, Cd) Two Lights per • Four Liphis par . ' lelent teat One Light Room (Located on Room (One Light er R_oom Opposite waifs' per Wall) B.fOx6,ip 20x20 15 NA 6.53x8.53 28x28 i 30 NA 8.14x9.14 30x30 1Unknown 12.2x 12.2 40x40 300 13.7x 13.7 , 15.2 x 15.2 34 60 16.5x 165 18.3 x 18.3 21.3 x 21.3 24.4 x 24.4 45 x 45 Unknow 50 x 50 94 60 54x54 110 Unknown 60x60 135 95 70x70 184 95 80 x 80 240 135 90x90 304 185 100 x 100 375 240 110x 110 455 240 120 x 120 540 305 39,6 x 39,6 130 x 130 636 375 75 Unknown NA 27.4 x 27.4 30.5x30.5 33.5 x 33,5 36.8x36.6 NA = Not allowable. **Effective Intensity Requirements for Sleeping Areas 15 Unknown 30 Unknown 30 60 60 95 95 135 135 185 Visible Notification Appliance Distance from Ceiling to Top of Lens intensity greater than or equal to 24" 110cd less than 24" 177cd LIGHT OUTPUT IN PERCENTAGE WHEN MEASURED FROM THE FOLLOWING DIRECTIONS Lto!oot".ie'rtanbrd.p,.i.,, urn cape-emoo akwmean fmxna "our,q 0 5.25 50 ss 50 05 70 70 50 65 % of Rating 100 eo 75 55 45 40 25 35 30 25 0± Dogma %ofRatkq 930 35 45 100 00 05 34 M 27 56 60 1p M 15 70 15 75 13 !e 12 45 12 w 12 11. MOUNTING, ROUGH-iN BOX AND RUN WIRING his unit is designed for mounting to most single gang boxes, 4" square outlet boxes, 2 -gang masonry boxes or non-metallic 2 -gang switch boxes. Conduit ntrance to boxes should be selected to insure sufficient wiring clearance. . Mount a box for each remote signaling appliance. Screw bracket onto box. Insert signal into bracket and slide to the right firmly into the terminal block receptacle. Place housing over mounted assembly and screw together with single screw at the bottom of the signal. Cover screw with plastic tab. Run a minimum 18 gauge insulated 2 or more conductor cable. ttention: Wiring should be connected to mounting bracket prior to mounting signal. Incoming positive power lead must be broken and each lead is i be inserted into each of the top two terminals. If two power runs are made to the signal, one for the strobe and one for the horn, only one of the ins must have its positive lead broken and placed under the two separate top terminals. A barrier is provided to prevent both leads from being aced under the same terminal. 1 Nov 15 2006 8:26AM Symmetric Electric GEGGES Series AvailableCandela • Hom Mode Tem • • • • 3trob• Current RadnBs GEC3/GES3 Series Strobe Available Candela Candela • 15 253-770-7621 Regulated 24VDC Max. Operating CurrenffrnA�_` 78 96 96 -- 15/75 _i______ r` .. —__`I.. __ 30 �--�_fz— 135 _ — — _ 1__ 6-6----_r_--- . �-- _-137 .—._.�_...._.—_186 ' • 75 180 _ 245 177 _. _._... ~_3'13 .—_.. 288 _ 364 Regulat 24V•dVFFyy`R Max. Operating _Current(mA) 113 135 _______— • • • -- _- ._.._.. 110 224 3 2400Hz Tem 3 Mechanical RTem 3 Chime Continuous 2400Hz Continuous Mechanical Continuous Chime whoa Hom Current Ratis Minimum dBA kr; Minimum dl3A @Regulated 24VDC Tlieiiiiiii,d 24VFWR Per 1 10Ft Per ' g Max. Opera tingUL464Mil) ' UL484/0 h Setting(mA �Hh�tting(m A78 71* 7648 70• 70* I----- 25 _ 44 81 74` { 28 -- _____ 30 _. ____ 80 --r -- 72* _ f 25 ~` _ _— 48_ _ -- -- 70* _ 66' -- 30 ____._._.. 30 82 69* __-.-- —z --15 _—..__.. ____.. NOTE: - DC Voltage Rangegg ' �__-__-_.. hag Limits: 16-33V. FWR Voltage Range Limits: 16-33V. This product was only tested to the stated voltage range(s); do not apply 80% and 110% of this range for system operation. - The three pulse temporal pattern is to be used for evacuation use only. - The sound output for the temporal 3 tone is rated lower since the time the horn is off is averaged into the sound output rating. While the hom producing a tone In the temporal 3 mode its sound pressure is the same as the continuous mode. Units have been tested to O C, 49°°Cad 931% humidity and are rated 20-30vdc/vFWR -20%, +10% per CAN/ULC S526 -M87. The 15/75 cd model is rated 15cd per UL 1971 and CAN/ULC S526•M87. 'Operating the hom in this mode at this voltage will result in not meeting the minimum UL reverberant sound level required for public mode fire protection service, These settings are acceptable only for private mode fire alarm signaling use. Use the high dBA setting for public mode applications (the chime tone is always private mode). IV. WIRING Wiring for independent chroni prt cr0�a; tuAx. WIRE nd orn. 0.A.eLVOLrAGE.a.P:IANCEA vat'xw+aEmNacmnn 1 Using this method you may: DISTANCE 11 • (IN FEET) TOrAL CURRENT DRAW hom (place switches 1 and 2 up on the igure 1 " e abler to rngle the_.__ :_r� • Mute the horn only when the temporal hom option has been selected. Wirjacupityacilianktuthar i I tf Using this method you may: • Use only two wires to synchronize the temporal horn and strobe without the ability to mute the horn (place switches 1 and 2 up on the GEC) (see Figure 1). • Choose either temporal or continuous horn with the temporal horn synchronized. • Also wire the control module (AVSM) to only the strobe input power terminals, set the horn to continuous mode and power it from a coded source. NOTE: For this option, switches 1 and 2 on the GEC (see Figure 1) must be down to isolate power to the audible and visible portion of the circuit. NOTE: All strobes are designed to flash as specified with continuous applied voltage. This appliance is not recommended for use on coded or pulsing signaling circuits. However, use of the AVSM control module is permitted to synchronize the strobe and/or mute the horn. F.A.C.P. P. 18AW0 16AW0 14AWG 12AWG Includes wire to and from appliance. CAUTION: Applies only to regulated supplies. Asslrnes all appliances are at the end of wire run (worst case). 95 153 244 tW Or1AA MAPCO rah CIAO A 1MMOOWL Y. AUDIBLE SPINAL CIRCOR VISIBLE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .... --'---�1 AVSM f ENO Or LME PEMSTOR FDA WAS 1 WWII ONLY. TO NEXT SIGNAL ~� To NEXT MIGNA L itniove PER FOR INDEPENDENT ANO HORN SYNCHRONIZED LEAVE 4111APERIN PLACE TO RUMINATE NEED FOR NOMI INPUT ON AVID AND OPERATE SPINAL IN UNISON MODE Sr S+ 8+ 0- H• H- 9 0- "11- ----- TO 1 1 TO NOTIFICATION ALARM CIRCUIT boa *vu. sa. Plsi wn..r.. AVSM TO NOTIFICATION ALARM QRCUR LEAVE JUMPER IN PLACE ON SLAVE UNITS UNLESS SEPARATE CONTROL OVER MORN CKT a REQUIRED. i 0 i GAO OrUNE WANTON !OA rawaa vAPwc ONLY 2 Nov 15 2006 6:26RM Symmetric Electric Conventional Method; You may conned both the strobe and the ham directly from a source of rated power without the use of a control module. However, the home and strobe tights will NOT be synchronized. Place switches 1 and 2 up on the GEC (see Figure 1) to power both the audible and visible from a single wish to power the hom and strobe from independent sources of power, place switches 1 and 2 down on the GEC and connect pair of terminals. power wires. If you power to the appropriate 253-770-7621 p.4 WOOF Lem NWSMM LPL Listed Control Panel Supenelsed Signet Circuit PM! MI ig VOW use rtmarae IND WON CAUTION: When using only a single power source to energize the strobe and hom (switches 1 and 2 up), the In/out wiring must be under the S+ and S. terminals only. Failure to do so may result in damage to your signal. For the horn only (GEN) and strobe only (GES), only the top three terminals are to be used. NOTE: INSTALLATION IN CANADA - All Canadian installations should be in accordance with the Canadian Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems- CANIULC S524-01 the Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1. Figure 1 SWITCH POSITION MachsnicesTetry. ON 4 MechaniwFconl. OFF f#Teruo. ON NrCo,d. FF Chima•Temp. ON Chime -Cont OFF %boos ON telco, OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 5 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Switch positions 1 and 2 in the off position to select isolated horn and strobe power inputs. Switch Position 8 ON > HiGH dB OFF> LOW dB le Gentex Super-SlideTM Mounting acket allows the installer to pre -wire the stem, test for system supervision, 'rove the signal head until occupancy, 4tch out Gentex signals without anging mounting brackets and has :king edge connector for snap -in-place italiatlon. ROA -pririir+= Confide e314dion eider twitch Depress center and Slide twitch to desired brightness level Break off pin end insert into hole at the bottom of the seleaorto look candela setting. Signal must be removed from bracket and pin renhedfoneard from backside cut of hole to change tercels. (OEC3 & GES3 ONLY) D Mau) 1 CAUTION: A Jumper card is provided to test for correct wiring In the supervisory mode only. DO NOT pass alarm current through the jumper. Checkmatee' Instant Voltage Verification: it is often necessary to confirm the voltage drop along a ane of devices. The access holes are provided in the back of the terminal block to atfow the voltage to be measured directly without removing ire device. Typically this would be done et the end of the line to confirm design criteria. Most measure- ments will be taken using the S+ and S- locations although access is Provided to other locations. NOTE: Care should betaken to not short the test probes. 3 • Nov 15 2006 8:26AM Symmetric Electric 253-770-7621 p.5 To remove bezel, grip both sides of bezel and pull in a downward and outward motion. THIS APPLIANCE WILL NOT OPERATE WITHOUT ELECTRIWARNING CAL POWER. AS FIRES FREQUENTLY CAUSE POWER INTERRUPTIONS, GENTEX SUGGESTS YOU DISCUSS FURTHER SAFEGUARDS WITH YOUR LOCAL FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALIST. V. CHECKOUT AND TROUBLESHOOTING 1. Supply power to the system control panel. The auxiliary signaling appliances in the system should not be activated. 2. lithe signal is activated: • Check all smoke and fire detectors In the system to make sure they have not been activated. • Check all wiring connections to make sure the signal detection circuits are not reversed or shorted together. Check wire color codes and traces. • Verify that the junipers and switches are properly set on both the control module and signal appliance. If the jumper on the AVSM Is removed, the homs will not produce any sound unless there 1s an input to the Hi- and H- terminals on the control module. 3. To test the signal appliances, trip the auxiliary panel or activate the alarm circuit at the main control panel or activate one of the fire detection units in the system. All auxiliary signals should be activated. 4. An operational test on this product should be conducted in accordance with National Standards or at a minimum annually and more often if dictated by local and state codex or authorities having jurisdiction. NOTE: These testing procedures' and troubleshooting instructions are generalized. Please refer to the system) control panel operating Instructions for proper operation of the panel and fire detection system. SiGNAUNG APPLIANCE LIMITATION: Yeur-hew and hom/ser°be'meeterexeeed the-eur-ent-audibility requirements of Underwriters Laboratories. However, if the appliance is located outside a bedroom it may not wake up a sound sleeper, especially if the room door is dosed or only partially open. VI. TO RETURN AN APPLIANCE Should you experience problems with your appliance. proceed as follows: 1. Tum off electrical power to the auxiliary alarm circuit. 2. Remove the bezel, nameplate, then mounting screw and slide signal off from bracket 3. Replace unit that was removed to restore wiring supervision and to eliminate system trouble alert. 4. Carefully pack the defective unit (the manufacturer cannot be responsible for consequential damage due to shipping or mis-handling). Include your return address and complete details as to the nature of the difficulties being experienced and dale of installation. 5. Return to: Centex Corporation, 10985 Chicago Dr., Zeeland MI 49464, Prior to returning, call the Gentex field service dept. @ 1-800-436-8391 or e-mail • FP_RMA@gentex.com to obtain a RMA Number from our return department. LIMITED WARRANTY For a period of 36 months from the date of purchase or a maximum of 42 months from the date of manufacture. Gentex warrants to you the original purchaser that your appliance will be hoe from defects in workmanship, mater els and construction under normal use and service. If a defect In workmanship. materials and construction should cause your appliance to become inoperative od, Gentex we repair your appliance or furnish you with a new or rebuilt appliance without ethas a to you except for postage requttad to return appliancetheillotreiiburs the warranty peri- od, cede provided by other parties. Your repaired or reptatement appliance will be returned toirthto r a y Gentex will mol reimburse a warranty tar repairsr d. or The warranty Is void t our inspection of your appliance shows that theyou free of use, a and i wit e covered faulty nsder the warranty for Its palace or the rs othery he those by us. damage or failure was caused by abuse, misuse, abrlorrrrtal usage, fault instalatlon, Improper maintenance repairs titan those ANY VYARRANTBES SAPUED UNDER ANY STATE LAW INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTAS IUTY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE APPLY ONLY FOR THE WAR- RANTY PERIOD SPECIFIED ABOVE. PLEASE NOTE THAT SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMPTATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS. 80 THE ABOVE LIMITATION NAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. G!NTEx WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS, DAMAGE, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE, USE OR REPAIR OF THIS APPLIANCE. THE MAXIMUM UABILf1Y OF GENTEX SHALL NOT IN ANY CASE EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE APPLIANCE. PLEASE NOTE THAT SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OANIAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. If a defect in workmanship, materials orconstruction should cause your appliance to became inoperable wifhin the warranty period. you must return the appliance to Genitor postage prepaid. You meet prove to the satisfaction of Gentex Ira data of purchase of your appliance. Werrenty service may only be performed by Gentex personnel at Gentex's facilites In Zeeland, Michigan You must also pack the appli- ance to minimize the risk of it being damaged in transit You must also endose a return address. Appliances returned for warranty service should be sent to: Gentex Corpotatlon. 10985 MI 49484. If we receive an applance in a damaged condition as the result of stripping, we will notify you and you must seek a darn with the shipper. Chicago Dr., Zeeland THIS WARRANTY OWES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE, Important Notice: Thos materials haw been prepared by Gera[ Corporation f•Gentsx") for tntormatiorel purposes only, an necessarily1 wmr o ek a pleas or anprd, stet mass makAets ere complrte end acoaate. uP-loda4. or el co summary. andte end pural rported Me r carve on end advice and Should not be used as such. Gerona makes no rO. then t and Writable uncertainty regadk.g Merprelatbn or laws. regulations and rales etc the implication of such taws. rsguNsons end rules to particular fact tatter s. Each p and , lie. The materials froen not 1005address all Neal m )hal exist unas there Is reputations or rues Therefore. these moieties should be used only or bomtadona purposes and should nor be used tie a sJxteas for se poseurs. F�pt repos, eG nies will a beeran anew the r an a action [kat Ou- t, In mems laws, upon Me Inrormellon contained In els material. sestina professional leer adNm. Genies tris mol responsible for any exa0n > Were to set M merinos 550-249-7 GENTEX CORPORATION 109t15 CHICAGO DRIVE, ZEELAND, MI 49464 PHONE: 1-800-436-8391 www.gentex.com 3/5/02 4 r •,ice �► Best Buy 17364 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, WA Fire Alarm System Prepared by: Electronic Systems Corporation P.O. Box 77064 Seattle, WA 98177 1-(206)-361-6553 Index Customer Westpac Electric 1521130th Ave. N.E. Bellevue, WA 98008 Project Best Buy 17364 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, WA 98188 List of Materials Vendor Electronic Systems Corporation P.O. Box 77064 Seattle, Wa. 98177 Type of Equipment Fire Alarm System 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 EST EST EST EST EST EST EST EST EST EST EST EST EST EST EST Wheelock Wheelock Wheelock EST EST Fire Alarm System EST2 DL2 2-LSRA SIGA-PS SIGA-SB SIGA-DH 6261-006 SIGA-278 SIGA-CT2 SIGA-CR 757 -5A -T 757 -3A -T 757 -8A -T 202 -5A -T 202 -3A -T MBG10-24-R WM3T24-F-R WBBR MR101/C BPS 6 Control Panel Dual Line Dialer LCD Annunciator Photoelectric Detector Detector Base Duct Detector Housing 78" Sampling Tube Double Action Fire Alarm Station Dual Input Module Control Relay Module 15 Candela Horn / Strobe 30 Candela Horn / Strobe 110 Candela Horn/Strobe 15 Candela Strobe 30 Candela Strobe Bell 10" Exterior Strobe W/P Back Box SPDT Relay w/Enclosure Remote Booster Power Supply INTELLIGENT ANALOG AUDIO CONTROL PANEL EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY UNIFORM SYSTEM DESIGN ONE OR TWO CHANNEL AUDIO Configure with or without Firefighters telephone DISTRIBUTED OR BANKED AMPLIFIERS 30 and 50 watt distributed amplifiers 125 and 250 watt centrally banked amplifiers INTEGRAL 15 FUNCTION TONE GENERATOR PAGE BY FIREFIGHTERS TELEPHONE SIGNATURE SERIES DETECTORS AND MODULES SUPPORTED CLASS B OR A SIGNATURE DATA CIRCUIT(S) 96 DETECTORS AND 94 MODULES PER CIRCUIT TWO INTEGRAL CLASS A OR B NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUITS 576 EVENT HISTORY LOG EST2 Audio Fire Alarm is modular in design. Audio control panels provide all the features of EST2 with the added benefit of one or two channel audio. Audio cabinets integrate both Fire Alarm control equipment and audio control equipment ensuring both functionality and esthetics. When distributed amplification is needed a single remote mounting audio closet cabinet supports mounting of up to two 50 watt distributed amplifiers in remote locations. For large banked audio applications 125 and 250 watt amplifiers blend perfectly with the EST2 audio control. The EST2 audio panel provides an efficient emergency paging, evacuation signaling and firefighters telephone system in perfectly integrated modular packages. 0 �C 1111111111 IIIIIIIIII IIIIGIIII IIIIIIIIII 011111111 IIIIIIIIII Illllmll 1111111111 ulmllfl IIIIIIIIII 1111111111 .11101111 EST2 audio suits applications requiring emergency voice paging and evacuation signaling with or without firefighter's telephone. Single channel or dual channel applications easily configure using Signature distributed amplifiers or EST cen- trally banked amplifies. Distributed amplifiers are available in 30 watt and 50 watt sizes. Centrally banked amplifiers are available in 125 watt and 250 watt sizes. All EST2 audio amplifiers easily configure for 25Vrms or 7OVrms operation through simple jumper selection. EST2 with SIGA Amplifiers: Signature amplifiers provide Class B or Class A wiring of audio output circuits. Speakers connect directly to the output of the SIGA amplifier or the amplifier output can run as an audio riser to signature modules where speaker zone selection is made. Each SIGA amplifier has a built in 1 kHz tone generator and provision for a back up amplifier. Should an amplifier lose its input signal the output will switch to a backup amplifier. If there is no backup amplifier or the output from the back up is unavailable the output will receive the internal 1 kHz tone as the evacuation signal. For installations requiring firefighter's telephone, EST2 offers a master telephone module that allows communication with remote telephone stations. System paging is available through the front panel master microphone or through remote telephone stations when configured. Six front panel switches allow the emergency user to Page to the EVAC riser, Page to the ALERT riser or quickly place EVAC or ALERT tones on the risers. After a paging operation the system Audio Controller automatically returns to its pre -page state. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY SARASOTA, FLA. 941-739-4200 Fax: 941-727-0740 CHESHIRE, CT. 203-699-3000 Fax: 203-699-3108 OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax: 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL: CANADA 905-270-1711 Fax: 905-270-9553 PITTSFIELD, ME. 207-487-3104 85005-0093 1 of 6 las. 2 i I Y Catalog Number Description Shipping WT. Ib. (kg) lectronics G -MCD Main Control and Display 1.5 (.7) 2 -PPS 4.5 amp power supply 120VAC 2.5 (1.1) 2-PPS/220 4.5 amp power supply 220VAC 2.5 (1.1) 2-PPS/6A 6.4 amp power supply 120VAC 2.5 (1.1) 2-PPS/6A-220 6.4 amp power supply 220VAC 2.5 (1.1) 2 -MIC Master Paging Microphone 3 (1.3) 2 -TEL Firefighters Master Telephone 4 (1.8) 2-AAC Audio controller 1 (.45) Waliboxes 2-WB3 EST2 Long Surface Wallbox - Gray finish. For Semi -Flush mounting order trim Kit. See note 1. 20 (9) 2-WB3D Inner and outer doors for 2-WB3 wallbox. See note 1. 18 (8.2) 2-WB7 EST2 Double Wide Surface Wallbox - Gray finish. For semi -Flush mounting order trim Kit. See note 1. 39 (17.7) 2-WB7D Inner and outer doors for 2-WB7 wallbox. See note 1. 36 (16) RACCR Remote Audio Closet Cabinet. Red Finish 19 (8.6) RACCDR Door for RACCR wallbox 13 (5.9) t 2-LFK Long Semi -Flush Trim Kit for 2-WB3 wallbox. See note 1. 4 (1.8) 2-DFK Double Wide Semi -Flush Trim Kit for 2-WB7 box. See note 1. 5 (2.3) Note: 1. Standard finish is gray, red versions are available by adding suffix R to the catalog number e.g. 2-WB3R. lated Equipment SIGA-AA30 30 Watt Intelligent Audio Amplifier 2 (.9) SIGA-AA50 50 Watt Intelligent Audio Amplifier 2 (.9) SIGA-APS 6.4 Amp Power Supply 2.5 (1.1) SIGA-APS-220 6.4 Amp Power Supply 220Vac 2.5 (1.1) 1 B3125 125 Watt Audio Amplifier - 120V 50/60Hz 40 (18.2) 183250 250 Watt Audio Amplifier - 120V 50/60Hz 60 (27.3) 183125-240 125 Watt Audio Amplifier - 240V 50/60Hz 40 (18.2) 163250-240 250 Watt Audio Amplifier - 240V 50/60Hz 60 (27.3) ATP Amplifier Terminal Panel - 120V 14 (6.4) ATP -220 Amplifier Terminal Panel - 220V 14 (6.4) URSM Universal Riser Supervisory Module 2 (.9) RKU-36 19" Equipment Rack - 36.75 Usable Space 41.0875H x 22.38W x 18.5D. White finish. 81 (36.8) RKU-42 19" Equipment Rack - 42.0 Usable Space 46.3H x 22.38W x 18.5D. White finish. 89 (40.5) RKU-61 19" Equipment Rack - 61.25 Usable Space 65.6H x 22.38W x 18.5D. White finish. 114 (51.8) RKU-70 19" Equipment Rack - 70.0 Usable Space 74.4H x 22.38W x 18.5D. White finish. 130 (59.1) RKU-77 19" Equipment Rack - 77.0 Usable Space 81.4H x 22.38W x 18.5D. White finish. 150 (68.2) 85005-0093 2 of 6 Iss. 2 Y Catalog Number 2 -PPS 2-PPS/6A 2-PPS/220 2-PPS/6A-220 Agency Listings UL, ULC 18-12 AWG (0.75-2.5 mm2) Relative Humidity Line Power 120VAC 300Watts Max, 50/60Hz 220-240VAC 300 Watts Max., 50/60Hz Auxiliary Output Power 500mA Max. N/A 500mA Max. Supervision N/A Maximum Battery Size 2 of 12V17A 17 Amp hour in 2-WB3 and RACCR6 2 of 12V17A-17 Amp hour and 2 of 12V10A-10 Amp hour batteries in 2-WB7 (See Note 1) Notification Appliance Powe 3.5 Amps 24Vdc nominal Two 3.2 Amp Taps @24Vdc nominal 3.5 Amps @24Vdc nominal Two 3.2 Amp Taps @24Vdc nominal Note 1: For applications over 17 Amp hour and up to 24 Amp hour use BC -1. Catalog Number 2 -MCD Signature Data Circuit One Standard. Expandable to two with optional 2 -LCX Devices per SDC 96 Detectors, 94 Modules Maximum - 96 Isolators or relay Bases Terminal Wire Gauge 18-12 AWG (0.75-2.5 mm2) Relative Humidity 10-93% non condensing Temperature Rating 0°-49°C (32° - 120°F) Wiring Styles Class A or Class B Standard Auxiliary relays 1 Alarm Contact - 24Vdc 1 Amp 1 Trouble Contact - 24Vdc 1 Amp 1 Supervisory Contact - 24Vdc 1 Amp Catalog Number 2 -ACC Agency Listings UL, ULC Standby Power 24Vdc @65mA, 75mA with 2 -TEL Active Power 24Vdc @ 110mA Frequency Response 400Hz to 4kHz Output Level Distortion Wiring Configuration Two Audio Outputs Channels 1 Vrms <1% 2 Channels Class B or Class A Auxiliary Inputs Input Impedance Input Level Two Electrically isolated Inputs 10K Ohm 0.5 to 1.75Vrms Loading 15 Signature Amplifiers Max. 100 Ohm Max. 0.2pF Max. Supervision DC: 47K Ohm EOL or AC Audio Pulse Internally Generated Tones Slow Whoop Fast Whoop 1 kHz Steady 1 kHz March Time 1 kHz Morse U Hi -Lo Chime Horn Hi -Lo Horn Low Tone Temporal (3-3-3) Fast Hi -Lo Tone 1 kHz 20 Beats per min. 4-4 Code 1 kHz @ 120 Beats per min. Microphone Dynamic, Push - to - Talk 2 -MIC mounts on inner door of 2-WB3 or 2-WB7 Firefighters Telephone Max. Five remote phones active. 2 -TEL mounts on Inner door of 2-WB7 Relative Humidity 10-93% non condensing Temperature Rating 0°-49°C (32° - 120°F) Wiring Styles Class A or Class B 85005-0093 3 of 6 Iss. 2 { DATA OUT To Next Device (-) I I (+) 120VAC 50/60 Hz or 220VAC 50/60Hz 110011110 0000000000 0000000 00 SIGA-APS SIGA-AMP SIGA-AMP 00000000( 0000 000000 Typical Speaker Circuit 25Vrms or 70Vrms Audio Outputs UUULC Listed ���/ 47KS2iE0L UUULC Listed 1041 47Kf2 EOL From Signature Controller or Previous Signature Device (-) (+) DATA IN Typical Telephone Circuit. Style Y (Class B) Typical Two Channel Audio Panel interconnect lvrms or 25Vrms. Signature DATA OUT To All Signature Devices 120VAC 50/60 Hz or 220VAC 50/60Hz NE UM MI EU OM lid _NE N libil In SU an NM 0 Typical Audio Return (Class A Only) PHONE To Next Device RISER OUT or 47K0 EOL Resistor UL/ULC Listed 47Kf1 EOL Typical Speaker Circuit 25Vrms or 70Vrms Audio Outputs UUULC Listed ����{ --�— 471CO EOL 1144111 111111111 11~11111 Twisted -Shielded Pair Wire ® One Twisted Pair Wire, Shield optional Typical Audio Channel Return (Class A Only) 85005-0093 4 of 6 Iss. 2 In SU an NM 0 Typical Audio Return (Class A Only) PHONE To Next Device RISER OUT or 47K0 EOL Resistor UL/ULC Listed 47Kf1 EOL Typical Speaker Circuit 25Vrms or 70Vrms Audio Outputs UUULC Listed ����{ --�— 471CO EOL 1144111 111111111 11~11111 Twisted -Shielded Pair Wire ® One Twisted Pair Wire, Shield optional Typical Audio Channel Return (Class A Only) 85005-0093 4 of 6 Iss. 2 DATA OUT To Next Device (-) I (+) 0000000000 0000 0000 E00000000 0000000000 0000000000 00000 UUULC Listed 47K0 EOL Typical Two Channel 25Vrms or 70Vrms Audio Outputs SIGA-CC2 SIGA-CC2 SIGA-CC2 (-)- - (+) DATA IN From Signature Controller or Previous Signature Device Typical Telephone Circuit. Style Y (Class B) Typical Two Channel Audio Panel interconnect lvrms or 25Vrms. Signature DATA OUT To All Signature Devices • SIGACCI IMM MUM OMM ISM 11111 1 1 MN KM NI 111 OM EU Typical Audio Channel Return (Class A Only) PHONE To Next Device RISER OUT or 47KS) EOL Resistor UUULC Listed 47Kf EOL Typical Two Channel 25Vrms or 70Vrms Audio Outputs UUULC Listed 47Kf1 EOL SIGA-CC2 A Twisted -Shielded Pair Wire One Twisted Pair Wire, Shield optional Typical Audio Channel Return (Class A Only) 85005-0093 5 of 6 Iss. 2 0 su. O 0 O 0 Flan( lbw 2 -PPS series , I Power Supply 1 I..• • .1 1' " 1 2-MCM 1 :Main controller Module) 1._ 44 • LCX 1. Loop Exp nder Module. 1 i Is A1L410S.4rIV445r . $IGA-AAxx a,L Audio Amplifier • 1 8 All conduit knockouts 1/2" or 3/4" (1.3 cm or1.9 cm) Optional 2-LFK(R) Trim Strip for Semi -Flush Mounting 3/4' (1.9 cm) Wide 0 0 sa an 91.• 0 Do NOT Install conduit here if batterys are to be Installed in this cabinet. 2-W B3 299 in (7594 on) (10.67cmI 4.2 in 0 Side View 0 0 0 0 O 0 Optional 2-DFK(R) Trim Strip for Semi -Flush Mounting 3/4" (1.9 cm) Wide 0 0 0 O A 27.13 in (68.64 cm) 00 0Top 0 v0 00 0 BsttomVw Do NOT install conduit here if batterys are to be Installed in this cabinet. 16.2 in �— (41.15 cm)> 0 0 Top Yew 0 0 21.0 in (53.34 cm) Door-" 0 Front View • SIGA-APS Auxiliary Power Supply SIGA-AAxx • AudioAmplifier_ - - • SI9A-AAxx • Audio Amplifier 8 8 8 All conduit knockouts for 1/2- or 3/4" conduit (1.3 an or 1.9 cm) 1 Do NOT install conduit Bottom Yew in this area If batteries 0 0 0 installed in cabinet RACCR 2-W B7 $8.l6cm) 3.45 in 85005-0093 6 of 6 Iss. 2 5.33 in (13.53cm) 29.9 in (75.94 cm) V k'sour intention to keep erre product intimation current andaatxate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requiemenb. Al specifications ares bpdtodnangewithoutnate. For more Wor- mationccquestions relative to this Specification Sheet,contsd EST. 0 1997 EST Printed in U.S.A. Front View 8 1 10 ' 2 -PPS series ' 1' ' I Power Supply i2•MCM or SIGA-APS — " • • • 2-MCM Main controller I' . ., n --3i C-Arxx -- , `• Audio Amplifier .1 - Module „Loop Expander Module,. 1, ` Audio Amplifier .1 r - n 2- C •, L._ 944i4 gootWiler _ LI r --l( - X --r :... _Au:NAmplifier_ll L - -----•-j 1 r.---SIoA-74Cia - -•-, " �` Audl Amplifier 1.1 L... Audit; Amplifier LI All conduit knockouts 1/2" or 3/4" — (1.3cmor1.9cm) i.- BsttomVw Do NOT install conduit here if batterys are to be Installed in this cabinet. 16.2 in �— (41.15 cm)> 0 0 Top Yew 0 0 21.0 in (53.34 cm) Door-" 0 Front View • SIGA-APS Auxiliary Power Supply SIGA-AAxx • AudioAmplifier_ - - • SI9A-AAxx • Audio Amplifier 8 8 8 All conduit knockouts for 1/2- or 3/4" conduit (1.3 an or 1.9 cm) 1 Do NOT install conduit Bottom Yew in this area If batteries 0 0 0 installed in cabinet RACCR 2-W B7 $8.l6cm) 3.45 in 85005-0093 6 of 6 Iss. 2 5.33 in (13.53cm) 29.9 in (75.94 cm) V k'sour intention to keep erre product intimation current andaatxate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requiemenb. Al specifications ares bpdtodnangewithoutnate. For more Wor- mationccquestions relative to this Specification Sheet,contsd EST. 0 1997 EST Printed in U.S.A. ANNUNCIATORS AND GRAPHICS EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Models: LSRA Series, SMDN Series Back -lit Alpha -Numeric display Four Lines of 20 Characters Each Up to 52 Messages stored per annunciator on LSS4 Up to 352 Messages stored per annunciator on EST2 Up to 352 Messages stored per annunciator on IRC -3 Up to 746 messages stored per annunciator on FCC/DCPU Message Seeking Intelligence Software Filters for messages on controls Buffers up to 1000 Active System Events per annunciator 31 annunciators on IRC -3, EST2 and FCC PCPU RS -485 single line network Multiple Alpha -Numeric Display Annunciator Net- works Up to 7700' (2347 m) total network loop length Class B (Style 4) or Class A (Style 7) RS -485 wiring Printer Port (optional with LSRA) Available with Common Controls The EST remote Alpha -Numeric Display annunciators provide remote annunciation of system events and custom pro- grammed messages for EST2, IRC -3, FCC and LSS systems. Each annunciator contains a back lit Liquid Crystal Display for improved message visibility. The annunciators mount in standard North American 2 -gang or 4" square electrical boxes, European 100mm square box or within 19" RSAN rack mount or SAN type enclosures. Common Control features are available to allow maximum system flexibility. Display: The heart of the EST Alpha -Numeric annunciator is the Liquid Crystal Display. The display is a Targe back -lit, four line by twenty character per line, super -twist Liquid Crystal Display. All annunciators incorporate power saving features which automatically turn off the front panel back lighting. The lighting turns off after four minutes if there is no switch activity and no unacknowledged messages are waiting. The fire alarm systems battery capacity is maximized with this feature while providing clear visibility of system messages. Models: There are four models of Alpha -Numeric annuncia- tors. All include Normal, Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble LEDs. There are two push-button switches labeled BACK and NEXT/ACK. The BACK and NEXT/ACK switches acknowl- edge system event messages and allow the user to scroll through the event buffer. LSRA Series: The LSRA series of annunciators mount in standard North American 2 -gang or 4" square electrical boxes, European 100mm square box enclosures. The annunciators come with four feature LEDs {Normal, Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble) and two push-button Switches (BACK and NEXT/ ACK). LSRA-C: The LSRA-C annunciator supports common control functions in addition to the four feature LEDs and the BACK, NEXT/ACK push buttons found on the LSRA. RESET, ALARM SILENCE, TROUBLE SILENCE, and DRILUALL CALL push button switches provide common control functions. LSRA-C annunciators allow individual programming of front panel switch operation. The controls are enabled by entering a password via the annunciators front switches or by activating an optional remote enable/disable key switch. The LSRA-C annunciator mounts in a standard North American 2 gang or 4" square electrical box or European 100mm square box. SMDN: The SMDN annunciator has the same functions as the LSRA but mounts in any EST SAN cabinet or 19" RSAN-6 rack mount. The SMDN annunciator requires two SAN module mounting spaces. SMDN-C: The SMDN-C annunciator has functions similar to the LSRA-C but has an on board enable/disable key switch and mounts in any EST SAN cabinet or 19" RSAN-6 rack mount. The SMDN annunicator requires two SAN module mounting spaces. Custom Messages, Messa9e Seeking Intelligents: All four of the EST Alpha -Numeric annunciators are programmed with system event specific messages. Custom messages are programmed into each annunciator via a laptop PC. The messages display in response to specific system events. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY SARASOTA, FLA. 941-739-4200 Fax: 941-727-0740 CHESHIRE, CT. 203-699-3000 Fax: 203-699-3108 OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax: 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL: CANADA 905-270-1711 Fax: 905-270-9553 PITTSFIELD, ME. 207-487-3104 85006-0035 1 of 6 Iss. 1 ■ I Each IISS4 system annunciator will support up to 52 custom messages. If a custom message does not exist for an event, the annunciator will display the current system event and zone information. 3ch IRC -3 or EST2 system annunciator will support up to 352 istom messages. If a custom message does not exist for an event, the annunciator will display the current system event and zone information. Each FCC system annunciator will support up to 746 custom messages. If a custom message does not exist for a system event the annunciator uses its "Message Seeking Intelligence" to locate a message. The annunciator will seek messages at the FCC, DCPU for the event which has occurred. In this way the most descriptive information is always displayed on each annunciator. If no custom message is found, the system event and zone information displays. JUN 01 01:12:56 M000 JUN 01 01:20:32 M002 FIRE ALARM Custom Message Entered thru the PC No Message Waiting Typical Alarm Message Line 1 = Date, Time, # of unacknowledged messages Line 2 = Alarm Type Line 3 and 4 = Custom message on two lines Event Buffer: Each annunciator has a buffer that will hold active system events. The buffer is reviewed by pressing the 'EXT/ACK and BACK push-button switches. The amount of affer storage is determined by the system hosting the annun- ciator. The LSS4/52 annunciator will buffer 52 event mes- sages, the EST2, IRC -3 and FCC PCPU RS -485 single line system annunciator will buffer 352 event messages and the FCC DCPU RS -232 system annunciator will buffer 1000 event messages. Software Filters: Software filters add flexibility to EST LSRA(- C), SMDN(-C) annunciators. To avoid having unwanted messages displayed at an annunciator specific message routing capabilities are incorporated into the ESTLSRA(-C) and SMDN(-C). Annunciators may be defined to receive alarm messages, or supervisory messages or trouble messages only with other panel changes being filtered out. Combinations of messages may be programmed such as Alarm and Trouble messages displayed with all Supervisory messages filtered out. This allows annunciators to be custom configured for specific operations. Only the information which is required at a specific location will be annunciated. Auto Acknowledge: Auto Acknowledge is a software selectable feature that will automatically configure a specific annunciator to display active points only. As a system active point restores, the point message is removed from the annun- ciator display. Point restorations do not display on annuncia- tors with Auto Acknowledge enabled. The internal buzzer and printer port become disabled on annunciators with the Auto Acknowledge feature enabled. Internal Buzzer Silence: The LSRA/SMDN series annuncia- tors Internal Buzzer Silence feature provides an option that isables the internal buzzer. The silent operation is of particu- ar use in areas sensitive to noise. ENABLE/DISABLE: The common control function switches of the SMDN-C and LSRA-C are configurable to operate with the annunciators ENABLE/DISABLE mode of operation. By entering a password into the LSRA-C or through an ENABLE/ DISABLE key switch any combination of common control functions are programmable. As an example: The ENABLE/DISABLE function can be programmed to have the DRILUALL CALL switch function (active) in the DISABLED mode. All other common control switches would operate only in the ENABLED mode. Custom- izing of an annunciator for a specific operation is easily achieved with a laptop programmer. Printer Port: When not used for network connection the optional Printer/Programmer Port for LSRA (-C) and the integral RS -232 port on SMDN(-C) supports a serial printer (PT -1 S). The printer will provide a hard copy of the events which display on the annunciator it is connected to. The LSRA and SMDN annunciators are designed for annun- ciation only applications. The LSRA-C and SMDN-C are designed for areas where annunciation and common control is required. For simplicity of wiring the LSRA(-C) and SMDN(-C) connect to the IRC -3 single line RS -485 network directly, extra data wiring is not needed. Up to 31 annunciators are supported on a IRC -3 network loop. The IRC -3 regenerative mode operation is an integral part of the annunciator network. EST2 provides RS - 485 terminals allowing up to 31 annunciators to be connected. With LSS4 up to four annunciators connect to the backbone RS -485 communication path. For maximum flexibility FCC systems communicate with EST Alpha -Numeric annunciators over one, or multiple annunciator networks. The first LSRA(-C) or SMDN(-C) connects directly to the FCC head end. The connection can be made via a FCOM-485 located in the PCPU or a FCOM-232 located in the DCPU. For a single network communication path the LSRA(- C) and SMDN(-C) annunciators share a common RS -485 communication path with system network modules. Annuncia- tors and system modules connect via a FCOM-485 located in the PCPU. Multiple annunciator networks are easily configured using one or multiple FCOM-232 modules located in the DCPU. The annunciators can be connected in Class A configuration by connecting the first annunciator to the FCC DCPU FCOM-232 port card. The last annunciator connects to a second FCOM-232 port card on the same FCC DCPU. All annunciators between the first and last will be connected on their own RS -485 communication path. Up to 32 annunciators wire on a single network path. With single or multiple annuncia- tor networks system layout flexibility is unmatched. All FCC regenerative mode operation is maintained. The RS -485 will allow the annunciator network to achieve distances up to 7700 feet (2348m) using #18 AWG (1.00 mm2) twisted - pair wire! Each annunciator receives power from a nominal 24V dc riser. ULC, UL, CSFM 85006-0035 2 of 6 Iss. 1 Remote alpha -numeric annunciators shall be located through- out the facility as indicated on the plans. Each annunciator shall contain a supervised, back -lit, liquid crystal display with a minimum of four lines with twenty characters per line. Where required the annunciator shall contain a key -switch enabled reset, alarm silence, trouble silence and drill/all call switches. It must be possible through programming to determine which common control functions are active with the key -switch in the enable or disable position. It must be possible to have up to 31 of any type of LSRA (-C) and SMDN(-C) annunciators on a single annunciator network. It must provide regenerative functions in the event of communication failure. Each annunciator must be capable of supporting custom messages as well as system event annunciation. It must be possible to filter unwanted annunciation of trouble, alarm or supervisory functions. The annunciator must incorporate a power saving feature. The front panel back lighting must turn off after a minimum of four minutes if there is no switch activity and no unacknowledged messages waiting. Where required it must be possible to connect a printer directly to the annunciator through a dedicated RS -232 port. The printer to facilitate generation of hard copy records of system activity. The annunciators shall be mounted in stand-alone enclosures or integrated into the network panels as indicated on the plans. The annunciator must be able to automatically seek specific messages from other parts of the network if no message resides in its data base' = LSRA Series, 2 = LSRA-C Series, 3 = SMDN Series, 4 = SMDN-C Series Indicator/Switch Available On Function NORMAL LED 1, 2, 3, 4 Illuminates steady when system has no faults or off -normal conditions. ALARM LED 1, 2, 3, 4 Illuminates when an alarm condition exists on the system. SUPERVISORY LED 1, 2, 3, 4 Illuminates when a supervisory condition is received which is in its data base. A common supervisory (no message in display) turns on the supervisory LED, but does not need silencing. TROUBLE LED 1, 2, 3, 4 Illuminates when a trouble condition is received which is in its data base. A common trouble (no message in display) turns on the trouble LED, but does not need silencing. ALARM SILENCE LED 2, 4 Illuminates when the system wide alarm silence function is initiated. TROUBLE SILENCED LED 2, 4 Illuminates when the local trouble silence switch has been activated on LSRA-C or SMDN-C. DRILUALL CALL LED 2, 4 Illuminates when the system wide drill/general evacuation function has been initiated. NEXT/ACKNOWLEDGE 1, 2, 3, 4 Acknowledges the receipt of new messages at the LSRA(-C)/SMDN(-C) and automatically advances the next unacknowledged message. When there are no unacknowledged messages, the switch allows the event messages of active points to be viewed. BACK 1, 2, 3, 4 When there are no unacknowledged messages the back switch allows the user to move in reverse through the event messages. ENABLE/DISABLE KEY -SWITCH 2, 4 Either the ENABLE or DISABLE mode may be configured to enable or disable any combination of the front panel RESET, ALARM SILENCE, TROUBLE SILENCE and DRILUALLCALL switches. ENABLE/DISABLE Mode 2 Initiate the Enable or Disable mode of operation through a password entered into the Annunciator. Either the ENABLE or DISABLE mode may be configured to enable or disable any combination of RESET, ALARM SILENCE,TROUBLE SILENCE AND DRILUALLCALL RESET 2, 4 Directs the CM1(N), EST2, or PCPU master controller on the system to issue a system wide reset. ALARM SILENCE 2, 4 Directs the CM1(N), EST2, or PCPU master controller on the system to issue a system wide alarm silence. TROUBLE SILENCE 2, 4 Silences the LSRA-C/SMDN-C trouble buzzer after all messages have been acknowledged. DRILUALL CALL 2, 4 Directs the CM1 (N), EST2, or PCPU master controller on the system to issue system wide drill command. AUDIBLE INDICATORS 1, 2, 3, 4 The LSRA-C/SMDN-C internal buzzer will sound when an alarrn, trouble or unacknowledged message(s) exists on the system.The LSRA/SMDN internal buzzer will sound for unacknowledged messages only. LAMP TEST 2, 4 Pressing Trouble silence and Alarm Silence switches simultaneously starts a 15 second LED test sequence on the LSRA-C/SMDN-C. Indicator USA Canada Europe Normal LED Steady Steady Steady Alarm LED Steady Flashing until acknowledged Steady Trouble LED Steady Flashing until acknowledged Steacly Supervisory LED Steady Flashing until acknowledged Steady Buzzer UnAck Messages Trouble Pulses Steady Pulses Steady Pulses Steady till silenced then 1/2 second pulse as a silenced reminder every 14 seconds when silenced. 85006-0035 3of6lss.1 Catalog Number LSRA 2-LSRA LSRA-C 2-LSRA-C SMDN 2-SMDN SMDN-C 2-SMDN-C Dimensions (H, W, D) 5-5/8"H x 8-3/8"W x 1-5/16"D (14.29cm x 21.27cm x 3.33cm) 2 SAN Module Spaces counting Standard North American 2 -gang or 4" square electrical boxes, European 100mm square box Two SAN Module Slots in SAN -4, SAN -8 or RSAN-6 Operating Voltage Range 24V dc Nominal Operating Current 80 mA First Annunciator Communications Format EST2, LSS4, IRC -3, FCC from Poling CPU — RS -485 FCC from Display CPU — RS -232 Inter -Annunciator Communications Format RS -485 Style 4 (Class B) or Style 7 (Class A) Inter -Annunciator Communications Baud Rates 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 BPS Printer Port Format RS -232 with optional LSRA-232 RS -232 Style 4 (Class B) Printer Baud Rates 2400, 4800, 9600 Maximum Wire Length RS -232 RS -485 50' (15m) 7700' (2348m) on 18 AWG (1.00mm2) copper, 4500' (1372m) with LSS4 Maximum Annunciators per Circuit 32 Maximum Custom Messages Per Display FCC IRC -3, EST2 LSS4 746 messages + Intelligent message search 352 messages 88 messages/panel address 52 messages Finish EST Textured Gray Textured Black Ambient Operating Environment Temperature - 0° C to +49° C Relative Humidity - 93% @ 30° C Catalog Number Description Ship Wt. Ib. (Kg) LSRA Remote Display, semi -flush mounting. 4 (1.8) LSRA-C Remote Display, semi -flush mounting, with common control switches and enable/disable functions. 4 (1.8) 2-LSRA Same as LSRA but for EST2 Applications. 4 (1.8) 2-LSRA-C Same as LSRA-C but for EST2 Applications. 4 (1.8) SMDN Remote Display, SAN mounting. 2 (.9) SMDN-C Remote Display, SAN mounting, with common control switches and enable/disable key -switch. 2 (.9) 2-SMDN Same as SMDN but for EST2 Applications. 2 (.9) 2-SMDN-C Same as SMDN-C but for EST2 Applications. 2 (.9) Related Parts SAN -4 Recessed cabinet, provides 4 single SAN module spaces, 1 SAN -CPU space. 10 (4.5) SAN -8 Recessed cabinet, provides 8 single SAN module spaces, 2 SAN -CPU space. 14 (6.4) RSAN-6 19" Rack mount unit, Provides 6 single SAN module spaces, 1 SAN -CPU space. 1 (.45) BP -A SAN cabinet filler plate. 1 (.45) LSS4-AFP LSS4/52 Annunciator Fault Protector. 1 (.45) LSRA-232 Printer/programming port for LSRA series. 1 (.45) LSRA-RK Remote Enable/Disable keyswitch mounts in single -gang North American electrical box. 1 (.45) 85006-0035 4 of 6 In. 1 1 ' ` IRC -3 FCC EST2 LSS4 RS -485 DATA LINE CM 1(N) 0 LSRA(-C) CM2N(D) SMDN(C) • © JJj� 24Vdc dedicated riser (2 wires) RS -485 DATA LINE PcPU Fcu 1 PTI -S CM2N(D1..... ADDITIONAL 0 NETWORK DATA • LINES TO FIELD PANELS 24Vdc dedicated — riser (2 wires) RS -232 COMMUNICATIONS 50' (15.2 M) MAX. FROM DCPU DCPU IIS O ADDITIONAL CMDN(C)/ SMON(C) OR OTHER NETWORK DISPLAYS LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 0 —24Vdc LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 0 24Vdc RS -485 DATA LINE EST2 0 LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 0 "-----1 LSRA(-C) CM22NN(D) — SMDN(C) /r0 24Vdc PT1-S _CM�� 0 PT1-S LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 0 24Vdc I LSRA(-C) CM2N(D) — SMDN(C) —o PT1-S RS -485 COMMUNICATIONS LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 0 24Vdc LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 0 24Vdc PTI -S LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 0 24Vdc PT1-S LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 0 24Vdc PT1-S 24Vdc dedicated riser (2 wires) LSS4 TB4 LSS4-AFP •4 ❑ 2-LSRA(-C) 2-SMON(C) 0 PT1-S PT1-S 2-LSRA(-C) 2-SMDN(C) 0 24Vdc I -SS7 LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 0 24Vdc PT1-S LSRA(-C) CM2N(D) — SMDN(C) ♦ O' I 24Vdc LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 0 PT1-S LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 24Vdc ' PT1-S 24Vdc PTI -S To LSS4 or LSSPS 24Vdc Supply (2 wires) —RS -485 COMMUNICATIONS 4500' (1372 M) MAX. 418 AWG TWISTED PAIR LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 0 PT1-S LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 0 2-LSRA(-C) 2-SMON(C) 0 24Vdc ' PTI -S PT1-S LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) r0 24Vdc 1 PT1-S LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 0 24Vdc PT1-5 1 PT1-S RS -232 COMMUNICATIONS 50' ( 5.2 M) MAX. FROM DCPU DCPU FCz�zOM I I I1 70 ADDITIONAL CMON(C)/ SMDN(C) OR OTHER NETWORK DISPLAYS 2-LSRA(-C) 2-SMDN(C) 24Vdc ' PT1-S 0 PT1-S LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 0 RS -485 COMMUNICATIONS— LSRA(-C) LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) SMDN(C) 0 —24Vdc LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) r® 24Vdc PT1-S 24Vdc PT1-S LSRA(-C) SMDN(C) 24Vdc PT1-S ] 85006-0035 5 of 6 Iss. 1 85006-0035 6 of 6 Iss. 1 kisour intention bkeep the poActi foie ationanentandaoarale. We can nctcover specifcappfcations oranticipate al requirements. Al specifications arestbjectbchargewihaa notice. For more- oration ci quosoats relative totes Specicabon Sheet. canted ESL O 1997 EST Printed in U.S.A. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Model SIGA-PS INTEGRAL MICROPROCESSOR NON-VOLATILE MEMORY AUTOMATIC DEVICE MAPPING ELECTRONIC ADDRESSING ENVIRONMENTAL COMPENSATION INTELLIGENT DETECTOR WIDE 0.67% TO 3.77%/FT. SENSITIVITY RANGE PRE -ALARM SENSITIVITY SETTING IDENTIFICATION OF DIRTY OR DEFECTIVE DETECTORS AUTOMATIC DAY/NIGHT SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT TWIN RED/GREEN STATUS LEDS STANDARD, RELAY, and FAULT ISOLATOR MOUNTING BASES DESIGNED AND MANUFACTURED TO ISO 9001 STANDARDS EST's Signature Series Model SIGA-PS Intelligent Photoelec- tric Smoke Detector gathers analog information from its smoke sensing element and converts it into digital signals. The detector's on -board microprocessor measures and analyzes these signals. It compares the information to historical readings and time patterns to make an alarm decision. Digital filters remove signal patterns that are not typical of fires. Unwanted alarms are nearly eliminated. The microprocessor in each detector provides four additional benefits - Self -diagnostics and History Log, Automatic Device Mapping, Stand-alone Operation and Fast, Stable Communication. Self -diagnostics and History Log - Each Signature Series detector constantly runs self -checks to provide important maintenance information. The results of the self -check are automatically updated and permanently stored in the detector's non-volatile memory. This information is accessi- ble for review any time at the control panel, PC, or by using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. The information stored in the detector's memory includes: -detector type, serial number, and address. - date of manufacture, hours of operation, and last maintenance date. INTELLIGENT ANALOG DEVICES CI .52602YES" Intelligent Photoelectri Smoke Detector, SIGA-PS -current detector sensitivity values and the extent of environmental compensation. - original detector sensitivity values upon manufacturing. - number of recorded alarrns and troubles. -time and date of last alarm. -analog signal patterns just before the last alarm. - Up to 32 possible trouble codes which may be used to specifically diagnose faults. In the unlikely event that an unwanted alarm does take place, the history file can be called up to help isolate the problem and prevent it from happening again. Automatic Device Mapping - The loop controller learns where each device's serial number address is installed relative to other devices on the circuit. The "mapping" feature provides supervision of each device's installed location to prevent a detector from being reinstalled (after cleaning etc.) in a different location from where it was originally. The history log for the detector at its original location remains relevant and intact. The Signature Series Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature. With interactive menus and graphic support, the wired circuits between each device can be examined. Layout or "as -built" drawing information showing wire branches (T -taps), device types and their address are stored on disk for printing hard copy. This takes the "mystery" out of the installation. The preparation of "as -built' drawings is fast and efficient. Device mapping allows the Signature loop controller to discover: - unexpected additional device addresses. -missing device addresses. -changes to the wiring in the circuit. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY SARASOTA, FLA. 941-739-4200 Fax: 941-727-0740 CHESHIRE, CT. 203-699-3000 Fax: 203-699-3108 OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax: 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL: CANADA 905-270-1711 Fax: 905-270-9553 PITTSFIELD, ME. 207-487-3104 85001-0269 1 of 4 Isa 2 Standalone Operation - A decentralized alarm decision by the detector is guaranteed. On -board intelligence permits the detector to operate in stand-alone mode. If loop controller CPU communications fail for more than 4 seconds, all 'evices on that circuit go into stand-alone mode. The circuit its like a conventional alarm receiving circuit. Each detec- tor on the circuit continues to collect and analyze information from its surroundings. The detector alarms if the preset smoke obscuration level is reached. If the detector is mounted to a relay base, the relay operates. Fast Stable Communication - On -board intelligence means less information needs to be sent between the detector and the loop controller. Other than regular supervisory polling response, the detector only needs to communicate with the loop controller when it has something new to report. This provides very fast response time and allows a lower baud rate (speed) to be used for communication on the loop. The lower baud rate offers several advantages including: - less sensitivity to circuit wire characteristics. - less sensitivity to noise glitches on the cable. - less emitted noise from the analog wiring. -twisted or shielded wiring is not required. Electronic Addressing - The loop controller electronically addresses each detector, saving valuable time during system commissioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. Each detector has its own unique serial number stored in its "on -board memory". The loop controller identi- fies each device on the circuit and assigns a "soft" address to that device's serial number. If desired, detectors can be addressed using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. Environmental Compensation - Detection sensitivity is almost independent of its installed environment and its physical condition. Environmental compensation means the sensing element adapts to long-term changes caused by dirt, humidity, aging etc. It even compensates for small amounts of normal ambient smoke. Approximately six times an hour the detector adjusts and updates the sensitivity (% obscuration) baseline for its sensing element. Approxi- mately once every hour this information is written to its permanent memory. The detector's "learned" baseline is not lost, even when the detector is removed for cleaning. The detector's sensitivity setting selected by the installer floats up or down to remain constant relative to the changing baseline. This is called differential sensing. Sensitivity Range - The SIGA-PS Photoelectric Detector has a sensitivity range or window of 0.67% to 3.77%. The installer selects the detector's ALARM sensitivity level from five available settings within the range. Pre -Alarm - Pre -alarm warnings may alert local staff to a possible fire condition allowing them to investigate before entering into a full alarm condition which requires building evacuation. The wide sensitivity range permits the use of early warning pre -alarm values. The pre -alarm value is 75% if the alarm setting. Automatic Day/Night Sensitivity Selection - Signature Series detectors may be programmed for different sensitivi- ties during day and night periods. This allows the detector to be more sensitive during unoccupied periods when lower ambient background conditions are expected. Stability - The SIGA-PS detector's sensitivity remains stable in wind velocities up to 5,000 ft/min (25.3 m/sec). Ambient temperature has very little affect on the detector. The detector may be installed in rooms with ambient tempera- tures up to 120°F (49°C). Status LEDs - Twin LEDs are visible from any direction. A flashing GREEN led shows normal system polling from the loop controller. A flashing RED led means the detector is in alarm state. Both leds on steady shows alarm state - stand- alone mode. Normal green led activity is not distracting to building occupants, but can be quickly spotted by a mainte- nance technician. Duality and Reliability - EST detectors are manufactured in North America to strict international ISO 9001 standards. All electronics utilize surface mount technology (SMT) for smaller size and greater immunity to RF noise. A conformal coating is used for humidity and corrosion resistance. All critical contacts are gold plated. Signature Series detectors mount to North American 1 -gang boxes, 3-1/2" or 4" octagon boxes, and to 4" square electrical boxes 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep. They mount to European BESA and 1 -gang boxes with 60.3 mm fixing centers. 1 0.8' (20 mm) 2.0' (51 mm) 4.4' (112 mm) Each detector automatically identifies when it is dirty or defective and causes a "dirty detector" message. The detector's sensitivity measurement can also be transmitted to the loop controller. A sensitivity report can be printed to satisfy NFPA sensitivity measurements which must be conducted at the end of the first year and every two years thereafter. The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each detector and other pertinent messages. Single detectors may be turned off temporarily from the control panel. Availability of maintenance features is dependent on the fire alarm system used. Scheduled maintenance (Regu- lar or Selected) for proper detector operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ ULC 536 standards. The SIGA-PS detectors are compatible only with EST's Signature Loop Controller. 85001-0269 2of4lss.2 Although photoelectric detectors have a wide range of fire sensing capabilities they are best suited for detecting slow, smoldering fires. The table below shows six standard test fires used to rate the sensitivity of smoke and heat detectors. The table indicates that no single sensing element is suited for all test fires. EST recommends that this detector be installed according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. Test Fire Type of Detector SIGA-IS Ion SIGA-PS Photo SIGA-HRS and SIGA-HFS Rate -of -Rise/Fixed Temp. SIGA-PHS Photo/Heat 3D SIGA-IPHS lon/Photo/Heat 4D Open Wood optimum unsuitable optimum very suitable optimum Wood Pyrolysis suitable optimum unsuitable optimum optimum Smouldering Cotton very suitable optimum unsuitable optimum optimum Poly Urethane Foam very suitable very suitable suitable very suitable optimum n-Heptane optimum very suitable very suitable optimum optimum Liquid Fire without Smoke unsuitable unsuitable optimum very suitable very suitable The detector mounting bases accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2), #16 (1.0mm2), and #14 AWG (1.5mm2) wire sizes. Note: Sizes #16 AWG (1.0mm2) and #18 AWG (0.75mm2) are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Standard Detector Base, SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 DATA IN (-) Max. Resistance per Wire Must NOT Exceed 100 Term 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 Description Not Used DATA IN/OUT (+) Not Used DATA IN (-) Remote LED (-) Remote LED (+) Not Used DATA OUT (-) DATA OUT (-) DATA IN (+) From Signature Controller or Previous Device DATA OUT (+) To Next Device Isolator Detector Base, SIGA-IB, SIGA-1134 DATA IN (-) Term Description 1 Not Used 2 DATA IN/OUT (+) 3 DATA IN (-) 4 Not Used 5 Not Used 6 DATA OUT (-) 7 Not Used DATA OUT (-) DATA IN (+) From Signature Controller or Previous Device DATA OUT (+) To Next Device This detector will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your fire protection specialist. Relay Detector Base, SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 Common DATA IN (-) Normally- Normally - Closed Open Term 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Normally -Closed DATA IN/OUT (+) Common DATA IN (-) Not Used Normally -Open DATA OUT (-) CONTACT RATING 1.0 Amp @ 30 VDC (Pilot Duty) DATA OUT (-) DATA IN (+) From Signature Controller or Previous Device Tamper -Resist Lever A'm r - Break off to disable - (Located on Base) Access Slot for Tamper -Resist Mechanism DATA OUT (+) To Next Device This detector will NOT sense fires that start in areas where smoke cannot reach the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector to alarm it. 85001-0269 3of4Iss.2 All detector mounting bases have wiring terminals that are accessible from the "room -side" after mounting the base to the electrical box. The bases mount to North American -gang boxes and to 3-1/2" or 4" octagon boxes, 1-1/2" t38 mm) deep. They also mount to European BESA and 1 -gang boxes with 60.3 mm fixing centers. The SIGA-SB4, SIGA-RB4, and SIGA-IB4 mount to North American 4" sq. electrical boxes in addition to the above boxes. They include the SIGA-TS Trim Skirt which is used to cover the "mounting ears" on the base. Removing a detector from its base (except isolator base) does not affect other devices operating on the same circuit. Standard Base SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 - This is the basic mounting base for EST Signature Series detectors. The SIGA-LED Remote LED is supported by the Standard Base. Relay Base SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 - This base includes a relay. Normally open or closed operation is selected during installation. The dry contact is rated for 1 amp Cie 30 Vdc (pilot duty). The relay's position is supervised to avoid accidentally jarring it out of position. The relay base does not support the SIGA-LED Remote LED. The relay is controlled by the detector and operates as follows: - at system power -up or reset, the relay is de -energized. - when a detector is installed in the base with the power on, the relay energizes for 4 seconds, then de -energizes. - when a detector is removed from a base with the power on, the relay is de -energized. - when the detector enters the alarm state, the relay is energized. Isolator Base SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4 - This base includes a built-in line fault isolator. A detector must be installed for it to operate. The integral isolator relay is controlled by the detector or the loop controller. A maximum of 96 isolator bases can be installed on one circuit. The isolator base does not support the SIGA-LED Remote LED. The isolator operates as follows: - a short on the line causes all isolators to open within 23 msec. - at 10 msec intervals, beginning nearest the loop controller, the isolators close to provide the next isolator down the line with power. - when the isolator next to the short closes, it reopens within 10msec. In Class A operation, the process repeats beginning on the other side of the loop controller. Remote LED SIGA-LED - The remote LED connects to the SIGA-SB or SIGA-SB4 Standard Base only. It features a North American size 1 -gang plastic faceplate with a white finish and red alarm LED. SIGA-TS Trim Skirt - Supplied with 4" bases, it can also be ordered separately to use with the other bases to help hide surface imperfections not covered by the smaller bases. Catalog Number SIGA-PS Sensing Element Photoelectric - Light Scattering Principle Storage and Operating Environment Air Velocity Range: 0 to 5,000 ft/min (0 to 25.39 m/s) Operating Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) Storage Temperature: -4°F to 140°F (-20°Cto 60°C) Humidity: 0 to 93% RH, Non -Condensing_ Sensitivity Range ULI/ULC - 0.67% to 3.77% obscuration/foot User Selected Alarm Sensitivity Settings Most Sensitive: 1.0%/ft. More Sensitive: 2.0%/ft. Normal: 2.5%/ft. Less Sensitive: 3.0%/ft. Least Sensitive: 3.5%/ft. Pre -alarm Sensitivity 75% of Alarm Sensitivity Setting Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc (19 Vdc nominal) Operating Current Quiescent: 45pA 4) 19 V Alarm: 45pA @ 19 V Emergency Stand-alone Alarm Mode: 18mA Pulse Current: 100 pA (100 msec) During Communication: 9 mA maximum Construction & Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer - White Compatible Mounting Bases SIGA-SB, SIGA-SB4 Standard Base, SIGA-RB, SIGA-RB4 Relay Base, SIGA-IB, SIGA-IB4 Isolator Base LED Operation On -board Green LED - Flashes when polled On -board Red LED - Flashes when in alarm Both LEDs - Glow steady when in alarm (stand-alone) Compatible Remote Red LED (model SIGA-LED) Flashes when in alarm Compatibility Use With: SIGNATURE Loop Controller Address Requirements Agency Listings Uses 1 Device Address UL, ULC Catalog Number Description Carton Dims. Inches (mm) 5 (127)w x 3.6 (91)h x 5 (127)d Ship Wt. ibs (kg) .5 (.23) SIGA-PS Intelligent Photoelectric Detector - UL/ULC Listed Accessories SIGA-SB Detector Mounting Base - Standard 6 (152)w x 1 (25)h x 6 (152)d .2 (.09) SIGA-SB4 4" Detector Mounting base c/w SIGA-TS Trim Skirt SIGA-RB Detector Mounting Base w/Relay SIGA-RB4 4" Detector Mounting Base w/Relay c/w SIGA-TS Trim Skirt SIGA-IB Detector Mounting Base w/Fault Isolator SIGA-1B4 4" Detector Mounting Base w/ Fault Isolator c/w SIGA-TS Trim Skirt SIGA-LED Remote Alarm LED 3.8 (97)w x 2.8 (71)h lc 6 (152)d .2 (.09) I SIGA-TS Trim Skirt (supplied with 4" bases) 6 (152)w x 1 (25)h x6 (152)d j .1 (.04) 85001-0269 4 of 4 iss. 2 It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change with- out notice For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet. contact EST. 01996 EST Printed in U.S.A. INTELLIGENT ANALOG DEVICES EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY - Model SIGA-DH SUITABLE FOR HIGH AIR VELOCITY DUCT APPLICATIONS Up to 4000 ft/min. (20.3 m/sec.) with Photoelectric Detector. STANDARD SIGNATURE SERIES DETECTORS Designed for use with standard 4D, 3D, and Photoelectric Signature Series smoke detectors. Does not require "special" duct smoke heads. STANDARD, RELAY OR ISOLATOR DETECTOR BASE Detector "plugs -in" to base then easily installs into housing. INSTALL IN DUCTS UP TO 10 FT. (3.05 M) WIDE REMOTE LED AND TEST STATION ACCESSORI ES DESIGNED AND MANUFACTURED TO ISO 9001 STANDARDS The SIGA-DH Duct Smoke Detector Housing is specially engineered to exploit all the capabilities of Signature Series intelligent photoelectric and multisensor smoke detectors. EST Signature Series detectors gather analog information from each of their one or more sensing elements and converts it into digital signals. The detector's onboard microprocessor measures and analyzes these signals. It compares them to historical readings, time patterns and known characteristics to make an alarm decision. Digital filters and complex Algorithms are applied for optimum detector accuracy. Unwanted alarms are nearly eliminated. Each duct housing is packaged with detailed installation instructions, gaskets and a self-adhesive drilling template for locating and mounting the detector. The large access door is completely removable to allow fast detector installation and field wiring connections. The 16 gauge steel housing is finished in red baked enamel for easy identification. Five 1 - gang knockouts on the housing provide a convenient location for mounting intelligent Signature Series modules. The SIGA-DH Duct Housing comes with a 6 inch (150 mm) exhaust tube. Air sampling tubes are available in lengths from 8 inches (200 mm) to 10 feet (3048 mm) and must be ordered separately. Compatible smoke detectors, mounting bases, and accessories are listed in the Ordering Information. Refer to individual device catalog literature pages for more detail. Intelligent Duct Smoke Detectors Compatible Signature Series detectors include the SIGA- IPHS 4D Multisensor Smoke Detector with THREE INTEGRATED SENSING TECHNOLOGIES. It combines Ionization, Photoelectric and Heat sensors and processes and analyzes information from each sensor separately using dynamic filters. Also compatible are the SIGA-PHS 3D Multisensor Detector and the SIGA-PS Photoelectric Detector. The installer selects the alarm sensitivity level from the detector's wide 0.67 to 3.7% sensitivity range window. Five settings are available from within the range. Environmental Compensation Detection sensitivity for Signature Series detectors is almost independent of their installed environment and their physical condition. Each sensing element adapts to long-term changes caused by dirt, humidity, aging etc. Every 8.6 minutes the detector adjusts and updates the sensitivity (% obscuration) ambient baseline for its smoke sensing element. Every 68 minutes this information is written to its permanent memory. The detector's alarm sensitivity setting selected by the installer floats up or down to remain constant relative to the changing baseline. This is called environmental compensation. Identification of Dirty or Defective Detectors Each detector automatically identifies when it is polluted and causes a "dirty detector" message. The detector's sensitivity measurement can also be transmitted to the loop controller. This measurement satisfies NFPA sensitivity measurement EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY SARASOTA, FLA. 941-739-4200 Fax: 941-727-0740 CHESHIRE, CT. 203-699-3000 Fax: 203-699-3108 OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax: 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL: CANADA 905-270-1711 Fax: 905-270-9553 PITTSFIELD, ME. 207-487-3104 85001-0325 1 of 4 Iss. 1 requirements. The detector's internal components are self- super'ised. Up to 32 trouble codes are generated and displayed for diagnostics. Non -Volatile Memory signature Series smoke detectors permanently store a erial number, type of device and job number. Automatic updates of historic information including hours of operation, last maintenance date, number of alarms and troubles, time and date of last alarm are available. In the unlikely event that an unwanted alarm does take place, the history file can be called up to help isolate the problem and prevent it from happening again. Electronic Addressing & Device Mapping The Signature loop controller automatically addresses each detector to save valuable time during system commissioning. Setting complicated switches or dials on each intelligent device is not required. If desired, the detectors can be custom addressed using the Signature Series Data Entry Program. The wired circuits between each device can be examined using the data entry program along with the self -mapping feature built into all Signature Series devices. With its graphic support, layout or "as -built" drawing information showing wire branches (T -taps), device types and their address are stored on disk for printing hard copy. This takes the 'mystery' out of the installation. The preparation of "as - built" drawings is fast and efficient. Device mapping also allows the Signature loop controller to discover: - unexpected additional device addresses. - missing device addresses. - changes to the wiring in the data loop. stand -Alone Operation On -board intelligence permits Signature devices to operate in stand-alone mode. Should loop controller CPU communications fail for more than 4 seconds, all devices on that circuit (loop) go into stand-alone mode. The loop acts like a conventional alarm receiving circuit. Each detector on the loop continues to collect and analyze information from its surroundings. The detector alarms if the preset smoke obscuration level is reached and causes a loop alarm. If the detector is mounted to a relay base, the relay operates. Quality and Reliability EST detectors are designed and manufactured in North America to ISO 9001 standards. All electronics utilize surface mount technology (SMT) for smaller size and greater immunity to RF noise. A conformal coating is used for corrosion resistance and all critical contacts are gold plated. Duct Detector Air Sampling Tubes One air sampling inlet tube must be ordered for each duct smoke detector housing. Refer to Ordering Information for available lengths. Detector Mounting Bases One detector mounting base must be ordered for each duct smoke housing. Removing a detector from its base (except isolator base) does not affect other devices operating on the same data loop. Available bases are: Standard Base SIGA-SB - This is the basic mounting base. The SIGA-LED Remote LED is supported by the Standard Base. Relay Base SIGA-RB - This base includes a relay. Normally open or closed operation is selected during installation. The dry contact is rated for 1 amp @ 30 Vdc (pilot duty). The relay's position is supervised to avoid accidentally jarring it out of position. The Relay Base noes not support the SIGA- LED Remote LED. Relay bases are not affected or activated by the SIGA-DTS Duct Test Station. The relay is controlled by the detector and operates as follows: - at system power -up or reset, the relay is de -energized -when a detector is installed in the base with the power on, the relay energizes for 4 seconds, then de -energizes. - when a detector is removed from a base with the power on, the relay is de -energized. -when the detector enters the alarm state, the relay is energized. Isolator Base SIGA-IB - This base includes a built-in line fault isolator. A detector must be installed for it to operate. The integral isolator relay is controlled by the detector or the loop controller. A maximum of 96 isolator bases can be installed on one loop. The Isolator Base does not support the SIGA-LED Remote LED. Alarm LED Indicator The SIGA-LED Alarm Indicator is suitable for use with the SIGA-SB detector base only. A maximum of 1 can be operated for each detector. It features a red LED on a 1 - gang plastic plate and can be installed remote or directly on the SIGA-DH Duct Housing. Duct Test Station The SIGA-DTS Duct Test Station uses a key switch along with an integral intelligent input module mounted on a 2 - gang plastic plate. It is supplied with 2 keys and features a red alarm led. When the key is turned to the "TEST" position, the led lights and the integral module remotely inputs a duct detector test alarm. The actions and sequences programmed at the control panel to activate dampers and other smoke control measures, are easily tested. Detector relay bases are not affected or activated. Resetting the control panel clears the test and returns the system to normal. The key cannot be removed when in the "TEST' position. The Duct Test Station mounts to standard 2" deep North American 2 -gang and 4" square electric boxes and European 100 mm square boxes. Air Velocity Test Kit The 6263 -SG Air Velocity Test Kilt is specially designed to interface to the SIGA-DH Duct Housing. It is used to test or confirm the air velocity in HVAC ducts where the duct housing is installed. 85001-0325 2 of 4 Iss.1 SIGA-DH Duct Housing (NOTE: The SIGA-DH Duct Housing is NOT WEATHERPROOF or DUST TIGHT.) Dimensions 7-3/8" (188mm)W x 7" (178mm)H x 5" (127mm)D Material and Finish 16 Gauge Cold Rolled Steel, Red - Baked Enamel Conduit Knockouts Combination 1/2" & 3/4" Agency Approvals UL, ULC, MEA, CSFM Compatible Smoke Detectors SIGA-PS SIGA-PHS SIGA-IPHS Air Velocity Range 300 to 4000 ft/min. (1.5 to 20.3 m/sec) n. 300 to 5.0 Msec) /ec (1.5 to 5.) Smoke Sensing Element(s)Principle Photoelectric - Light Scattering Principle Photoelectric - Light Scattering Principle Heat - 135°F (57°C) Fixed Temperature Ionization -Unipolar Photoelectric - Light Scattering Heat - Alarmsat 65°F (35°C) change in ambient temp. Operating Environment Temperature: 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C) Humidity: 0 to 93% RH, non -condensing Temperature: 32 to 100°F (0 to 38°C) Humidity: 0 to 93% RH, non - condensing Storage Environment Temperature: -4 to 140°F (-20 to 60°C); Humidity: 0 to 93% RH, non •condensing ULI/ULC Sensitivity Range 0.67% to 3.77% obscuration/foot (305mm) 0.67% to 3.70% obscuration/foot (305mm) User Selected Alarm Sensitivity Settings Least Sensitive: 3.5%; Less Sensitive: 3.0%; Normal: 2.5%; More Sensitive: 2.0%; Most Sensitive: 1.0% Pre -alarm Sensitivity 75% of Alarm Sensitivity Setting Electrical and Physical Characteristics refer to individual detector catalog sheets Compatible Mounting Bases SIGA-SB Standard Base, SIGA-RB Relay Base, SIGA-IB Isolator Base Compatible Remote LED SIGA-LED (led flashes when in alarm) Controller Compatibility SIGNATURE Loop Controller Addressing Restrictions Uses 1 Input Device Address SIGA-DTS Duct Test Station Operating Current Standby = 250uA; Activated = 400uA Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc (19 Vdc nominal) Replacement Key p/n - P-037449 Storage and Operating Temperature 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C) Onboard LED Operation Red LED - flashes when in alarm or test state Mounting North American electric box: 2" deep 2 -gang or 4" square ; European electric box: 100 mm square Construction & Finish High Impact Engineered Plastic 2 -gang front plate - White Addressing Restrictions Uses 1 Module Address The SIGA-DH Duct Smoke Detector Housing requires a clear, flat, accessible area on the duct of at least 7-3/8" (188mm) W x 7" (175mm) H. The duct housing must be installed on ducts at least 8" (200mm) wide. To avoid the effects of stratification, install the detector housing a minimum of six (6) duct widths beyond any bends in the duct. Duct detectors are usually installed on the "supply" duct after the air filters; or in the "return" air stream prior to being diluted by outside air. Sample tube length must span the entire width of the air duct and the tube can be easily cut to any length. Inlet tubes longer than 3 ft.(900mm) must be supported at both ends. Duct Detectors continually sample air flow in a HVAC duct and initiate an alarm condition whenever smoke is detected. An alarm is activated when the quantity (percent obscuration) of combustion products in that air sample exceeds the detector's sensitivity setting. A of -Bend or other obstruction 6 Duct widths i Duct detector (minimum) location Z Duct width 85001-0325 3 of 4 Iss. 1 , Air vela city in the duct maintains the air flow that enters the detector housing through perforations in the air sampling inlet tube and discharges through the outlet exhaust tube. The detector housing must be installed with its INLET air sampling tube upstream of the EXHAUST tube. Before 'stalling the duct detector housing, test the duct air velocity .o verify it is within the limits of the Signature Smoke Detector that is being installed. Also verify that duct air relative humidity is within 0 and 93 percent. WARNING: Duct detectors have specific limitations. Duct Detectors ARE NOT a substitute for an open area smoke detector. Duct Detectors ARE NOT a substitute for early warning detection. Duct Detectors ARE NOT a replacement for a building's regular fire detection system. Smoke Detectors ARE NOT designed to detect toxic gases which can build up to hazardous levels in some fires. These devices WILL NOT operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruptions, EST suggests you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. The detector mounting bases and test station will accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2), #16 (1.0mm2), and #14 AWG (1.50mm2) wire sizes. Note: #14 AWG (1.5 mm2) is not recommended due to difficulty of installation. See Loop Controller and Detector catalog sheets for detailed wiring requirement specifications. EST recommends Duct Detectors always be installed in accordance with the latest recognized editions of local and national fire alarm codes. Catalog Number Description Ship Wt - Ib. (kg) SIGA-DH Duct Detector Housing 6.5 (3) 6261-001 8" (200mm) Air Sampling Inlet Tube .25 (.1) 6261-002 24" (600mm) Air Sampling Inlet Tube .5 (.2) 6261-003 42" (1060mm) Air Sampling Inlet Tube 1.6 (.8) 6261-006 78" (1980mm) Air Sampling Inlet Tube 2.2 (1) 6261-010 120" (3048mm) Air Sampling Inlet Tube 4.4 (2) SIGA-IPHS 4D Multisensor Detector .5 (.23) SIGA-PHS 3D Multisensor Detector .5 (.23) SIGA-PS Photoelectric Detector .5 (.23) SIGA-SB Standard Base .2 (.09) SIGA-RB Relay Base .2 (.09) SIGA-IB Isolator Base .2 (.09) SIGA-LED Alarm LED Indicator .2 (.09) SIGA-DTS Duct Test Station .4 (.18) 6263 -SG Duct Air Velocity Test Kit Detector .. Front Cover Adapter Plate 4 Base Locating Pin DO NOT BEND! Red exhaust tube connector Exhaust tube (supplied) Orient with slant directed away from airflow Smoke chamber Neoprene gasket attached to housing Air sampling tube connector Air inlet sampling tube (Orient with air holes facing airflow) Rubber stopper --must be installed into end of sampling tube 85001-0325 4of4lss.1 Airflow M Is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not COMM specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change with- out notice. For more ,formation or questions relative to this Specification Sheet. contact EST. 01996 EST Printed in U.S.A. INTELLIGENT ANALOG DEVICES f�� 1 E EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Models SIGA=270, SIGA-270P, SIGA-278 TRADITIONAL FAMILIAR APPEARANCE SIGA-270 models feature our familiar "teardrop" design with simple positive pull action and sturdy die-cast metal body. ONE STAGE (GA), TWO STAGE (PRE -SIGNAL), AND DOUBLE ACTION MODELS SIGA-270 models are available for one or two stage alarm systems. The single stage double action SIGA-278 features a rugged lexan housing with keyed reset mechanism. BREAK GLASS OPERATION An "up -front" visible glass rod on the SIGA-270 discourages tampering. INTELLIGENT DEVICE CAN INTEGRAL MICROPROCESSOR All decisions are made at the station allowing lower communication speed while substantially improving control panel response time. Less sensitive to line noise and loop wiring properties; twisted or shielded wire is not required. NON-VOLATILE MEMORY Permanently stores serial number, type of device, and job number. Automatically updates historic information including hours of operation, last maintenance date, number of alarms and troubles, and time and date of last alarm. AUTOMATIC DEVICE MAPPING Each station transmits wiring information to the loop controller regarding its location with respect to other devices on the circuit. ELECTRONIC ADDRESSING Permanently stores programmable address; there are no switches or dials to set. Addresses are downloaded from a PC, or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. STAND-ALONE OPERATION The station inputs an alarm even if the loop controller's polling interrogation stops. DIAGNOSTIC LEDS Status leds; flashing GREEN shows normal polling; flashing RED shows alarm state. Intelligent M nual Pull Stations ® SIGA-278 SIGA-270 SERIES DESIGNED FOR HIGH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE OPERATION Install in ambient temperatures up to 120°F (49°C). DESIGNED TO ISO 9001 STANDARDS Manufactured to strict international quality standards for highest reliability. The SIGA-270 and SIGA-278 series Manual Pull Stations are part of EST's Signature Series system. The SIGA-270 Fire Alarm Manual Pull Stations feature our very familiar "teardrop" shape. They are made from die-cast zinc and finished with red epoxy powder -coat paint complemented by aluminum colored stripes and markings. With positive pull - lever operation, one "pull" on the station handle breaks the glass rod and turns in a positive alarm, ensuring protection plus fool -proof operation. Presignal models (SIGA-270P) are equipped with a general alarm (GA) keyswitch for applications where two stage operation is required. The "up -front" highly visible glass rod discourages tampering. EST's double action single stage SIGA-278 station is a contemporary style manual station made from durable red colored lexan. To initiate an alarm, first lift the upper door marked "LIFT THEN PULL HANDLE", then pull the alarm handle. The integral microprocessor built into each Signature Series station provides four important benefits - Self -diagnostics and History Log, Automatiic Device Mapping, Stand-alone Operation and Fast, Stable Communication. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY SARASOTA, FLA. 941-739-4200 Fax: 941-727-0740 CHESHIRE, CT. 203-699-3000 Fax: 203-699-3108 OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax: 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL: CANADA 905-270-1711 Fax: 905-270-9553 PITTSFIELD, ME. 207-487-3104 85001-0279 1 of 4 Is& 3 Self -diagnostics and History Log - Each Signature Series manual station constantly runs self -checks to provide important maintenance information. The results of the self - check are automatically updated and permanently stored in the station's non-volatile memory. This information is Iccessible for review any time at the control panel, PC, or by using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. The information stored in the station's memory includes: -station serial number, address, and type. -date of manufacture, hours of operation, and last maintenance date. - number of recorded troubles, alarms, and time and date of last alarm. - Up to 24 possible trouble codes which may be used to specifically diagnose faults. Automatic Device Mapping - The loop controller learns where each device's serial number address is installed relative to other devices on the circuit. The loop controller keeps a "map" of the Signature Series devices connected to it. The Signature Series Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature. With interactive menus and graphic support, the wired circuits between each device can be examined. Layout or "As -Built" drawing information showing wire branches (T -taps), device types and their address are stored on disk for printing hard copy. This takes the "mystery" out of the installation. The preparation of "As -Built" drawings is fast and efficient. Device mapping allows the Signature loop controller to liscover: - unexpected additional device addresses. -missing device addresses. -changes to the wiring in the circuit. Stand-alone Operation - A decentralized alarm decision by the manual station is guaranteed. On -board intelligence permits the station to operate in stand-alone mode. If loop controller CPU communications fail for more than 4 seconds, all devices on that circuit go into stand-alone mode. The circuit acts like a conventional alarm receiving circuit. Each station will still transmit an alarm if its operating lever is "pulled". Fast Stable Communication - Built-in intelligence means less information needs to be sent between the station and the loop controller. Other than regular supervisory polling response, the station only needs to communicate with the loop controller when it has something new to report. This provides very fast control panel response time and allows a lower baud rate (speed) to be used for communication on the circuit. The lower baud rate offers several advantages including: - less sensitivity to circuit wire characteristics. - less sensitivity to noise glitches on the cable. - less emitted noise from the analog wiring. -twisted or shielded wiring is not required. Diagnostic LEDs - Twin LEDs provide visual indication of normal and alarm conditions. They are visible only when the station is removed from the mounting box. A flashing GREEN led shows normal system polling from the loop controller. A flashing RED led means the station is in alarm state. Both leds on steady shows alarm state - stand-alone mode. Quality and Reliability - EST modules are manufactured in North America to strict international ISO 9001 standards. All electronics utilize surface mount technology (SMT) for smaller size and greater immunity to RF noise. A conformal coating is used for humidity and corrosion resistance. Signature Series manual stations are compatible only with EST's Signature Loop Controller. Single -stage Signature Series fire alarm manual pull stations mount to North American 2-1/2" (64 mm) deep 1 -gang boxes. Two stage presignal (270P) models require 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1 -gang covers. The terminals are suited for #14 to #18 AWG (1.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2) wire size. EST recommends that these fire alarm stations be installed according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. Electronic Addressing - The loop controller electronically addresses each manual station, saving valuable time during system commissioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. Each station has its own unique serial number stored in its "on -board memory". The loop controller identifies each device on the loop and assigns a "soft" address to each serial number. If desired, the stations can be addressed using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/ Service Tool. Compatible Electrical Box Back Plate Toggle Switch Key -Latch Cover Release ItO Glass Rod Figure 1. SIGA-278 installation 85001-0279 2 of 4 Iss. 3 Compatible Electrical Box Cover Release Screw Back Plate Toggle Switch Glass Rod Release Lever Figure 2. SIGA-270, SIGC-270F, SIGC-270B installation Compatible Electrical Box Cover Release Screw Back Plate Toggle Switch Glass Rod Release Lever Figure 3. SIGA-270P, SIGC-270PB installation The fire alarm station's terminal block accepts #18 AWG (0.75mm2), #16 (1.0mm2), and #14 AWG (1.50mm2) wire sizes. Note: Sizes #16 AWG (1.0mm2) and #18 AWG (0.75mm2) are preferred for ease of installation, See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Wiring Notes 1 Refer to Signature Loop Controller manual for maximum wire distance. 2. All wiring is power limited and supervised. REAR VIEW of SIGA-278 Red LED (Alarm/Active) ( DATA IN (+) 1 l DATA IN (-) From Signature Controller or Previous Device TB2 8 7 • • • ► 0 04 3 2 1 A 0 Green LED (Normal) DATA OUT (+)1 DATA OUT (-) Jy To Next Device Figure 4. Single Stage Systems REAR VIEW of SIGA-270P, SIGC-270PB Red LED i Green LED (Alarm/Active) ® 1 (Normal) 1 DATA IN (+) — DATA OUT (+) 1 DATA IN (-)DATA OUT (-) From Signature Controller To Next Device or Previous Device A Figure 5. Two Stage Systems 85001-0279 3of4lss.3 This device will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. The operating characteristics of the fire alarm stations are determined by their sub -type code or "Personality Code". NORMALLY -OPEN ALARM - LATCHING (Pesonality Code 1) is assigned by the factory; no user configuration is required. The device is configured for Class B IDC operation. An ALARM signal is sent to the loop controller when the station's pull lever is operated. The alarm condition is latched at the station. To test (or reset) the station simply open the station and operate the exposed switch. The SIGA-270 series are opened with a tool; the SIGA-278 requires the key which is supplied with that station. The station's automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defective and causes a trouble message. The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each Signature series device and other pertinent messages. Single devices may be deactivated temporarily, from the control panel. Availability of maintenance features is dependent on the fire alarm system used. Scheduled maintenance (Regular or Selected) for proper system operation should be planned to meet the require- ments of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. Catalog Number SIGA-270 SIGC-270F SIGC-270B SIGA-270P SIGC-270PB SIGA-278 Description Single Action - One Stage Single Action -Two Stage (Presignal) Double Action - One Stage Addressing Requirements Uses 1 Module Address Uses 2 Module Addresses Uses 1 Module Address Operating Current Standby = 250pA Activated = 400pA Standby = 396pA Activated = 680pA Standby = 250pA Activated = 400pA Construction & Finish Diecast Zinc - Red Epoxy w/Aluminum markings Liman - Red w/White markings Type Code Factory Set Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc (19 Vdc nominal) Storage and Operating Environment Environment Operating Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) Storage Temperature: -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C) Humidity: 0 to 93% RH LED Operation On -board Green LED - Flashes when polled On -board Red LED - Flashes when in alarin Both LEDs - Glow steady when in alarm (stand-alone) 270-GLR Compatibility Use With: Signature Loop Controller Agency Listings UL, ULC (note 1) Note 1: SIGC-270F, SIGC-270B and SIGC-270PB are ULC listed only. Suffix "F" indicates French markings. Suffix "B" indicates English/French bilingual markings. Catalog Number Description Carton Dims - inches(mm) Ship Wt. Ibs (kg) SIGA-270 One Stage Fire Alarm Station, English Markings - UUULC Listed 5 (127)w x 3.6 (91)h x 5 (127)d 1 (.5) SIGC-270F One Stage Fire Alarm Station, French Markings - ULC Listed SIGC-2706 One Stage Fire Alarm Station, French/English Markings - ULC Listed SIGA-270P Two Stage (Presignal) Fire Alarm Station, English Markings - UL/ULC Listed SIGC-270PB Two Stage (Presignal) Fire Alarm Station, French/English Markings - ULC Listed SIGA-278 Double Action (One Stage) Fire Alarm Station, English Markings - UUULC Listed ACCESSORIES 32997 GA Key w/Tag - for pre -signal station (CANADA ONLY) n/a .1 (.05) 276-K2 GA Key - for pre -signal station (USA ONLY) 27165 12 Glass Rods - for SIGA-270 series (CANADA ONLY) 270-GLR 20 Glass Rods - for SIGA-270 series (USA ONLY) 276-GLR 20 Glass Rods - for SIGA-278 series 27193-11 Surface Mount Box, Red - for SIGA-270 series only 3 (76)w x 4.75 (121)h x 2.5 (64)d 1 (.6) 276B -RSB Surface Mount Box, Red - for SIGA-278 only 85001-0279 4 of 4 Iss. 3 It is our intention to keep the product Information current and accurate. We can not coyer specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change with- out notice. For more intonation or questions relative to this Specification Sheet. contact EST. ®1996 EST Printed in U.S.A. INTELLIGENT ANALOG DEVICES EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Models SIGA-CT1, SIGA-CT2 & SIGA-MCT2 MULTIPLE APPLICATIONS Including Alarm, Alarm with delayed latching (retard) for waterflow applications, Supervisory, and Monitor. The installer selects one of four (4) "personality codes" to be downloaded to the module through the loop controller. PLUG-IN (UIO) OR STANDARD 1 -GANG MOUNT UIO versions allow quick installation where multiple modules are required. The 1 -gang mount version is ideal for remote locations that require a single module. AUTOMATIC DEVICE MAPPING Signature modules transmit information to the loop controller regarding their circuit locations with respect to other Signature devices on the wire loop. ELECTRONIC ADDRESSING Programmable addresses are downloaded from the loop controller, a PC, or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/ Service Tool. There are no switches or dials to set. INTELLIGENT DEVICE WITH MICROPROCESSOR All decisions are made at the module to allow lower commu- nication speed with substantially improved control panel response time and less sensitivity to line noise and loop wiring properties; twisted or shielded wire is not required. NON-VOLATILE MEMORY Permanently stores serial number, type of device, and job number. Automatically updates historic information including hours of operation, last maintenance date, number of alarms and troubles, and time and date of last alarm. STAND-ALONE OPERATION The module makes decisions and inputs an alarm from initiating devices connected to it even if the loop control- ler's polling interrogation stops. (Function availability dependent upon control panel.) DIAGNOSTIC LEDs Flashing GREEN shows normal polling; flashing RED shows alarm/active state. HIGH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE OPERATION Install in ambient temperatures up to 120°F (49°C). DESIGNED TO ISO 9001 STANDARDS All Signature products are manufactured to strict interna- tional quality standards to ensure highest reliability. • The SIGA-CT1 Single Input Module and SIGA-CT2/SIGA- MCT2 Dual Input Modules are intelligent analog addressable devices used to connect one or two Class B normally -open Alarm, Supervisory, or Monitor type dry contact Initiating Device Circuits (IDC). The actual function of these modules is determined by the "personality code" selected by the installer. This code is downloaded to the module from the Signature loop controller during system configuration. The input modules gather analog information from the initiating devices connected to them and convert it into digital signals. The module's on -board microprocessor analyzes the signal and decides whether or not to input an alarm. The SIGA-CT1 and SIGA-CT2 mount to standard North American 1 -gang electrical boxes, making them ideal for locations where only one module is required. Separate I/O and data loop connections are made to each module. The SIGA-MCT2 is part of the UIO family of plug-in Signa- ture Series modules. It functions identically to the SIGA-CT2, but takes advantage of the modular flexibility and easy installation that characterizes all UIO modules. Two- and six - module UIO motherboards are available. All wiring connec- tions are made to terminal blocks on the motherboard. UIO assemblies may be mounted in EST enclosures. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY SARASOTA, FLA. 941-739-4200 Fax: 941-727-0740 CHESHIRE, CT. 203-699-3000 Fax: 203-699-3108 OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax: 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL: CANADA 905-270-1711 Fax: 905-270-9553 PITTSFIELD, ME. 207-487-3104 85001-0241 1 of 4 Iss. 4 SIGA-CT1 and SIGA-CT2: modules mount to North American 21/2" (64 mm) deep 1 -gang boxes and 11/2" (38 mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1 -gang covers. The terminals are suited for #14 to #18 AWG (1.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2) wire size. Compatible Electrical Box Wall Plate. white (1 -Gang) ocsa,a S. AcheWe French Lobel SIGA-MCT2: mount the UIO motherboard inside a suitable EST enclosure with screws and washers provided. Plug the SIGA-MCT2 into any available position on the motherboard and secure the module to the motherboard with the captive screws. Wiring connections are made to the terminals on the motherboard (see wiring diagram). UIO motherboard termi- nals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2) wire size. UIO Motherboard 6-32 Self -tapping screws fl -- 6 Flat washers �---Cabinet or electrical enclosure Captive screws Electronic Addressing - The loop controller electronically addresses each module, saving valuable time during system commissioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. Each module has its own unique serial number stored in its on -board memory. The loop controller identifies each device on the loop and assigns a "soft" address to each serial number. If desired, the modules can be addressed using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. EST recommends that this module be installed according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. The Signature Series modules are compatible only with ESTs Signature Loop Controller. The duty performed by the SIGA-CT1 and SIGA-CT2/MCT2 is determined by their sub -type code or "Personality Code". The code is selected by the installer depending upon the desired application and is downloaded from the loop controller. One (1) personality code can be assigned to the SIGA-CT1. Two (2) personality codes can be assigned to the SIGA-CT2/ MCT2. Codes 1, 2, 3 and 4 can be mixed on SIGA-CT2/ MCT2 modules only. For example, personality code 1 can be assigned to the first address (circuit A) and code 4 can be assigned to the second address (circuit B). NORMALLY -OPEN ALARM - LATCHING (Personality Code 1) - Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either circuit A or B or both for Class B normally open dry contact initiating devices such as Pull Stations, Heat Detectors, etc. An ALARM signal is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed. The alarm condition is latched at the module. NORMALLY -OPEN ALARM - DELAYED LATCHING (Personality Code 2) - Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either circuit A or B or both for Class B normally - open dry contact initiating devices such as Waterflow Alarm Switches. An ALARM signal is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed for approximately 16 seconds. The alarm condition is latched at the module. NORMALLY -OPEN ACTIVE - NON -LATCHING (Personal- ity Code 3) - Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either circuit A or B or both for Class B normally -open dry contact monitoring input such as from Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc. An ACTIVE signal is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed. The active condition is not latched at the module. NORMALLY -OPEN ACTIVE - LATCHING (Personality Code 4) - Assign to one or both circuits. Configures either circuit A or B or both for Class B normally open dry contact monitoring input such as from Supervisory and Tamper Switches. An ACTIVE signal is sent to the loop controller when the input contact is closed. The active condition is latched at the module. Catalog Number Description Ship Wt. lbs (kg) SIGA-CT1 Single Input Module - UUULC Listed 0.4 (0.15) SIGA-CT2 Dual Input Module - UUULC Listed 0.4 (0.15) SIGA-MCT2 Dual Input Plug-in (UIO) Module - UL Listed 0.1 (0.05) Related Equipment 27193-11 Surface Mount Box - Red, 1 -gang 1.0 (0.6) 27193-16 Surface Mount Box - White, 1 -gang 1.0 (0.6) SIGA-UIO2R Universal Input -Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs - 2 Module Positions 0.32 (0.15) SIGA-UIO6R Universal Input -Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs - 6 Module Positions 0.62 (0.28) SIGA-U106 Universal Input -Output Module Board - 6 Module Positions 0.56 (0.25) 85001-0241 2 of 4 Iss. 4 Modules will accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2), #16 (1.0mm2), and #14 AWG (1.50mm2) wire sizes. UIO versions will also accept #12 AWG (2.5mm2). Note: Sizes #16 AWG (1.0mm2) and #18 AWG (0.75mm2) are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Initiating (Slave) Device Circuit Wire Specifications Maximum Allowable Wire Resistance 50 ohms (25 ohms per wire) per Circuit Maximum Allowable Wire Capacitance 0.1pF per Circuit For Design Reference: Wire Size Maximum Distance to EOLR #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) 3,930 ft (1,198 m) #16 AWG (1.00 mm2) 6,225 ft (1,897 m) #14 AWG (1.50 mm2) 9,900 ft (3,018 m) APP Q4 Style 8 (Class 8) TB2 Typical N.O. Initiating Device UL/ULC U ted 47KA EOL Red LED I Green LED (Alarm/Active) o o I (Normal) Red LED (Alarm/Active) Typical N.O. Initiating Device UL/ULC Usted 47Kr1 EOL INPUT 1 INPUT HH prith MINN 711111gi. T82 Style B (Class B) DATA IN (+) 1 DATA IN (-) From Signature Controller or Previous Device TB1 SIGA-CT1 DATA OUT (+) 1 DATA OUT (-) To Next Device NOTES Maximum 25 Ohm resistance per wire. Maximum #12 AWG (2.5 mm2 ) wire; Minimum #18 AWG (0.75 mm2 ). Standard 1 -gang version: Maximum #14 AWG (1.5mm2) wire. Min. #18 (0.75mm2). Refer to Signature controller installation sheet for wiring specifications. ® Maximum 10 Vdc @ 350 mA The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come with TB14. All wiring is supervised and power -limited. 7 These modules will not support 2 -wire smoke detectors. ULAILC Listed 47KA EOL This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. I DATA IN (+) 1 DATA IN (-) From Signature Controller or Previous Device TB1 SVGA-CT2 Typical NO Initialing Device UL/ULC Usted 47Kr2 EOL Green LED (Normal) DATA OUT (+) DATA OUT (-) To Next Device 1 30 ULNLC Listed 47KA EOL SIGANCT2 SIGA-UIO(R) sodas mothsrbosrd Data In + Signature Data Circuit Data Out + Green LED (Normal) Red LED (Active) 2 No connections or jumper settings required for SIGA-MCT2. SIGA-MCT2 85001-0241 3of41ss.4 Catalog Number SIGA-CT1 SIGA-CT2 SIGA-MCT2 Description Single Input Module Dual Input Module Type Code 48 (factory set) 4 sub -types (personality codes) are available 49 (factory set) 4 sub -types (personality codes) are available Address Requirements Uses 1 Module Address Uses 2 Module Addresses Operating Current Standby = 250pA; Activated = 400pA Standby = 396pA; Activated = 680pA Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc (19 Vdc nominal) Construction High Impact Engineering Polymer Mounting North American 21/2" (64 mm) deep 1 -gang boxes and 11/2" (38 mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1 -gang covers UIO2R/6R/6 Motherboard Storage and Operating Environment Operating Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) Storage Temperature: -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C) Humidity: 0 to 93% RH LED Operation On -board Green LED - Flashes when polled On -board Red LED - Flashes when in alarm/active Both LEDs - Glow steady when in alarm (stand-alone) Compatibility Use with Signature Loop Controller Agency Listings UL, ULC (See Ordering Table) The Signature Series intelligent analog -addressable system from Edwards Systems Technology is an entire family of multi -sensor detectors and mounting bases, multiple -function input and output modules, network and non -network control panels, and user-friendly maintenance and service tools. Analog information from equipment connected to Signature devices is gathered and converted into digital signals. An onboard microprocessor in each Signature device measures and analyzes the signal and decides whether or not to input an alarm. The microprocessor in each Signature device 'rovides four additional benefits — Self -diagnostics and History og, Automatic Device Mapping, Stand-alone Operation and Fast, Stable Communication. Self -diagnostics and History Log — Each Signature Series device constantly runs self -checks to provide important maintenance information. The results of the self -check are automatically updated and permanently stored in its non-volatile memory. This information is accessible for review any time at the control panel, PC, or using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. The information stored in device memory includes: • Device serial number, address, and type. • Date of manufacture, hours of operation, and last maintenance date. • Number of recorded alarms and troubles. • Time and date of last alarm. • Up to 32 possible trouble codes which may be used to specifically diagnose faults. Automatic Device Mapping —The Signature Data Controller (SDC) learns where each device's serial number address is installed relative to other devices on the circuit. The SDC keeps a "map" of all Signature Series devices connected to it. The Signature Series Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature. With interactive menus and graphic support, the wired circuits between each device can be examined. Layout or "As -Built" drawing information showing branch wiring (T -taps), device types and their address are stored on disk for printing hard copy. This takes the 'mystery' out of the installation. The preparation of "As -Built" drawings is fast and efficient. Device mapping allows the Signature Data Controller to discover: • Unexpected additional device addresses. • Missing device addresses. • Changes to the wiring in the circuit. lost Signature modules use a 'personality code' selected by the installer to determine their actual function. Personality codes are downloaded from the SDC during system configuration and are indicated during device mapping. Standalone Operation — A decentralized alarm decision by the device is guaranteed. Onboard intelligence permits the device to operate in standalone (degrade) mode- If Signature loop controller CPU communications fail for more than 4 seconds, all devices on that circuit go into standalone mode. The circuit acts like a conven- tional alarm receiving circuit. Each Signature device on the circuit continues to collect and analyze information from its slave devices. When connected to a panel utilizing standalone operation, modules with their 'personality' set as alarm devices (IDC) will alarm should their slave alarm -initiating device activate. Fast Stable Communication — Built-in intelligence means less information needs to be sent between the device and the Signature Data Controller (SDC). Other than regular supervisory polling response, Signature devices only need to communicate with the SDC when they have something new to report. This provides very fast control panel response and allows a lower baud rate (speed) to be used for communication on the circuit. The lower baud rate offers several advantages including: • Less sensitivity to circuit wire characteristics. • Less sensitivity to noise glitches on the cable. • Less emitted noise from the analog wiring. • Twisted or shielded wiring is not required. Diagnostic LEDs — Twin LEDs on most Signature devices provide visual indication of normal and alarm -active conditions. A flashing green LED shows normal system polling. A flashing red LED means the module is in alarm -active state. Both LEDs on steady indicates alarm -active state — standalone mode. Testing & Maintenance — Automatic self-diagnosis identifies when a Signature device is defective and causes a trouble message. The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each device and other pertinent information. Single devices may be turned off temporarily, from the control panel. Scheduled mainte- nance (Regular or Selected) for proper system operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. Quality and Reliability — EST Signature devices are manufactured in North America to strict international ISO 9001 standards. All electronics utilize surface mount technology (SMT) for smaller size and greater immunity to RF noise. A conformal coating is used for humidity and corrosion resistance. 85001-0241 It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cower specific applications or antktipale afi requirements. All specifications are subject to change with- out notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet. contact EST. 4 of 4 Iss. 4 ®1998 EST Printed in U.S.A. INTELLIGENT ANALOG DEVICES 4 Z 4Q EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Model SIGA-CR, SIGA-MCR, SIGA-CRR, SIGA-MCRR PROVIDES ONE NO/NC CONTACT (SIGA-CR/MCR) Form "C" dry relay contact can be used to control external appliances such as door closers, fans, dampers etc. ALLOWS GROUP OPERATION OF SOUNDER BASES The SIGA-CRR/MCRR reverses the polarity of its 24 Vdc output, thus activating all Sounder Bases on the data loop. PLUG-IN (UIO) OR STANDARD 1 -GANG MOUNT UIO versions allow quick installation where multiple modules are required. The 1 -gang mount version is ideal for remote locations that require a single module. AUTOMATIC DEVICE MAPPING Signature modules transmit information to the loop controller regarding their circuit locations with respect to other Signature devices on the wire loop. ELECTRONIC ADDRESSING Programmable addresses are downloaded from the loop controller, a PC, or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/ Service Tool. There are no switches or dials to set. INTELLIGENT DEVICE WITH MICROPROCESSOR All decisions are made at the module to allow lower communication speed with substantially improved control panel response time and less sensitivity to line noise and loop wiring properties; twisted or shielded wire is not required. NON-VOLATILE MEMORY Permanently stores serial number, type of device, and job number. Automatically updates historic information including hours of operation, last maintenance date, number of alarms and troubles, and time and date of last alarm. DIAGNOSTIC LEDs Flashing GREEN shows normal polling; flashing RED shows alarm/active state. HIGH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE OPERATION Install in ambient temperatures up to 120°F (49°C). DESIGNED TO ISO 9001 STANDARDS All Signature products are manufactured to strict interna- tional quality standards to ensure highest reliability. The Control Relay Module and the Polarity Reversal Relay Module are part of EST's Signature Series system. They are intelligent analog addressable devices available in either plug-in (UIO) versions, or standard 1 -gang mount versions. The SIGA-CR/MCR Control Relay Module provides a Form "C" dry relay contact to control external appliances such as door closers, fans, dampers etc. This device does not provide supervision of the state of the relay contact. Instead, the on -board microprocessor ensures that the relay is in the proper ON/OFF state. Upon command from the loop control- ler, the SIGA-CR/MCR relay activates the normally open or normally -closed contact. The SIGA-CRR/MCRR Polarity Reversal Relay Module provides a Form "C" dry relay contact to power and activate a series of SIGA-AB4 Audible Sounder Bases. Upon command from the Signature loop controller, the SIGA-CRR reverses the polarity of its 24 Vdc output, thus activating all Sounder Bases on the data loop. Standard -mount versions (SIGA-CR and SIGA-CRR) are installed to standard North American 1 -gang electrical boxes, making them ideal for locations where only one module is required. Separate I/O and data loop connections are made to each module. Plug-in UIO versions (SIGH -MCR and SIGA-MCRR) are part of the UIO family of plug-in Signature Series modules. They function identically to the standard mount versions, but take advantage of the modular flexibility and easy installation that characterizes all UIO modules. Two- and six -module UIO motherboards are available. All wiring connections are made to terminal blocks on the motherboard. UIO assemblies .may be mounted in EST enclosures. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY SARASOTA, FLA. 941-739-4200 Fax: 941-727-0740 CHESHIRE, CT. 203-699-3000 Fax: 203-699-3108 OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax: 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL: CANADA 905-270-1711 Fax: 905-270-9553 PITTSFIELD, ME. 207-487-3104 85001-0239 1 of 6 Iss. 4 SIGA-CR and SIGA-CRR: modules mount to North American 21/2" (64 mm) deep 1 -gang boxes and 11/2" (38 mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1 -gang covers. The terminals are suited 3r #14 to #18 AWG (1.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2) wire size. Compatible Electrical Box Wan Plate, White (1 -Gang) SIGA-MCR and SIGA-MCRR: mount the UIO motherboard inside a suitable EST enclosure with screws and washers provided. Plug the module into any available position on the motherboard and secure the module to the motherboard with the captive screws. Wiring connections are made to the terminals on the motherboard (see wiring diagram). UIO motherboard terminals are suited for #12 to #18 AWG (2.5 mm2 to 0.75 mm2) wire size. UIO Motherboard 6-32 Self -tapping screws I1- 6 Flat washers Cabinet or electrical enclosure Captive screws Electronic Addressing - The loop controller electronically addresses each module, saving valuable time during system commissioning. Setting complicated switches or dials is not required. Each module has its own unique serial number stored in its on -board memory. The loop controller identifies each device on the loop and assigns a "soft" address to each serial number. If desired, the modules can be addressed using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. EST recommends that this module be installed according to latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. The operation of Signature Series control relays is deter- mined by their sub -type code or "Personality Code." Personality Code 8: CONTROL RELAY (SIGA-CR/MCR) - Dry Contact Output. This setting configures the module to provide one Form "C" DRY RELAY CONTACT to control Door Closers, Fans, Dampers, etc. Contact rating is 2.0 amp @ 24 Vdc; 0.5 amp @ 120 Vac (or 220 Vac for non -UL applications). Personality Code 8 is assigned at the factory. No user configuration is required. Personality Code 8: POLARITY REVERSAL RELAY MODULE (SIGA-CRR/MCRR). This setting configures the module to reverse the polarity of its 24 Vdc output. Contact rating is 2.0 amp @ 24 Vdc (pilot duty). Personality Code 8 is assigned at the factory. No user configuration is required. The Signature Series modules are compatible only with EST's Signature Loop Controller. This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruption, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. The module's automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defective and causes a trouble message. The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each module and other pertinent messages. Single modules may be turned off (deactivated) temporarily, from the control panel. Availability of maintenance features is dependent on the fire alarm system used. Scheduled maintenance (Regu- lar or Selected) for proper system operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ ULC 536 standards. 85001-0239 2 016 Iss. 4 Catalog Number SIGA-CR SIGA-MCR SIGA-CRR SIGA-MCRR Description Control Relay Polarity Reversal Relay Type Code Personality Code 8 (Factory Set) Address Requirements Uses 1 Module Address Operating Current Standby = 100pA Activated =100pA Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc (19 Vdc nominal) Relay Type and Rating Form "C" 24 VDC = 2 amps (pilot duty) 120 Vac = 0.5 amps 220 Vac (non -UL) = 0.5 amps Mounting North American 2Y2" (64 mm) deep 1 -gang boxes and 1Y2' (38 mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1 -gang covers Plugs into UIO2R, UIO6R or U106 Motherboards North American 21/2" (64 mm) deep 1 -gang boxes and 1Y2" (38 mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1 -gang covers Plugs into UIO2R, UIO6R or U106 Motherboards Construction & Finish High Impact Engineering Polymer Storage and Operating Environment Operating Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) Storage Temperature: -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to 60°C) Humidity: 0 to 93% RH LED Operation On -board Green LED - Flashes when polled On -board Red LED - Flashes when in alarm/active Compatibility Use With: Signature Loop Controller Agency Listings UL, ULC (See Ordering Table) Catalog Number Description Ship Wt. lbs (kg) SIGA-CR Control Relay Module (Standard Mount) - UUULC Listed 0.4 (0.15) SIGA-MCR Control Relay Module (UIO Mount) - UL Listed 0.18 (0.08) SIGA-CRR Polarity Reversal Relay Module (Standard Mount) - UUULC Listed 0.4 (0.15) SIGA-MCRR Polarity Reversal Relay Module (UIO Mount) - UL Listed 0.18 (0.08) RELATED EQUIPMENT 27193-21 Surface Mount Box - Red, 1 -gang 1 (0.6) 27193-26 Surface Mount Box - White, 1 -gang 1 (0.6) SIGA-UIO2R Universal Input -Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs - 2 Module Positions 0.32 (0.15) SIGA-UIO6R Universal Input -Output Module Board w/Riser Inputs - 6 Module Positions 0.62 (0.28) SIGA-U106 Universal Input -Output Module Board - 6 Module Positions 0.56 (0.25) 85001-0239 3 of 4 Isa 4 Modules will accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2), #16 (1.0mm2), and #14 AWG (1.50mm2) wire sizes. UIO versions will also accept #12 AWG (2.5mm2). Note: Sizes #16 AWG (1.0mm2) and #18 AWG (0.75mm2) are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Listed 24 VDC Nominal Power Supply Signature Controller SIGA-AB4 Audible Base Jw1 JW2 SIGA-AB4 Audible Base JW1 JW2 • • • SIGA-CR 0 0 • • • SIGA-CRR 0 0 SIGA-CRR Schematic Power In Power Out Pobdty Reverses +�� When MM./cited�l! (.\ l; SIGA-AB4 Audible Base (JW1 JW2` Optional SIGA-CR for disabling/disconnecting sounder base Power M Power Out Polarity reverses — + (+ —y when activated. Notes 10 Refer to the Signature controller installation sheet for wiring. One Pair of Wires (24 Vdc power). ® One Pair of Wires (Signature Data). A, Single Wire (24 Vdc power). ® The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come with TB14. ® The SIGA-U106 does not come with TB8 through TB13. ® Supervised and power -limited. ® Power -limited when connected to a power - limited source. If the source is nonpower - limited, maintain a space of 1/4 inch from power -limited wiring or use FPL, FPLP, FPLR, or an equivalent in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 9 Maximum #12 AWG (2.5 mm2 ) wire; Minimum #18 AWG (0.75 mm2 ). Green LED (Normal) 10 End -of -Line Relay must monitor and report Red LED (Active) power supply trouble to control panel. 11 Class B Data wiring may be "T -tapped." Optional SIGA-MCRR or SIGA-MCR for disablingldisconnecting an audible base. Signature Data Data Out Circuit Data Out ULJULC Listed 24 Vdc power supply AA Signature Data Circuit Data In 4 3 2 1 4 SIGA-CRR 6254A-003 EOL Relay L • • • SIGA-CT1 0 0 SIGA-MCRR Audible Bases JW1 ti JW2 7 3 6254A-003 EOL Relay required for supevision 0 O or Fa normal operatmn -\ For General Fire Y� Alarm Operation 1 r 1234 1234 11 1111 J 8 7 • • • SIGA-CT1 4 3 2 1 SIGA-MCRR SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard No connections required for SVGA-MCRR. Other modules may require connections. Green LED (Normal) Red LED (Active) No connections required for SIGA-MCRR. Other modules may require connections. No connections required for SI3aA-MCRR. Other modules may require connections. 85001-0239 4 of 6 Iss. 4 SIGA-MCRR 473 REMMi _ , [*a -.r44.,a ca I AAAA MMrktll°O e e o e I TB15 YEE'ee YE J 8 7 • • • SIGA-CT1 4 3 2 1 SIGA-MCRR SIGA-UIO(R) series motherboard No connections required for SVGA-MCRR. Other modules may require connections. Green LED (Normal) Red LED (Active) No connections required for SIGA-MCRR. Other modules may require connections. No connections required for SI3aA-MCRR. Other modules may require connections. 85001-0239 4 of 6 Iss. 4 Modules will accept #18 AWG (0.75mm2), #16 (1.Omm2), and #14 AWG (1.50mm2) wire sizes. UIO versions will also accept #12 AWG (2.5mm2). Note: Sizes #16 AWG (1.Omm2) and #18 AWG (0.75mm2) are preferred for ease of installation. See Signature Loop Controller catalog sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifications. Normally- Normally - Open Common Closed TB2 8 7 6 O to D Red LED _� O 0 (Alarm/Active) 4 3 2 1 DATA IN (+) > 1 DATA IN (-) > TB1 dD®®® From Signature Controller or Previous Device Data In + Data Out A SIGA-CR Control Relay Green LED (Normal) DATA OUT (+) DATA OUT (-) J} To Next Device Normally Open Common Normally Closed 1234 Green LED (Normal) Red LED (Active) No connections required for SIGA-MCR. Other modules may require connections. SIGA-MCR Control Relay Notes 0 Refer to Signature Loop Controller Installation Sheet for wiring specifications. SIGA-CR/MCR must be installed within the same room as the device it is controlling. ® The SIGA-UIO6R and the SIGA-UIO2R do not come with TB14. ® The SIGA-U106 does not come with TB8 through TB13. A Supervised and power -limited. ® Power -limited when connected to a power - limited source. If the source is nonpower - limited, maintain a space of 1/4 inch from power -limited wiring or use FPL, FPLP, FPLR, or an equivalent in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 7) UIO: Maximum #12 AWG (2.5mm2) wire. Min. #18 (0.75mm2). Standard 1 -gang version: Maximum #14 AWG (1.5mm2) wire. Min. #18 (0.75mm2). No connections required for SIGA-MCR. Other modules may require connections. 85001-0239 5 of 6 Is& 4 The Signature Series intelligent analog -addressable system from Edwards Systems Technology is an entire family of multi -sensor detectors and mounting bases, multiple -function )put and output modules, network and non -network control anels, and user-friendly maintenance and service tools. Analog information from equipment connected to Signature devices is gathered and converted into digital signals. An onboard microprocessor in each Signature device measures and analyzes the signal and decides whether or not to input an alarm. The microprocessor in each Signature device provides four additional benefits — Self -diagnostics and History Log, Automatic Device Mapping, Stand-alone Operation and Fast, Stable Communication. Self -diagnostics and History Log — Each Signature Series device constantly runs self -checks to provide important maintenance information. The results of the self -check are automatically updated and permanently stored in its non- volatile memory. This information is accessible for review any time at the control panel, PC, or using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool. The information stored in device memory includes: • Device serial number, address, and type. • Date of manufacture, hours of operation, and last maintenance date. • Number of recorded alarms and troubles. • Time and date of last alarm. • Up to 32 possible trouble codes which may be used to specifically diagnose faults. Automatic Device Mapping —The Signature Data Controller 'SDC) learns where each device's serial number address is stalled relative to other devices on the circuit. The SDC keeps a "map" of all Signature Series devices connected to it. The Signature Series Data Entry Program also uses the mapping feature. With interactive menus and graphic support, the wired circuits between each device can be examined. Layout or "As - Built" drawing information showing branch wiring (T -taps), device types and their address are stored on disk for printing hard copy. This takes the 'mystery' out of the installation. The preparation of "As -Built' drawings is fast and efficient. Device mapping allows the Signature Data Controller to discover: • Unexpected additional device addresses. • Missing device addresses. • Changes to the wiring in the circuit. Most Signature modules use a 'personality code' selected by the installer to determine their actual function. Personality codes are downloaded from the SDC during system configu- ration and are indicated during device mapping. Standalone Operation — A decentralized alarm decision by the device is guaranteed. Onboard intelligence permits the device to operate in standalone (degrade) mode. If Signature loop controller CPU communications fail for more than 4 seconds, all devices on that circuit go into standalone mode. The circuit acts like a conventional alarm receiving circuit. Each Signature device on the circuit continues to collect and analyze information from its slave devices. When connected to a panel utilizing standalone operation, modules with their 'personality' set as alarm devices (IDC) will alarm should their slave alarm -initiating device activate. Fast Stable Communication — Built-in intelligence means less information needs to be sent between the device and the Signature Data Controller (SDC). Other than regular supervi- sory polling response, Signature devices only need to communicate with the SDC when they have something new to report. This provides very fast control panel response and allows a lower baud rate (speed) to be used for communica- tion on the circuit. The lower baud rate offers several advan- tages including: • Less sensitivity to circuit wire characteristics. • Less sensitivity to noise glitches on the cable. • Less emitted noise from the analog wiring. • Twisted or shielded wiring is not required. Diagnostic LEDs — Twin LEDs on most Signature devices provide visual indication of normal and alarm -active condi- tions. A flashing green LED shows normal system polling. A flashing red LED means the module is in alarm -active state. Both LEDs on steady indicates alarm -active state — standalone mode. Testing & Maintenance — Automatic self-diagnosis identifies when a Signature device is defective and causes a trouble message. The user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state of each device and other pertinent information. Single devices may be turned off temporarily, from the control panel. Scheduled maintenance (Regular or Se- lected) for proper system operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the Authority Having Juris- diction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC CAN/ ULC 536 standards. Quality and Reliability — EST Signature devices are manufac- tured in North America to strict international ISO 9001 stand- ards. All electronics utilize surface mount technology (SMT) for smaller size and greater immunity to RF noise. A conformal coating is used for humidity and corrosion resistance. 85001-0239 It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. Ws can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. Alt specifications are subplot t0 change with- out notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact EST. 6 of 6 Iss. 4 01998 EST Printed in U.S.A. FIRE ALARM SIGNALING APPLIANCES Self -Synchronizing Design UL 1971 Temporal Output ` Listed EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Integrity Family SYNCHRONIZED TEMPORAL AUDIBLE OUTPUT Select for self -synchronizing temporal signal or steady tone. External "synch -control" module is not required. SYNCHRONIZED STROBE FLASH Self -synchronizing flash from multiple strobes improves the safety for photosensitive people. External "synch -control" module is not required. MOUNTS TO 2 -GANG BOX Flush mount to standard North American 2 -gang or 4 inch square electric box. ADJUSTABLE HIGH OR LOW dBA OUTPUT Select for 98 dBA or 94 dBA sound output. TRUE HORN TONE Low pitch "growling" sound demands attention. ADA/UL1971/ULC LISTED STROBE All strobe models provide "Equivalent Facilitation" allowed under ADA Accessibility Guidelines, satisfy NFPA codes and are UL1971 listed as Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired. EASY INSTALLATION A universal mounting plate allows Integrity to be wired then left hanging "free" to allow easy V.I. and testing before it is fastened to electrical box. SCREW TERMINAL WIRE CONNECTION Large terminals speed installation and accept up to #12 AWG (2.5mm2) wire. FIELD CHANGEABLE LENS MARKINGS Standard "FIRE" strobe marking/language is easily changed with optional snap -on Lens Kits. UL/ULC RATED OUTDOOR OPTION EST's 757 Integrity Series Temporal Horn and Temporal Horn/ Strobe are perfect for life safety applications as an alert and alarm signal, especially to notify the hearing impaired. The horn emits a piercing low frequency sound that is easily heard above moderate ambient noise levels. Integrity's rugged plastic housing is available with a red or white textured finish. With its ingenious mounting sub -plate, the horn is firmly held in place with a single screw ensuring a quick, attractive installation. A separate trim plate is not required for flush mounting. Separate terminals to accept up to #12 AWG (2.5mm2) wire are provided for field connection of the strobe and horn. Matching Integrity Speakers, Chimes, and Strobe combinations are also available. HORN: During installation, the horn is configured for steady or temporal tone signal and either low or high dB output. When temporal output is selected all horns on a common 2 -wire circuit are self -synchronized (see specifications). External "sync - control" modules are not requvred. Integrity Series horns emit a low frequency "growling" tone to really demand attention. Select 'Nab' output for 98 dBA; choose 'low' output for 94 dBA. (Average measurement at 10 feet (3.05 M) in anechoic chamber.) STROBE: EST strobes are self -synchronized to flash at 1 fps across their full operating voltage range. The strobe operates on any existing 2 -wire signal circuit. Separately installed "sync - control" modules are not required. A very small portion of the population have a condition which may cause them to become disoriented from multiple random flashes of light. This risk is minimized with Integrity's strobe. The flash from EST strobes can be noticed from almost any position in the room, corridor, or large open space. The output is controlled using a specially shaped reflector to disperse the light in all viewing directions. EST strobes are UL1971 listed with both wall and ceiling cd intensity ratings (see Specifications). This is useful in areas where the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) permits ceiling mount strobes. 757 Series Temporal Horn/Strobes are shipped with wall mount style "FIRE" lens markings. Where ceiling mount, other languages or different lens markings are required, optional LKW and LKC series Lens Marking Kits are offered. Lens marking sleeves snap right over the strobe lens providing quick, easy, change. Consult EST for availability of other languages or special markings. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY SARASOTA, FLA. 941-739-4200 Fax: 941-727-0740 CHESHIRE, CT. 203-699-3000 Fax: 203-699-3108 OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax: 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL: CANADA 905-270-1711 Fax: 905-270-9553 PITTSFIELD, ME. 207-487-3104 85001-0341 1 of 4 Iss. 2 Suggested sound pressure levels in each signaling zone for alert or alarm signals are at least 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level wing a duration of at least 60 seconds, whichever is greater, 3asured 5' (1.5 m) above the floor. The average ambient pound level is the RMS, A -weighted sound pressure measured over a 24-hour period. Doubling the distance from the signal to the ear will theoretically cause a 6 dB reduction in the received sound pressure level. The actual effect depends on the acoustic properties of materials in the space. A 3 dBA difference is a "just noticeable" change in volume. Typical Sound Output Distribution dBA measured at 10 ft. in anechoic chamber 757 Series Temporal Horn (`HIGH' output) -90 105 95 85 75 dBA 75 85 95 105 —Temporal Horn (dBA) i nese guidelines are based on ANSI/NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code (1993). When applied and installed in accordance with that code, EST strobes meet or exceed the illumination produced by the ADA specified 75 candela (cd) strobe at 50 feet. However, optimum performance is obtained by providing "Equivalent Facilitation" as allowed by the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines [ADA(AG)]. Contact EST for exact spacing requirements. Non -Sleeping Rooms Use ONE Wall Mounted - EST Model: Up to 20' x 20' (6.1 x 6.1m) 757-5A 15 cd 0 70 mA or 757-7A* 15/75 cd IQ 105 mA Up to 30' x 30' (9.1 x9.1m) 757-3A30cd @ 105mA Up to 50' x 50' (15.2 x 15.2m) 757-8A 110 cd © 219 mA Corridors Any Length x Max. 20' (6.1 m) Wide Wall Mounted - EST Model: 757-5A or 757-7A" spaced 0 100' (30.5 m) never exceeding 151(4.5 m) from end wall • Model 757-7A is rated at 15 cd (wall or ceiling mount) per UL1971, and 75 cd per UL1638 thereby meeting ADA on axis only requirements of 75 cd. Non -Sleeping Rooms and Corridors: EST strobes rated at less than 110 cd per UL1971 are intended for use in non - sleeping areas only. Install them 80" (2.03 m) above floor level OR within the space between 6" (150 mm) to 24" (610 mm) below the ceiling, whichever is lower. No point in any space (including corridors) required to have strobes shall be more than 50' (15.2 m) from the signal (in the horizontal plane). The '10 cd strobe should be used in non -sleeping areas only when room exceeds 40' x 40' (12.2 m x 12.2 m). In large rooms or spaces (such as auditoriums) that exceed 100' (30.4 m) across and without obstructions more than 72" (1.8 m) above the finished floor, strobes may be placed around the perimeter, spaced a maximum of 100' (30.4 m) apart, in lieu of suspending them from the ceiling. Sleeping Rooms: EST model 757-8A is rated at 110 cd. It is intended for use in sleeping rooms and should be installed along with a smoke detector. It must be wall mounted at least Sleeping Rooms Use ONE Wall Mounted - EST Model: Any Size 757-8A 110 cd @ 219 mA 80" (2.03 m) above floor level, but no closer than 24" (610 mm) to the ceiling. The distance from the strobe to the pillow must not exceed 16' (4.8 m). In any case, audible signals cannot have a sound level Tess than 75 dBA at 10' (3m) per NFPA 72 and cannot exceed 120 dBA per ADA (130 dBA per NFPA 72) at the minimum hearing distance to audible appliance. Audible signals shall be installed with the top of the device above the floor not less than 90" (2.3 m) and below the finished ceilings at least 6" (150 mm) (per NFPA 72). Strobes must be used to supplement audible signals wherever the average ambient sound level exceeds 105 dBA. Combination AudibleNisible signals must be installed per NFPA guidelines established for strobes. ADA suggests that the following areas may require Visual Alarm Signals: • rest rooms, meeting rooms, and other general usage areas. • lobbies, hallways, and other common use areas. • sleeping rooms intended for use by persons with hearing impairments. • work areas used by a person with a hearing impairment (per Title 1 of ADA). (Based in part on 1995 Canada National Building Code) The fire alarm signal sound pressure level shall not exceed 110 dBA in any normally occupied area. The sound pressure level from an audible signal in a floor area used for occupancies other than residential occupancies shall be not less than 10 dBA above the ambient noise, and never less than 65 dBA. The sound pressure level in sleeping rooms from an audible signal shall not be less than 75 dBA when any intervening doors between the device and the sleeping room are closed. Audible signal devices shall be installed not less than 1.8 m to the center of the device above the floor (per CAN/ULC S524). The fire alarm audible signal shall be supplemented by fire alarm strobes in any floor area where the ambient noise level exceeds 87 dBA, or where the occupants of the floor area use ear protective devices, are located within an audiometric booth, or are located within sound insulating enclosures. This also applies to assembly occupancies in which music and other sounds associated with performances could exceed 100 dBA. Strobes shall be installed in a building so that the flash from not less than one device is visible throughout the floor area or portion thereof in which they are installed. For maximum safety, EST recommends that strobes be installed as per the guide- lines shown here under Strobe Application. 85001-0341 2 of 4 Iss.2 Standalone Synchronization Characteristics (note 5) Strobe flash at 1 per second within 200 milliseconds on common circuit Hom pulses at temporal rate within 200 milliseconds on common circuit Operating Volts Strobe: 20-24 Vdc Continuous; Hom: 20-24 Vdc Continuous Hom Output (note 1) Anechoic: High Setting -104 dBA (peak)/98 dBA (avg); Low Setting - 99 dBA (peak)/94 dBA (avg) Reverberent: High Setting - 85 dBA (continuous)/82 dBA (temporal); Low Setting - 82 cifilA (continuous)/75 dBA (temporal) Hom Current High Output: 40 mA @ 24 Vdc; 55mA @ 24 Vrms FWR; Low Output: 20 mA @ 24 Vdc; 28 mA @ 24 Vrms FWR Rated Strobe Output - candela (cd) 757-5A- 757-7A- 757-3A- 757 -8A - UL 1971 15 cd wall mount only 15 cd wall 15 cd ceiling 30 cd wall 15 cd ceiling 110 cd wall 60 cd ceiling UL 1638 not UL 1638 rated 75 cd 30 cd 120 cd ULC S526 15 cd 75 cd 30 cd 120 cd Average Strobe Current (note 2) 24Vdc: 70mA 20Vdc: 80mA 24Vdc: 105mA 20Vdc:125mA 24Vdc: 105mA 20Vdc: 125mA 24Vdc: 219mA 20Vdc:272mA Peak Strobe Current (note 2) 20Vdc: 208mA 20Vdc: 208mA 20Vdc: 208mA 20Vdc: 352mA Average Strobe Current (note 3) 24Vdc: 84mA 20Vdc: 99mA 24Vdc: 168mA 20Vdc: 204mA 24Vdc: 168mA 20Vdc: 204mA • 24Vdc: 325mA 20Vdc: 355mA Peak Strobe Current (note 3) 20Vdc: 360mA 20Vdc: 594mA 20Vdc: 594mA 20Vdc: 876mA Strobe Marking Supplied with LKW-1 "FIRE' red letters, vertical both sides (Wall Mount) - see LKW and LKC series for ceiling style and optional markings. Flash Tube Enclosure Clear LEXAN with white marking sleeve Housing Textured, color impregnated engineered plastics - exceeds 94V-0 UL flammability rating Wire Connections Terminals - separate, polarized inputs for Hom & Strobe, #12 AWG (2.5mm2) maximum INDOOR Operating Environment 93% @ 40_C relative humidity; 32-120_F (0-49_C) ambient temperature OUTDOOR Operating Environment (must use weatherproof box) 98% 0 40_C relative humidity; -35-150°F (-31-66°C) ambient temperature (757-7A: rated at 50 cd © -35°C per UL/@ -40°C per ULC) (757-8A: rated at 100 cd @ -35°C per UU@ -40°C per ULC) Mounting - INDOOR Flush: North -American 2 -gang box, 3" high x 4" wide x 23/4" (69 mm) minimum Surface: 757A -SB Back box Bi-directional: 757A-BDF Mounting Frame Mounting - OUTDOOR Agency Listings Surface: 757A -WB Weatherproof Box UL 1971, UL 1638, UL 464, ULC S526, ULC S525 (All models comply with ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapter 28 Part 36 Final Rule) Note 1 - Measured at 10 ft (3m) @ 24 Vdc. Subtract 3 dBA for models with strobes Note 2 - Connected to FILTERED dc source. Note 3 - Connected to UNFILTERED (Full Wave Rectified) dc source. Note 4 - Use the average current rating to establish the maximum number of strobes, wire gauge and standby power requirements. Note 5 - Temporal audible pattern is defined as: Yz sec ON, / sec OFF, yx sec ON, / sec OFF, / sec ON, 1/ sec OFF, then repeat cycle. '5A' Series Strobe Horizontal Output deg ees -30 15 0 5 30 -60560 VW/ 790 -7 -90 30 20 10 cd 10 20 30 M Avocado al I5dUL mmF-1 '5A' Series Strobe Vertical Output -90-75 5A A',.,.. cd E 60 n,lcdIAmin II/I� � 15 a ICD cd 0 m N 10 Tlin 15 v rtlul 2r,``3 �' r90 90• Horizontal 7A' Series Strobe Horizontal Output degrees -15 0 0 -45 75 6 60 7 -9 `G/ 75 so 100 50 cd 50 100 72 Avenge Gd 12d UL mine 3A' Series Strobe Horizontal Output deg ees 0 -15 5 -60-45-3001//560 -7 -90 7A' Series Strobe Vertical Output 100 -90-75 -60 .7A Avenge d 50 riff45 O,swuLm: 30 al 15 a ��o m 50 IF15y ik 6 30 '+ -�' 45 100 9 90' 60 40 cd 0 40 60 MAv20v.5 ..d 70Cd2uL min(_1 '3A' Series Strobe Vertical Output -90.75 E 'I'?jj3?s II m 20 �►l o h '8A' Series Strobe Horizontal Output deg ees -15 0 5 -4530 -60 -7 -90 30 45 60 75 3AAv.n e Cd 0 - cd - cd 1�1 40 �1,� 305 11 6 90 5 90 200 100 cd 100 200 ... . M Avows Cd 1tOcd UL 1-1 '8A' Series Strobe Vertical Output T-77 ISA &Imp cd 150 I"75-60 100III/,/ -45 305 50 r*Wa m cd50 �� � a; Or 305 150 1`6045 85001-0341 3of4lss.2 All models fit to a standard flush mounted, North -American 2 -gang electrical box, 23/4" (69 mm) minimum. Optional flush trims are not 4uired. For surface mount, use EST's custom indoor and ,itdoor surface boxes painted in color -matched red or white epoxy. EST recommends that Mounting Plate (provided) fire alarm horn/strobes always be installed in accordance with the latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. North American 2 -gang electric box, 234" (69mm) minimum (Altemative: 4' square box 2-1/8. (54mm) deep) #6-32 screws (by others) Surface Box - 5-5/8" (143mm) sq. x Housing 3-9/16' (91 mm) deep 5-1/2" (140mm) x 5-1/2" (140mm) x 5/8" (16mm) \_Single Mounting Screw (provided) The strobe must be connected to signal circuits which output a constant (not pulsed) voltage. The horn can be connected to continuous voltage circuits. HORN and STROBE ON SAM CIRCUIT To UL/ULC Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel Signal Circuit +< Note 1 FIRST DEVICE Horn/Strobe HORN and STROBE ON SEPARATE CIRCUIT To UL/ULC Listed < H - s+ s. Horn/Strobe FIRST DEVICE To Next Device or EOL Resistor >+ >+ To Next Device Fire Alarm Control + Horn/Strobe Horn/Strobe or EOL Resistor Panel Signal Circuit Note 1 H+ OH l To UL/ULC Listed -< at_fs{ Fire Alarm Control +< To Next Strobe Device Panel Signal Circuit or EOL Resistor Note 1: Polarity of Signal Circuit is shown In supervisory state. Polarity reverses In alarm condition. Catalog Number Description Ship Wt. Ib. (kg) TEMPORAL HORNS 757 -1A -T* Temporal Horn, Red 1.7(.8) TEMPORAL HORN/STROBES 757 -5A -T' Temporal Horn/Strobe, 15cd, Red 2(.9) 757 -7A -T' Temporal Horn/Strobe, 15/75cd, Red 757 -3A -T• Temporal Horn/Strobe, 30cd, Red 757 -8A -T' Temporal Horn/Strobe, 110cd, Red WARNING: These devices will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruptions, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. These visual signal appliances' flash intensity may not be adequate to alert or waken occu- pants in the protected area. Research indicates that the intensity of strobe needed to awaken 90% of sleeping persons is approximately 100 cd. EST )commends that strobes in sleeping rooms be 110 cd minimum. MOUNTING ACCESSORIES 757A -SB' Surface Box, Red, Indoor 1.5(.7) 757A -WB' Weatherproof Box, Red, Surface 1.5(.7) 757A-BDF' Bi-directional Frame, Red 4(1.8) LENS MARKING KITS (see note 1) LKW-1 "FIRE", Wall Orientation (supplied) 0.1 (.05) LKW-1R "FIRE", Wall Orientation, RED LKW-2 "FEU", Wall Orientation LKW-3 "FIRE/FEU", Wall Orientation LKW-4 "SMOKE", Wall Orientation LKW-5 "HALON", Wall Orientation LKW-6 "CO2", Wall Orientation LKW-7 "EMERGENCY", Wall Orientation LKW-8 "ALARM", Wall Orientation LKW-9 "FUEGO", Wall Orientation " Add Suffix "W" to catalog no. for WHITE. (e.g. 757 -7A -TW) Note 1 - Change "W" to "C" for CEILING mount. (e.g. LKC-1) 85001-0341 4 014 Iss. 2 It is our Intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cow specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to charge with. out notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact EST. 01997 EST Printed in U.S.A. • FIRE ALARM SIGNALING APPLIANCES EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Models: 202-3A, -5A, -6A, -7A, -8A, 203-8A SYNCHRONIZING STROBE EST strobes are self -synchronizing (202 series); external control module is not required. Synchro- nized flash from multiple strobes improves the safety for photosensitive people. SATISFIES ADA CODE REQUIREMENTS ADA/UL1971/ULC listed strobe is available in five intensities. All models provide the "Equivalent Facilitation" allowed under ADA Accessibility Guide- lines. Use single strobe in rooms up to 50' x 50' and satisfy both ADA and NFPA codes. SUPERIOR VISIBILITY In addition to being UL 1638 and ULC S526 listed as Visual Signal Appliances, EST strobes have a "distributed" light output pattern and are UL 1971 listed as Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired. FIELD CHANGEABLE LENS MARKINGS Lens language or standard "FIRE" marking is easily changed with optional LKW and LKC series Lens Kits. SCREW TERMINAL WIRE CONNECTION Large terminals speed installation and accept up to #12 AWG (2.5mm2) wire. DURABLE NORYL FRONT PLATE Rugged front plate is available in red or white colors. FITS 1 -GANG FLUSH BOX Ideal for retrofit and renovation projects; EST offers optional color -matched surface boxes. UUULC RATED OUTDOOR OPTION EST Strobes are especially designed for use with compatible life safety communication and control equipment to alert the hearing impaired. EST strobes are available with 15cd, 15/ 75 (ADA) cd, 30cd, 60cd, and 11 ocd effective flash intensity. EST 202 series strobes are self -synchronized to flash at 1 fps across their full operating voltage range. The strobe operates on any existing 2 -wire signal circuit. Separately installed "synch control modules" are not required. A very small portion of the population have a condition which may cause them to become disoriented from multiple random flashes of light. This risk is minimized with EST's strobe. The flash from EST strobes can be noticed from almost any position in the room, corridor, or large open space. The light dispersion is controlled with a specially shaped reflector. It directs a minimum of 12 percent of rated light output above and below the strobe, and a minimum of 25 percent of rated light straight out both sides. EST strobes are UL1971 listed with both wall and ceiling cd intensity ratings (see Specifica- tions). This is useful in areas where the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) permits ceiling mount strobes. The strobe is shipped with standard wall mount style "FIRE" lens markings. Where ceiling mount, other languages, or different lens markings are required, EST offers optional LKW and LKC series Lens Marking Kits. These optional Tens markings just "snap on" to the strobe for quick, easy, change. Consult EST for availability of special lens languages or markings. The 202 series strobe is designed for 20 to 24 volt dc operation and must be connected to signal circuits which output a constant (not pulsed) voltage. A diode is used to allow full signal circuit supervision and terminals to accept up to #12 AWG (2.5mm2) wire are provided for making polarized connections. The 203 series strobe operates from 120 Vac/60hz signal circuit. The housing/front plate is finished in red or white and is made from durable and fire retardant, high impact plastic with a slight textured surface. Strobes are a part of a full line of ADA/UL 1971/ULC S526 listed fire alarm AudibleNisible signals available from EST. Matching Mini -Signal Horns and Horn/Strobes are also available. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY SARASOTA, FLA. 941-739-4200 Fax: 941-727-0740 CHESHIRE, CT. 203-699-3000 Fax: 203-699-3108 OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax: 519.376-7258 INTERNATIONAL:CANADA 905-270-1711 Fax: 905-270-9553 PITTSFIELD, ME. 207-487-3104 85001-0369 1 of 4 Iss. 6 J All models are listed to standard UL 1971 - Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired and CAN/ULC S526 Standard for Visual Signal Appliances for Fire Alarm 'stems. Each strobe can provide the "Equivalent Facilita- 1" allowed under Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADA(AG)). These guidelines are based on ANSI/NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code (1993). When applied and installed in accord- ance with that code, EST strobes meet or exceed the illumination produced by the ADA specified 75 candela (cd) strobe at 50 feet. However, optimum performance is obtained by providing "Equivalent Facilitation" as allowed by the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessi- bility Guidelines [ADA(AG)]. Contact EST for exact spacing requirements. Non -Sleeping Rooms Use ONE Wall Mounted - EST Model: Up to 20' x 20' (6.1 m x 6.1 m) 202-5A 15 cd @ 70mA or 202-7A" 15/75 cd @ 105 mA Up to 30' x 30' (9.1 mx9.1 m) 202-3A30cd @ 105mA Up to 40' x 40' (12.2 m x 12.2 m) 202-6A 60 cd @ 155mA Up to 50' x 50' (15.2 m x 15.2 m) 202-8A 110 cd © 219mA Corridors Wall Mounted - EST Model: Any Length x Max. 20' (6.1m) Wide 202-5A or 202-7A' spaced 100' (30.5m) never exceeding 15' (4.5m) from end wall • Model 202-7A is rated at 15 cd (wa I or ceiling mount) per UL1971, and 75 cd per UL 1638 thereby meeting ADA on axis only require- ments of 75 cd. mon-Sleeping Rooms and Corridors: EST strobes rated at s than 110 cd per UL1971 are intended for use in non- .aeping areas only. Install them 80" (2.03m) above floor level OR within the space between 6" (150mm) to 24" (610mm) below the ceiling, whichever is lower. No point in any space (including corridors) required to have strobes shall be more than 50' (15.2m) from the signal (in the horizontal plane. The 110 cd strobe should be used in non -sleeping areas only when the room exceeds 40' X 40' (12.2m X 12.2m). In large rooms or spaces (such as auditoriums) that exceed 100' (30.4m) across and without obstructions more than 72" (1.8m) above the finished floor, strobes may be placed around the perimeter, spaced a maximum of 100' (30.4m) apart, in lieu of suspending them from the ceiling. Sleeping rooms: EST model 202-8A and 203-8A are rated at 110 cd. They are intended for use in sleeping rooms and should be installed along with a smoke detector. It must be wall mounted at least 80" (2.03m) above floor level, but no closer than 24" (610mm) to the ceiling. The distance from the strobe to the pillow must not exceed 16' (4.8m). Sleeping Rooms Any size Use ONE Wall Mounted - EST Model: 202-8A 110 cd © 219mA 203-8A 110 cd © 219mA Strobes must be used to supplement audible signals wher- ever the average ambient sound level exceeds 105 dBA. Combination AudibleNisible signals must be installed per NFPA guidelines established for strobes. ADA suggests that the following areas may require Visual Alarm Signals: • rest rooms, meeting rooms, and other general usage areas. • lobbies, hallways, and other common use areas. • sleeping rooms intended for use by persons with hearing impairment (per Title 1 of ADA). • work areas used by a person with a hearing impairment (per Title 1 of ADA). — (Based in part on 1995 Canada National Building Code) The fire alarm audible signal shall be supplemented by fire alarm strobes in any floor area where the ambient noise level exceeds 87 dBA, or where the occupants of the floor area use ear protective devices, are located within an audiometric booth, or are located within sound insulating enclosures. This also applies to assembly occupancies in which music and other sounds associated with performances could exceed 100 dBA. Strobes shall be installed in a building so that the flash from not less than one device is visible throughout the floor area or portion thereof in which they are installed. For maximum safety, EST recommends that strobes be installed as per the guidelines shown here under Strobe Application. 85001-0369 2 of 4 Iss. 6 Catalog Number 202-5A-• 202-7A- 202-3A-• 202-6A-• 202-8A- /203-8A= UL 1971 Rated Strobe Output - candela (cd) 15cd (wall only) 15cd (wall or (ceiling) 30cd (wall) 15cd (ceiling) 60cd (wall) 30cd (ceiling) 110cd (wall) 60cd (ceiling) UL 1638/ULC S526 Rated Strobe Output 15cd (not UL 1638) 75cd 30cd 60cd 120cd Average Operating Current (note 2) 70mA 0 24Vdc 80mA © 20Vdc 105mA 0 24Vdc 125mA ® 20Vdc 105mA @ 24Vdc 125mA @ 20Vdc 155mA 0 24Vdc 185mA 0 20Vdc 219mA 0 24Vdc 272mA 0 20Vdc Peak Operating Current (note 2) 208mA 0 20Vdc 208mA 4 20Vdc 208mA @ 20Vdc 265mA 0 20Vdc 352mA 0 20Vdc Average Operating Current (note 3) 84mA 0 24Vdc 99mA 0 20Vdc 168mA 0 24Vdc 204mA 0 20Vdc 168mA 0 24Vdc 204mA 0 20Vdc 219mA 0 24Vdc 282mA 0 20Vdc 325mA 0 24Vdc 355mA 0 20Vdc Peak Operating Current (note 3) 360mA 0 20Vdc 594mA 0 20Vdc 594mA 0 20Vdc 723mA 0 20Vdc 876mA 0 20Vdc Strobe Flash Rate (note 4) Synchronized at 1 flash per second (external control module not required) Strobe Operating Volts 202 series: 20 to 24Vdc (Continuous) 203 series: 120 Vac/60Hz Operating Environment INDOOR: 85% 0 30°C RH; 32-120°F (0-49°C) ambient temperature OUTDOOR: 93% 0 30°C RH;-40-150°F (-40-66°C) ambient temp Only '7A' (50cd 0 -35°C per UL 0 -40°C per ULC) and '8A' (100cd 0 -35°C per UL 0 -40°C per ULC) models must use EST 897 series weatherproof box Lens Markings Supplied with LKW-1 'FIRE" red letters, vertical both sides (Wall Mount) - see LKW and LKC series for ceiling style and optional markings Wire Connections Terminals - polarized input, #12 AWG (2.5mm2) max wire size Flash Tube Enclosure Clear LEXAN Strobe Plate, Finish Textured color -impregnated Plastic - Exceeds 94V-0 U.L. Flammability Rating Mounting INDOOR: Flush - 1 -gang, 2" deep North American electrical box; Surface -EST 27193 series box or 1 -gang Wiremold box OUTDOOR: EST 897 series 1 -gang w/p surface box Agency Listings UL 1971, UL 1638, ULC S526, CE, CSFM, MFA (All models comply with ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapter 28 Part 36 Final Rule) 'Suffix "-T" for RED front plate, "-TW" for WHITE front plate. Note 1: Use the average current rating to establish the maximum number of strobes, wire gauge, and standby power requirements. Note 2: 202 series — From a FILTERED dc source, 203 series — 90mA (RMS) 0 120Vac/60Hz; <_ 350mA Peak. Note 3: From a UNFILTERED (Full Wave Rectified) dc source. Note 4: 203 series is non -synchronized at 1 fps UL 1971 WALL MOUNTED STROBE LIGHT OUTPUT DISTRIBUTION PATTERNS SOURCE: UL STANDARD 1971 - SIGNALING DEVICES FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED SOURCE: UL STANDARD 1638 - VISUAL SIGNAL APPLIANCES SOURCE: UL CANADA STANDARD S526 - VISUAL SIGNAL APPLIANCES FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 90 70 50 30 to 10 CO (0-10 -30 -50 -70 _90 TYPICAL EST -3A MODELS 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 (cd) 90 75 60 45 30 15 (0)0 -15 -30 -45 -60 -75 -90 TYPICAL EST -5A MODELS 0 5 10 15 20 25 (cd) 90 70 50 30 10 (0)10 90 75 60 45 30 Iil 15 cwc7 (0) 0 w -15 -30 -45 -60 -75 -90 TYPICAL EST -3A MODELS 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 (cd) 90 TYPICAL EST .5A MODELS 75 60 45 30 15 (0) 0 .15 -30 -45 -60 -75 -90 -30 -50 -70 -90 HORIZONTAL TYPICAL EST -6A MODELS 0 20 40 60 90 100 120 (cd) VERTICAL TYPICAL EST -6A MODELS 90 Com. I 75 601E 45 30 15 (0) 0 •15 -30 -45 -60 -75 -90 90 75 60 45 30 15 (0) 0 -15 -30 -45 -60 -75 -90 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 90 (cd) TYPICAL. EST -7A MODELS 90 70 50 30 10 (0)0 -30 -50 -70 -90 TYPICAL EST -BA MODELS 1 gig lig 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 (cd) 90 70 50 30 10 (0)to •30 50 -70 -90 TYPICAL EST -7A MODELS 0 5 10 15 20 25 0 25 50 75 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 BO (cd) (cd) (cd) 90 75 60 45 30 15 (0) 0 •15 -30 .45 -60 .75 -90 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 (cd) TYPICAL EST -6A MODELS 85001-0369 3 of 4 Iss. 6 All models fit to a standard flush mounted, North American 1 -gang electrical box, 2" (51mm) deep minimum. Optional =ST color -matched indoor or weatherproof, surface mount ces are available. The strobes must be connected to signal MOUNTING PLATE Two pan head slotted screws are provided to secure mounting plate to 1 -gang electncal box. circuits which output a constant (not pulsed) voltage. EST recommends that these strobes always be installed in accord- ance with the latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. FRONT VIEW len5" (127 mm) 1 IF--- 3.4' ---31 (86 mm) CAUTION: This unit is designed to be used on signal circuits that output a constant voltage. Do not connect this unit to a coded or pulsating voltage. Electrical supervision requires wire run to be broken at each device. Do not loop signal circuit field wires around the strobe terminals. 1RNING: These devices will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause ver interruptions, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection ,ecialist. These visual signal appliances' flash intensity may not be adequate to alert or waken occupants in the protected area. Research indicates that the intensity of strobe needed to awaken 90% of sleeping persons is approximately 1 OOcd. EST recommends that strobes in sleeping rooms be 110cd minimum. Catalog Number Description Ship Wt. Ib. (kg) 202 -5A -T Strobe - 15 cd, Red 1 (0.4) 202 -5A -TW Strobe - 15 cd, White 202 -7A -T Strobe - 15/75 cd, Red 202 -7A -TW Strobe - 15/75 cd, White 202 -3A -T Strobe - 30 cd, Red 202 -3A -TW Strobe - 30 cd, White 202 -6A -T Strobe - 60 cd, Red 202 -6A -TW Strobe - 60 cd, White 202 -8A -T Strobe - 110 cd, Red 202 -8A -TW Strobe - 110 cd, White 203 -8A -T Strobe - 110 cd, 120 Vac, Red 203 -8A -TW Strobe - 110 cd, 120 Vac, White Mounting Accessories 27193-11 Surface Mount Box - Indoor, 1 -gang, Red 1 (0.4) 27193-16 Surface Mount Box - Indoor, 1 -gang, White 897A-008 Surface Mount Box - Outdoor, 1 -gang, Red SIDE VIEW 1.09' (28 mm 0.25' (6 mm) 5' (127 mm) 'FIRE' lens (wall orientation) supplied. Other lens markings are available (see below). 1.9' (48 mm) Polarity of signal circuit shown in supervisory state. On alarm, polarity reverses. (-) ULU LC Lt 24V dc Fie Alun Cont olPan tsibnalcicu Place an end -of - line resistor on the last device (resistor supplied with control panel) Catalog Number Description Ship Wt. Ib. (kg) HEMl`1 i Place an end -of - line resistor on the last device (resistor supplied with control panel) Catalog Number Description Ship Wt. Ib. (kg) LKW-1 "FIRE" - Wall Orientation (supplied) 0.2 (0.1) LKW-1R "FIRE" - Wall Orientation (Red) LKW-2 "FEU" - Wall Orientation LKW-3 "FIRE/FEU" - Wall Orientation LKW-4 "SMOKE" - Wall Orientation LKW-5 "HALON" - Wall Orientation LKW-6 "CO2" - Wall Orientation LKW-7 "EMERGENCY" - Wall Orientation LKW-8 "ALARM" - Wall Orientation LKW-9 "FUEGO" - Wall Orientation LKC-1 "FIRE" - Ceiling Orientation LKC-2 "FEU" - Ceiling Orientation LKC-3 "FIRE/FEU" - Ceiling Orientation LKC-4 "SMOKE" - Ceiling Orientation LKC-5 "HALON" - Ceiling Orientation LKC-6 "CO2" - Ceiling Orientation LKC-7 "EMERGENCY" - Ceiling Orientation LKC-8 "ALARM" - Ceiling Orientation LKC-9 "FUEGO" - Ceiling Orientation 85001-0369 4 of 4 Iss. 6 It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not coer specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to charge with- out notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact EST. ®1996 EST Printed in U.S.A. .1 0 Series RS/RSS Strobe Mounting Plate (Shown w/o cover plate) Series RS/RSS Wall Cover Plate (Included w/strobe) Wall Strobe Ceiling Strobe Series RS Strobes and RSS Non-Sync/Sync Strobes New Features Enhancements Wheelock's Series RS Strobes and Series RSS Non-Sync/Sync Strobes have been enhanced with Lower Current Draw and the Series RSS has ZERO Inrush while maintaining their outstanding performance, reliability and cost-effectiveness in meeting or exceeding the latest requirements of NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm Code) 1996, ANSI 117.1 (American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities), and UL Standard 1971 (Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired). RS/RSS Strobe Appliances, when properly specified and installed in accordance with NFPA/ANSI Standards, can provide the Equivalent Facilitation allowed under ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG General Section 2.2) by meeting or exceeding the illumination which results from ADA's strobe intensity guidelines of 75 candela at 50 feet. This is an illumination of 0.030 lumens per square foot. Wheelock's Series RS/RSS Strobes employ an integral Patented Strobe Mounting Plate that makes it easy to mount to a variety of backboxes. The strobes can be mounted to single -gang, double -gang, 4" square, 100 mm European backboxes, or the SHBB backbox (Order Code 7254) for surface mounting. An attractive cover plate is provided for a clean, finished appearance on all models. Wheelock's Series RS Strobes are available with 15 and 15/75 candela intensities for Wall mount only and non -sync applications. The Series RSS Strobes NOW include Non -Sync and Sync in ONE appliance. The SM or DSM Sync Module must be used to achieve Sychronization of the strobe. Synchronized strobes can eliminate possible restrictions on the number of strobes in the field of view. Wheelock's synchronized strobes offer an easy way to comply with ADA recommendations concerning photosensitive epilepsy. The strobe options for the Series RSS are 15, 15/75, 30, 75 and 110 candela intensities for Wall mount and 15, 30, 75 and 100 candela intensities for Ceiling mount applications. Features Series RS/RSS Strobes: • • Approvals Include: Underwriters Laboratories UL 1971, European Community (CE), FCC Part 15. Submitted for New York City (MEA), California State Fire Marshal (CFM), Chicago (BFP) and Factory Mutual (FM) approvals on all models. • ADA/NFPA/ANSI compliant. Meets OSHA 29, Part 1910.165. • LOWER CURRENT. • Patented Strobe Mounting Plate for single gang, double gang, 4" square, 100 mm European backboxes or Wheelock's SHBB backbox for surface mounting. • Low current draw with temperature compensation to reduce power consumption and wiring costs. • Polarized 12 and 24 VDC models with wide listed voltage ranges using filtered DC or unfiltered FWR input voltage. • Fast installation with IN'OUT screw terminals using #12 to #18 AWG wires. Series RS: Low Current • 24 Volt only. • Wall mount only. • Available only in 15 and 15/75 candela intensity. Series RSS Strobes: Low Current • ZERO INRUSH. • Both Non -Sync and Sync in ONE appliance. To achieve Synchronization, a SM or DSM Sync Module must be used. • 12 or 24 volt models. • Wall mount RSS available in 15, 15/75, 30, 75 and 110 candela intensity. • Ceiling mount RSS available in 15, 30, 75 and 100 candela intensiy. WPM13T Since the inception of UL 1971, strobes cannot be Listed for outdoor use, Wheelock offers WM3T strobes for outdoor installation requiring weatherproof devices and private mode operation where UL 1971 strobes are not required. They a -e UL 1638 Listed at 117 cd and are designed for surface mc:nting indoors or outdoors. ':NOT TO BE USED AS IN INDOOR VISUAL EVACUATION SIGNAL OR FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED" ONLY 88 MILLIAMPS 20-31 VDC Series 43T AC Vibrating Bells Nheelock's alarm bells offer low power consumption with high sound output AC indoor or outdoor vibrating models available in 4", 6" and 10" shell sizes. Standard mounting options are provided for convenient installation. Features • Approvals Include: Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), California State Fire Marshal (CSFM), New York (MEA) and Chicago (BFP) on all models. • 4", 6" and 10" shell sizes in 115 or 24 -volt AC models. • Mounting options for semi -flush, surface, concealed conduit, and outdoor installation. • Integral RFI suppression minimizes induced noise on NAC circuits. • Polarized for AC supervision of NAC circuits. • Screw terminals permit easy in -out field wiring of #12 to #18 AWG wire. Specifications and Ordering Information Model Number Order Code Shell Size Input Voltage Input Current dBA @ 10 feet Mounting" Options 43T -G4 -24-R - 3781 4' 24 VAC 0.410 85 D,J, K,R, S,Z 43T -G4 -115-R " 0866 4' 115 VAC 0.085 85 43T -G6 -24-R 1627 6' 24 VAC 0.410 86 43T -G6 -115-R 1631 6' 115 VAC 0.085 86 43T -G10 -24-R 1647 10' 24 VAC 0.410 88 43T -G10 -115-R 1651 10' 115 VAC 0.085 88 NOTES 1. Typical d8A at 10 feet is measured in an anechoic chamber. 2. Each bell mechanism is adjusted to operate cr.I1 with the shell provided. Do not mix shells and mechanisms during installation. Consult Customer Service for Availability Refer to Data Sheet #S7000 for Mounting Options or page 56 of this catalog. For Installation Instructions (refer to Fax -On -Demand listing in this catalog). SEE PAGE 3 FOR GENERAL AND TECHNICAL NOTES. _ _ : E . E 3.4. 6 -inch Bell 10 -inch Bell Series IVB Motor Bells Wheelock's Series MB motor bells provide a better engineered motor bell for fire and life safety alarm systems. A number of improvements have been built into the Wheelock Series MB bells, including higher dBA, low current draw, built-in trimplate for semi -flush mounting, low frequency aluminum shells, and low RFI noise. The motor for Series MB bell is a durable, high torque, permanent magnet motor selected for its high performance and long life. Features • Approvals Include: Underwriters Laboratories UL, Factory Mutual (FM), California State Fire Marshal (CSFM), New York (MEA) and Chicago (BFP) on all models. • High sound output with low current draw. • Low frequency aluminum shells for better audibility through walls, doors, and other structures. • 6" and 10" shell sizes in 12 or 24 VDC models. • Integral RFI suppression to minimize induced noise on the NAC circuits. • Mounting options for surface, semi -flush, outdoor, and concealed conduit installation. • Built-in trimplate makes semi-fiush mounting simpler and less expensive. • Screw terminals permit fast in -out field wiring of #12 to 18 AWG wire. Polarized for DC supervision of NAC circuits. Operate on filtered or unfiltered DC. For combined a'Jdible (bell) and visual signaling, convenient retrofit plate assemblies are available with 15, 15175, 30, 75 and 110 candela strobes (Refer to Series RSSP Non-Sync/Sync Strobes for specifications and technical information). Mit at - Specifications C'RCu{T Specifications and Ordering Informs .on ModelOrder Number Code Shell Size Input Voltage Input Current dBA @ 10 Ft. Mounting' Options MB -G6 -12-R 3942 6' 12 0.060 c2 D,J,K, R,S,Z MB -G6 -24-R 3941 6' 24 0.030 MB -G10 -12-R 3944 10' 12 0.060 M8 -G10 -24-R 3943 10' 24 1 0.030 1. Typical d3A at 10 ft. is measured in an a,echoic chamfer. 2. All 12 VDC models are UL rated for 9.0 to 15.6 VDC a .- _.! 2= VOC mode's f 1?. C._ _ A..!! models can be used with filtered and unfiltered (full wave re:tif;e1) vol age. • Refer to Data Sheet AS7000 for Mounting Options or page 56 in this catalog. Fer:ns'a',a::; Ins" "tions refer to Fax -On -Demand listing in tnis catalog SEE PAGE 3 FOR GENERAL AND TECHNICAL NOTES. Oting Accessories P.SAL MOUNTING PLATE AS F.1Our.t.r4 ) OCURE•GANG. FLUSH (80) (8) SINGLE -GANG. FLUSH (30, #41 2 2 Sr 441::3 441 • / •si ••, (C) SINGLE•GANG. SURFACE )32) 3.w 0 1 03.3 • 43r 273' 14,1 i (0) 4' SQUARE. FLUSH (80) (El r 3211A/E. 0007. FLUSH (80) (9) 00U8LE-GANG) SURFACE (30) D. w. ••••••• . . I. 1%4,01 0.243 ! 4.33• 4-332 I 3 (J) 83 3023303 (Order Cody 2330) 317:1-: 3:ea! los.f.:sx s7.:s.%);),:s fcr jr,v,or slei:! cr.s. 311:34 :r.212:17.! -- 3-32 — .,-e-----7,---1-,---T1 [---7) :31' i_ ',...',...... 4 ......., : L : • — 2:2 • r , : , • 322., slA ••j ••2 (o W30 WUTHER RESISTANT 8028301 (Order Code 2950) c.enc.s tr ''''' c3nd.,:12'e r: v•of,tas.,. 'or kit ;a -:ed :i -s sca r— r- —• ..:“.-41--7 7.11 I , ; 22:•.C.24I 2-•3 el: • ••• •-; (L) ISP SURFACE ADA/TER (Order Code: 5306) .33 M) 103 3ACK30X (Oder Code. 5015) s/s.:e..•.-ootin; MT pro, -'s s (N) 033 8023303 (Ordtr Code. 2955) S:rda7d des: 3:303 233' ;'ed fC' i:2101301sur'e.e. mount:1g corces'ed rra,),1);01 S3 .0. 11)0 ;a 73510 the s)gna' 71 • 1 4 3 3 (0) RP -8 RETROFIT PLATE (Order Code: 5042) (Pi S83 80233-33 (Grier Cade: 3204) F:r sea:e SCiaq:s C3.rn0335 .341131.0 12 0223 t4. .st) . 1!).3 2, c , :— Ste 2.,22, 12 ::•.:,c ' : ' !•! ••! •-: 1 1 3 19) 5E7 SEMI -FLUSH PLATE )Orr Code. 2957) 3•3.-:e: 3 Ns: :.a:e 4,4'1 "3 2154: r: 2:•321322:3333 4 SQUARE. OEEP•SURFA:E (80) 2-1 3' Des: .•E 4,1 ei 12.1 2•2 (Si AP AOAPTER PLATE (Crier Code. 2901) •:3:2 CiSiVil !.31 sin -f -3- Irs.3"3.,073 trrv.ti :Si: Tle 20.' 21 lo 53' -Sri s.r; 5 cout:e 30.14534132' C r Ts bacv:o, 3 233.2:2333731 Iarred oIa:e Tr s rneun:r; sre)e-e: :o SS 3 Tne )3 :s 1c, 7.3 3'1; — 1 511 -r-r , ' • /jt, I (Ti MOOR SP SINGLE PROJECTOR (Order Code: 2397) 7 312 2'2:1 I) I 3 3)0061 37 TWIN PROJECTOR (Order Code: 24031 ••• Sta '1:tt 13 (0) 4' SCIAAS 0E0? W EXTENSION RING, FLUSH (SO) ).1 ' = • -J-- = : I (0) 5933 SURFACE 9023303 (Ordsr Code 7254) )). . CO 1" SQUARE 8023333 W EXTEN53 FLUSH )52.) 653-1 CEILING SUPF3RT 3RI2GE (015e: Code. X30) )=1::•••":1';-. (1) SK -2 30:1321 (Grier Code: 6933) . . C -eral Notes: AE 8 IS TYPICAL OF A STEEL CITY LXN1-WOW SOX OR EQUAL FIGURE B SHOULD A 3 5' DEEP BACtiBOX FOP CONDUIT INSTALLATIONS AND IS 'TYPICAL OF A STEEL CITY CY-1:2 BOX OR EQUAL C IS TYPICAL 0= A V."REMOLD 5748 BOX OR Ea UAL FIGURE 0 IS TYPICAL OF A STEEL CITY 52151 BOX OR EQUAL. =I".;URE E TYPICAL OF A STEEL CITY 52171 BOX OR EQUAL. 5. FIGURE F IS TYPICAL OF TWO STEEL CITY LX), -,-WOW E.DXES OR EQUAL. 6. FIGURE G IS TYPICAL OF A WIREMOLD 5745-2 BOX OR EQUAL. 7. FIGURE 0 IS TYPICA_ OF A STEEL CITY 52171 BOX WITH A STEEL CITY 53151 EXTENSION RING OR E3UAL. 8. F;GLIRE VI IS TYPICAL OP A STEEL Ct", 72171-1 CR EDU - NOTES 9-14 0t1 REVERSE SIDE FIRE ALARM ACCESSORIES EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY MR -100 & MR -200 Series EACH RELAY POSITION MAY BE ENERGIZED FROM ONE OF FOUR INPUT VOLTAGES EACH RELAY POSITION CONTAINS A RED LED WHICH ILLUMINATES WHEN THE COIL IS ENER- GIZED. THIS PROVIDES A TIMESAVING CON- VENIENCE WHEN CHECKING AN INSTALLED SYSTEM; NO METERING IS REQUIRED. SINGLE, DUAL OR TRIPLE RELAY MODULES MAY BE "SNAPPED APART" FROM A STANDARD 4 -POSITION MASTER SPDT OR DPDT RELAYS AVAILABLE AVAILABLE IN DUSTPROOF METAL ENCLO- SURES WITH LED VIEWING PORT TRACK MOUNTING HARDWARE TO FACILITATE INSTALLATION IN STANDARD CABINETS U.L. RECOGNIZED RELAYS RATED AT 10 MIL- LION MECHANICAL OPERATIONS U.L.I. LISTED AS CONTROL UNIT ACCESSORY The MR-Serles Multi -Voltage Control Relays offer SPDT or DPDT 10 Amp contacts which may be operated by one of four input control voltages. A single relay may be energized from a voltage source of 24 VDC, 24 VAC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC by wiring to appropriate input terminals. Each relay position contains a red Tight emitting diode (LED) which indicates the relay coil is energized. Relays may be "snapped apart" from a standard 4 -module assembly and used independently. These devices are ideal for applications where local contacts are required for system status, remote contacts for control of electrical Toads and general purpose switching. They are suitable for use with HVAC Temperature Control, Fire Alarm, Security, Energy Management, and Lighting Control Sys- tems. "RELAY ON" LED 'SNAP MR -101/T APART" SEAMS LED VIEWING HOLES LED VIEWING HOLE MR -101/C, MR -201/C MR -104/T MR -104/C, MR -204/C MODEL DESCRIPTION MR -101/T Single SPDT relay with LED and track mounting hardware MR -101/C Single SPDT relay with LED mounted in metal enclosure MR -104/T 4 -position SPDT relay with LEDs and track mounting hardware MR -104/C 4 -position SPDT relay with LEDs mounted in metal enclosure MR -201/T Single DPDT relay with LED and track mounting hardware MR -201/C Single DPDT relay with LED mounted in metal enclosure MR -204/T 4- position DPDT realy with LEDs and track mounting hardware MR -204/C 4 -position DPDT relay with LEDs mounted in metal enclosure EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY SARASOTA, FLA. 941-739-4200 Fax: 941-727-0740 CHESHIRE, CT. 203-699-3000 Fax: 203-699-3108 OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax: 519-376-7258 INTERNATIONAL: CANADA 905-270-1711 Fax: 905-270-9553 PITTSFIELD, ME. 207-487-3104 270062 1 of 2 las. 1 Input Control Voltage 24 VDC 24 VAC 115 VAC 230 VAC (TYPICAL FOR ONE MODULE POSITION) SPDT Contacts 10 AMPS @ 115 V.A.C. i 1 • NC • 11 C NO • • 0 24 115 230 1111 OV C N H 24V C • H TERMINAL STRIP CONNECTIONS MR -101 (MR -104) DPDT Contacts 10 AMP @ 115 V.A.C. 111111 • • NO C NC NO C NC (3) (S) ® 0 0 0 "RELAY ENERGIZED" INDICATOR Input • Control Voltage 24 VOC 24 VAC 115 VAC 230 VAC • OV C N H 24 115 230 111 24V • H TERMINAL STRIP CONNECTIONS MR -201 (MR -204) Power Requirements: MR -101 Position: 15 mA CO 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC MR -201 Position: 35 mA @ 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC Relays: MR -101: U.L. Recognized SPDT MR -201: U.L. Recognized DPDT Enclosure: 18 ga. CRS, plated with 1/2" conduit knockouts (top and botton) Contact Rating: 10 Amps @ 115 VAC Ambient Temperature: -58°F to 185°F (-50°C to +85°C) Approvals: U.L. Listed control unit accessory Dimensions: MR -101/T and MR -201/T: 3.0' (76mm) H x 2.125" (54mm) W x 1.5" (38mm) D MR -104/T and MR -204/T: 3.0" (76mm) H x 8.5" (216m) W x 1.5" (38mm) D MR -101/C and MR -201/C: 6.125" (156mm) H x 3.25" (83mm) W x 2.5" (64mm) D MR -104/C and MR -204/C: 6.125" (156mm) H x 9.5" (241 mm) W x 2.5" (64mm) D It is our intention to keep the product inbnnation current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements All specifications are subject to change with- out notice. For more informatbn or questions relative to this 270062 Specification Sheet contact EST. 2 of 2 ISS. 1 0 1996 EST Printed in U.S.A. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY FIRE ALARM ACCESSORIES Remote Booster Power Supplies Models: BPS6 and BPS10 Features • Extends power available to Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs). • Available in 10 amp and 6.5 amp versions. • Includes four independent 3 amp NACs — two configurable as auxiliary outputs. • Configurable signal rates. • Field selectable input -to -output correlation. • Two inputs allow activation by Signature Series modules or existing NACs. • NACs configure for either four Class B or two Class A circuits. • 110 Vac and 220 Vac versions • On -board status LEDs for easy recognition of wiring faults. Description The Remote Booster Power Supply is a self-contained 24 Vdc power supply designed to augment fire alarm audible and visual power requirements. The booster contains all of the necessary circuits to monitor and charge batteries, control and supervise four Class B or two Class A NAC circuits and monitor two controlling inputs from external sources. Simple switch selection provides a wide variety of opera- tional configurations. Each remote booster power supply is supplied with its own enclosure providing ample space for additional interface modules and battery compartment. The Remote Booster Power Supply is available in either a 6.5 or 10 amp version @ 24 Vdc. Application The Remote Booster Power Supply provides additional power for audible and visual devices when constrained by system capacity or site application. Fault conditions detected by the BPS will open the main panel's NAC. This initiates a trouble condition and eliminates the need to wire a separate trouble contact back to the control panel. During alarm condition, detected faults are overridden and the main panel's default configuration is continuous 24 Vdc on all NACs typically used to drive visual devices. The BPS's default output configuration is continuous 24 Vdc on all NACs. This output is typically used to drive visual devices. BPS notification appliance circuits easily configure for any one of three signaling rates: 120 SPM; 3-3-3 temporal; or, continuous. This makes the BPS ideal for applications requiring signaling rates not available from the main panel. It also allows independent setup of a notification appliance circuit without interfering with the main panel and its initiating circuits. In addition to the three generated signal rates, the BPS can also be configured to follow the signal rate of the main panel's notification appliance circuit. This allows seamless expansion of existing NACs. The BPS includes seven on -board LED indicators: one for each resident NAC; one for battery supervision; one for ground fault; and, one for ac power. The trouble contact has a sixteen second delay when an ac power failure or brownout condition is detected. This reduces the reporting of troubles during short duration ac brownouts. NAC configuration options include: ac power fail delay (16 seconds or 6 hours); sensing input to NAC output correla- tions; and, auxiliary outputs. NAC 3 and 4 are configurable as auxiliary outputs. Auxiliary outputs can be always on, or off after 30 seconds without ac power. Jumpers configure the BPS for Class A or Class B wiring. EDWARDS SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY SARASOTA, FLA. 941-739-4200 Fax: 941-727-0740 CHESHIRE, CT. 203-699-3000 Fax: 203-250-1931 OWEN SOUND, CANADA 519-376-2430 Fax: 519-372-1581 INTERNATIONAL:CANADA 905-270-1711 Fax: 905-270-9553 PITTSFIELD, ME. 207-487-3104 85005-0107 1 of 4 Iss.1 Ordering Information Catalog Number Description Shipping Wt. Ib (kg) BPS6 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply 13 ( 5.9) BPS6220 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply (220V) BPS6C 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply (ULC Version) BPS10 10 Amp Booster Power Supply BPS10220 10 Amp Booster Power Supply (220V) BPS10C 10 Amp Booster Power Supply (ULC Version) Related Equipment 12V6A5 6.5 Amp Hour Battery, two required 3.4 (1.6) 12V10A 10 Amp Hour Battery, two required 9.5 (4.3) Specifications Catalog Number 6.5 amp Booster 10 amp Booster AC Line Voltage 120VAC or 220-240VAC 50/60Hz 250 watts 120VAC or 220-240VAC 50/60Hz 375 watts Notification Appliance Power 3.0A max. per circuit @ 24Vdc nominal 6.5A max total all NACs 3.0A max. per circuit @ 24Vdc nominal 10A max total all NACs Auxiliary Outputs Two configurable outputs replace NACs 3 and/or 4. NAC 3 and/or 4 are configurable as auxiliary outputs. Input Current (from an existing NAC) 3mA @ 12Vdc, 6mA © 24Vdc Signature Mounting Space Accomodates three two -gang modules. Maximum Battery Size 10 Amp Hours (2 of 12V10A) Terminal Wire Gauge 18-12 AWG Relative Humidity 0 to 93% non condensing Temperature Rating 32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C) NAC Wiring Styles Class A or Class B Output Signal Rates Continuous, 120 SPM, 3-3-3 temporal, or follow installed panel's NAC. Agency Listings UL Engineering Specification Supply where needed EST BPS series Booster Power Supplies as an extension of Notification Appliance Circuits. The extension shall be in the form of a stand alone booster power supply. The supply must incorporate its own standby batteries. Batteries must be sized for <24>, <60> hours of standby followed by <5>, <30> minutes of alarm. It must be possible to support up to 10 amp hour batteries. The booster supply must incorporate four independent supervised Notification Appliance Circuits. It shall be possi- ble to configure the NACs to follow the main panel's NAC or activate from intelligent Signature Series modules. The booster NACs must be configurable to operate independ- ently at any one of the following rates: continuous; 120 SPM; or, 3-3-3 temporal. Fault conditions on the booster shall not impede alarm activation of host NAC circuits. 85005-0107 2 of 4 Iss. 1 " 'Typical Wiring Single booster anywhere on a notification appliance circuit Existing NAC end -of -line resistors are not required to be installed at the booster's terminals. This allows multiple boosters to be driven from a single NAC circuit without the need for special configurations. Multiple boosters cascaded from a single notification appliance circuit NAC Circuit Fire Alarm Control Panel APP -1,3 CoRl 0 0 c Booster Power Supply To next signaling >d_v:ce, booster, or EOL resistor > NAC output #1 > MAC output #2 > NAC output #3 MAC output #4 To next signaling >device booster, or EOL resistor > MAC output #1 > N"C output #2 > NAC output #3 MAC output #4 Booster Power Supply To next signaling >device, booster cr EOL resistor > MAC output #1 N"C output #2 > NAC output #3 > NAC output #4 0 n Booster Power Supply Multiple notification appliance circuits branched from a single control panel NAC Circuit MAC Circuit Fire Alarm Control Panel To next signaling booster, or (n EOL resistor, 0 N 0 4 5 c Booster Power Supply > NAC output 41 > MAC output #2 > NAC output 83 > NAC output #4 N U. 0 c 0 C 2 Booster Power Supply To next signaling device, booster, or EOL resistor NAC output #1 > NAC output 82 > NAC output #3 NAC output #4 Y v. 0 0 S Booster Power Supply To next signaling > d_vi_e, booster, or EOL resistor > NAC output 01 > NAC output #2 > NAC output 83 > MAC output #4 NAC Circuit NAC Circuit Fire Alarm Control Panel Uv >To next signaling device, booster, or (A (13 CU CO 0 CU • CO 3 -0 . C Booster Power Supply > EOL resistor > NAC output #1 > NAC output #2 > NAC output #3 NAC output #4 Multiple Signature modules branching a single notification appliance circuit Booster Power Supply Main Board P3 L N G NAC1s NAC2+ NAC3 + NAC4 P 1. IN v; Sense 1 COM OUT-+ IN: Sense 2 COM •.; OUTi NO! Trouble COM '• • B atter' NC?a-. k NAC Circuit P2. P4 A NOTES: L1\ Used for another Class B NAC circuit. Up to 10 CC1 or UM modules per booster NAC. All 5 outputs activate when input MAC #1 activates (based on programming) All 5 outputs activate when input MAC 82 activates (based on programming) EOL 15 K / From existing fire alarm `} panel notification circuit or CC1 module ► Out to EOL ► or next device NAC Circuit EOL 47 K 1.5 amps total 169 CC1 i.i Module 'i 8765 432 Data out to next device Data n from previous device or Signature controller NAC Circuit EOL 47 K 0+-1.5 amps total �, 109 CC1 Module +- +- 0 b +_ 8765 4321 hsl EOL 15 K /X\ Data in f om previous device or Signature controller Data out to next device More typical wiring diagrams on the next page... 85005-0107 3of4lss.1 Typical Wiring (continued) Signature module used to activate the booster This configuration eliminates the necessity of separate 24V sources. Signature modules may also be used to divide the booster's 3 amp output circuits into smaller current loads. Booster Power Supply Main Board NACI+ NAC2+[�� NAC3+ NAC4+ /AUX Flo IN Sense 1 COM I' OUT(Lg-7 IN Sense 2 COM [Q j OUT NO - Trouble COM Bad NC Multiple Signature modules as booster inputs Configure the outputs where zoning is required. Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) Booster Power ..110121111 Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) Mill Ea Fall V."- ril fa Li,9 cc1Module OO till Jy w. - A NOTES: IL Used for another Class B NAC circuit. Data in from previous Data out to device or Signature L % NAC4 is configured as an auxiliary output. controller next device 3t CC1 wiring must be within 3 feet of the Booster winng and in conduit o mounted within the Booster's enclosure. 4. Any Booster trouble will cause the CC1 supervision to report a troub!e to the main fire panel. Supply Main Board Up to 10 CC1 or UM modules per booster NAC. .nstallation and Mounting Dimensions 13.00' (33.02 cm) 3.375" (8.6 cm) L_ 3icy. (8.9im) 1 17.00" (43.2 cm) d 5 c) CT) CJ r: 0 0 Top View P3 L N G Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) NACI+ NAC2+ ri, Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) NAC3+`� c P1 + IN�' Sense 1 COM it' OUT NM_ Sense 2 COM 2'2% OUT M.. NO Trouble COM Battery NC P2� NOTES: Used for another Class B NAC circuit. 2. Any Booster trouble will cause the CC1 supervision to report a trouble to the main fire panel. al Modules must be wired and programmed on the Signature controller for proper operation. Riser in 12 - 24 Vdc Assembly cc1 Module + — +— O o 8..7.8.5 ...._..4..3.2 1 Riser out to next device or riser supervisory device Booster Power SUP Route AC supply through these knockouts only I non -power limited) Backbox r Battery r Battery wiring (non -power iimited) Battery Notes: 1 Maintain 1/4 in (6 rnm) spacing between power limited and non -power limited'wiring or use type FPL, FPLR, or FPLP cable per NEC. Supervised when .not configured as auxiliary power. Non -supervised when configured as auxiliary power. Source must be power limited 85005-0107 4 of 4 Iss. 1 It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate We can not cover specific applications Of anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject 10 change with- out notice For more information or questions relative to this Specdicat on Sheet. contact EST 01999 EST Printed in U.S.A. 13.00" (33.02 cm) 1 17.00" (43.2 cm) 7.00" (17.78 cm) o.0 .. Front View All knockouts for 3/4" conduit (1.9 cm) • P3 L N G Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) NACI+ NAC2+ ri, Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) NAC3+`� c P1 + IN�' Sense 1 COM it' OUT NM_ Sense 2 COM 2'2% OUT M.. NO Trouble COM Battery NC P2� NOTES: Used for another Class B NAC circuit. 2. Any Booster trouble will cause the CC1 supervision to report a trouble to the main fire panel. al Modules must be wired and programmed on the Signature controller for proper operation. Riser in 12 - 24 Vdc Assembly cc1 Module + — +— O o 8..7.8.5 ...._..4..3.2 1 Riser out to next device or riser supervisory device Booster Power SUP Route AC supply through these knockouts only I non -power limited) Backbox r Battery r Battery wiring (non -power iimited) Battery Notes: 1 Maintain 1/4 in (6 rnm) spacing between power limited and non -power limited'wiring or use type FPL, FPLR, or FPLP cable per NEC. Supervised when .not configured as auxiliary power. Non -supervised when configured as auxiliary power. Source must be power limited 85005-0107 4 of 4 Iss. 1 It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate We can not cover specific applications Of anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject 10 change with- out notice For more information or questions relative to this Specdicat on Sheet. contact EST 01999 EST Printed in U.S.A. BEST BUY #447 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS TUKWILA, WA Checpoint Security Systems Group, Inc. BEST BUY #447 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS TUKWILA, WA 2 This document and the accompanying written materials are the exclusive property of Checkpoint Security Systems Group. Possession of this document or any written material doesn't convey any right to reproduce, disclose its contents, or to produce, use, or sell anything it may describe. Reproduction, disclosure, or use without specific prior written authorization of Checkpoint is strictly forbidden. TABLE OF CONTENTS D9000/D7000 CONTROL/COMMUNICATOR SCOPE SECTION I NFPA REQUIREMENTS SECTION II RADIONICS MANUAL .SECTION III SPECIFICATION SHEETS SECTION IV SECTION I SCOPE Fire System Specifications Scope EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS RADIONICS D9000/D7000 SERIES CONTROL/COMMUNICATOR AND CENTRAL STATION TRANSMITTER The D9000/D7000 Control/Communicator is UL listed for commercial fire, both local and central station, and as a commercial fire transmitter. The D9000/D7000 control is approved for commercial fire by Factory Mutual, Califomia Fire Marshal and New York Bureau of Standards and Appeals. The following Radionics D9000/D7000 accessories are approved for commercial fire by Factory Mutual, California State Fire Marshal and New York Bureau of Standards and Appeals: D122 DUAL BATTERY HARNESS D192C INDICATING CIRCUIT SUPERVISION MODULE D928 DUAL PHONE LINE SWITCHER D1255 COMMAND CENTER D8004 ENCLOSURE FOR D1640 TRANSFORMER D8109 FIRE ENCLOSURE D8125 POPEX MODULE. D8127 POPIT MODULE D8130 RELEASE MODULE D8132 BATTERY CHARGER MODULE The following accessories are approved for commercial fire by Factory Mutual, Califomia State Fire Marshal and New York Bureau of Standards and Appeals: • DS250 SERIES PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR • DS200 EOL POWER SUPERVISION MODULE • SERIES 600 HEAT DETECTORS ARE 135° AND 200°F TEMPERATURE RATINGS. • BG -10 SERIES FEATURES NON -CODED, DUAL -ACTION OPERATION FOR USE WITH UL LISTED FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS. • AUDIONISUAL DEVICES ARE POWERED BY A WHEELOCK POWER SUPPLY CHARGER. HORN/STROBES AND STROBES ARE WHEELOCK DEVICES MANUFAFACTURED BY WHEELOCK. FIRE POWER LIMITED PROTECTIVE SIGNALING CIRCUIT CABLE Our rated cables are UL listed and are used in accordance with NEC article 760 applications. NEC marking found on these cables is FPL, FPLR OR FPLP. WATERFLOW SENSORS AND GATE VALVES All waterflow switches are to be zoned separately for alarm transmission and all gate valve tamper switches are to be zoned separately for supervisory signal transmission. All water flow switches and gate valve switches are provided by the sprinkler contractor. SECTION II NFPA REQUIREMENTS BEST BUY #447 TUKWILA, WA D9112 AMP. CALCULATION TABLE AC Power ON Normal Current AC Power OFF Minimum Current In Alarm Maximum Current Model Quantity Each Each Each Number Used Unit Total Unit Total Unit Total D9112 1 0.25 x Quant. 0.250 0.25 x Quant. 0.250 0.5 x Quant. 0.500 D125B 0.02 x Quant. 0.019 x Quant. 0.123 x Quant. D127 0.013 x Quant. 0.012 x Quant. 0.045 x Quant. D928 1 0.014 x Quant. 0.014 0.014 x Quant. 0.014 0.045 x Quant. 0.045 D129 0.025 x Quant. 0.025 x Quant. 0.026 x Quant. D192C 0.015 x Quant. 0.026 x Quant. 0.05 x Quant. D1255 1 0.104 x Quant. 0.104 0.106 x Quant. 0.106 0.206 x Quant. 0.206 D8125 1 0.048 x Quant. 0.048 0.047 x Quant. 0.047 0.048 x Quant. 0.048 D8126 0.003 x Quant. 0.003 x Quant. 0.004 x Quant. D9127 3 0.003 x Quant. 0.009 0.003 x Quant. 0.009 0.004 x Quant. 0.012 D8128A 0.027 x Quant. 0.027 x Quant. 0.046 x Quant. D8129 0.02 x Quant. 0.02 x Quant. 0.02 x Quant.+ D8130 0.005 x Quant. 0.005 x Quant. 0.054 x Quant. D185 0.245 x Quant. 0.3 x Quant. 0.3 x Quant. Ratings of other devices in the system which are not shown above: DS250 0.003 x Quant. 0.003 x Quant. 0.048 x Quant. NS121575 0 x Quant. 0 x Quant. 0.175 x Quant. MB -G6-12 0 x Quant. 0 x Quant. 0.06 x Quant. RIBUIC RLY 0 x Quant. 0 x Quant. 0.014 x Quant. TOTAL A = 0.425 TOTAL B = 0.426 TOTAL C = 0.811 * If the column C total exceeds 1900 mA, a D8132 is required to provide an additional 1900 mA. (16.2.2) NFPA 72A Local Systems require 24 hours of standby plus 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of the 24-hour period. Two batteries must be installed in the D9112 system to meet the basic standby requirements for an NFPA 72A installation. You must use battery ampere hour (A.H.) calculations to verify compliance with NFPA 72A. The following formula includes the calculation for 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of the 24 hour period, as well as a 10% contingency factor which allows for depletion of battery capacity with age. FORMULA FOR NFPA 72A AMPERE HOUR CALCULATION: ( 0.426 x 24 ) + ( 0.811 x 1/12 ) + 10% = 11.321 Column Hours Column 5 min. Contingency Total A.H. B Total C Total Factor Total A.H. requirements must not exceed A.H. capacity of batteries: Two D126 batteries = 14 A.H. (16.2.3) NFPA 72C Remote Station Systems require 60 hours of standby plus 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of the 60 -hour period. A D8132 Battery Charger Module with additional batteries installed in a separate D8109 or D8108A enclosure may be required in the D9112 system to meet the basic standby requirements for an NFPA 72C installation. You must use battery ampere hour (A.H.) calculations to verify compliance with NFPA 72C. . Add one D8132 module, bringing total panel power to 2800 mA and battery capacity to 28 A.H. ❑ Add two D8132 module, bringing total panel power to 4200 mA and battery capacity to 42 A.H. Checkpoint Security Systems SECTION III RADIONICS MANUAL Radionicia D9000/D7000 Series Control/Communicator Operation and Installation Manual 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Preface This manual addresses the operation and installation of the D9412, D9112, D7412, and D7212 ControVCommunicators only, and should not be used in conjunction with the D9112B1 or D7212B1 panels. Throughout this manual, unless expressly stated, the words "panel" and "controVcommunicator" refer to all four panels (D9412, D9112, D7412, and D7212). Text marked with a diamond (,) indicates that this function or feature is available on the D9412 and D7412 only. The table below provides an overview of the differences between the D9000/D7000 Series ControVCommunicators. For additional information, see the document titled "What's New With the D9000/D7000 Series Control Communicators" (74-07694-000). New Features D9412 D9112 D7412 D7212 Access Control YES, 8 Doors No YES. 2 Doors No Expanded Users Arm/Disarm Passcodes Cards/Tokens 249 996 249 N/A 99 396 99 N/A Passcode Protected Custom Functions 16 16 4 4 Number of Printers 3 3 1 1 Number of Points 246 246 75 75 Number of Relays 128 128 64 64 74-07692-000-D 12/97 D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 2 FCC Notices Part 15 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Part 68 This equipment complies with Part 68 of FCC rules. A label contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN). If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. The Radionics D9000/D7000 Series Control/ Communicators are registered for connection to the public telephone network using an RJ38X or RJ31X jack. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area. If the D9000/D7000 Series Control/ Communicators cause harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance. If advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service. If trouble is experienced with the D9000/D7000 Series ControVCommunicators, please contact Radionics Customer Service for repair and/or warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved. User repairs must not be made, and doing so will void the user's warranty. This equipment cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to Party Line service is subject to state tariffs. (Contact your state public utilities commission for information.) FCC Registration Number: AJ9USA-18808-AL-E Ringer Equivalence: Service Center in U.S.A.: 0.1A 0.2B Radionics, Inc. 1800 Abbott Street Salinas, CA 93901 D9000/D7000 Serres Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 3 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Table of Contents Preface 2 FCC Notices 3 Part 15 3 Part 68 3 Introduction 7 Points 7 Areas and Accounts 7 Communicator 8 Command Centers 8 Keyswitch 8 Access Control 8 Event Memory 8 Event Log 8 EMI/Lightning Transient Protection 9 Programming 9 Other Features 9 Control/Communicator Assembly 9 Ordered Separately 9 Listings and Approvals 10 Fire 10 Burglary 10 Installation 11 Before you begin 11 Enclosure Options 11 Beginning the Installation 11 Mounting the Enclosure 11 Premises Wiring 11 Installing the Assembly 12 Connecting Earth Ground 12 Locking the Reset Pin 12 Finishing the Installation 12 Charge the Battery as You Finish 12 Install and Wire Detection Devices 12 Install Modules and Relays 13 Make the Telephone Connections 13 Connect the On -Board Points and Command Centers 13 Power Up 13 Programming the Panel 13 Install the Point Chart Label 13 Testing the System 14 Power Supply 15 Primary Power 15 Primary (AC) Power Circuit 15 Installing the Transformer 15 Secondary Power 15 Secondary (DC) Power 15 Installing the Battery 15 Battery Supervision 16 Battery Charging Circuit 16 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Battery Discharge/Recharge Schedule 16 Charging Status and Low Battery LEDs 17 Charging Status LED (Yellow) 17 Low Battery LED (Red) 17 Power Outputs 18 Circuit Protection 18 Total Available Power 18 Continuous Power Outputs 18 Continuous Current Draw 18 Increasing Current Output 18 D8132 Battery Charger Module 18 Programmable Power Outputs 18 Programming 18 Optional Relays Required 19 Terminals 6 and 7 20 Fire System Power Formula 20 Terminal 8 20 Telephone Connections 21 Registration 21 Notification 21 Location 21 Phone Cord Connection 21 Phone LED (Red) 21 Operation Monitor LED (Green) 21 Dialing Format 21 Phone Line Monitor 21 Phone Line Test Points 22 Communication Failure 22 Ground Start 22 Relay Installation 22 Phone Monitor Select Jumper 22 D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher 22 Description 22 Operation 23 Watchdog Feature 23 Installing the D928 23 D928 Status LEDs 24 On -Board Points 25 Description 25 Point Sensor Loops 25 Point Parameters 25 Point Response Time 25 Off -Board Points 26 Point (ZONEX) Bus 26 D8125 POPEX Module D8127 and D9127 POPIT Modules 26 Installing the D8125 POPEX Module 28 Wiring the D8125 to the D94121D9112 28 Wiring POPITs to the Data Expansion Loop 28 09000/07000 Series Operation & /nstal/aton Manual Page 4 Wiring Data Expansion Loops to POPEX Modules 29 POPIT Sensor Loops 29 POPIT Module Point Assignments 29 D8128C OctoPOPIT Module 30 Description 30 Listing 30 Installing the OctoPOPIT 30 Wiring OctoPOPITs 31 Line Termination 31 OctoPOPIT Sensor Loops 31 Testing Off -board Points 31 Off -Board Relays 34 D8129 OctoRelay 34 Configuring the D8129 OctoRelay 34 Relay Outputs 34 Installation 34 Wiring Connections 34 D811 Arm Status Relay Module 35 Relay Output 35 Installation 36 Wiring Connections 36 Arming Devices 37 Description 37 Command Centers 37 Assigning the Command Center an Address 37 Installation 37 D268/D269 Independent Zone Control D279 Independent Zone Control 38 Keyswitch 39 Description 39 Programming 39 Installation 39 Keyswitch Operation 39 SDI Devices 40 Description 40 Installation 40 D9131A Parallel Printer Interface Module 40 Supervision 40 Switch Settings 40 • D9210B Access Control Module 41 Switch Settings 41 Programmer and Accessory Connections 42 Programmer Connector (J7) 42 Programmer Access Reports 42 Accessory Connector (J2) 42 D9412 Faceplate 43 Quick Reference Terminal Description 44 Troubleshooting Guide 45 Introduction 45 Self Diagnostics 45 Phone Line Trouble 46 Communications Failure 47 Problems Programming the Panel 48 Problems with Points 49 Extra Points 49 Problems with the D8125 POPEX Data Expansion Loops 50 EMI 50 Metering the Loops 50 Checking Shielded Cable 50 EMI on Long Wire Runs 50 Battery and Power Reports 51 Problems with Command Centers 51 Watchdog Reset Reports 51 Runaway Reports to the Receiver 52 Overloaded Power Supply 52 Service Walk Test 52 Approved Applications Compliance Guide 54 Listings and Approvals 54 Fire 54 Burglary 54 Introduction 54 Optional Compatible Equipment 54 Burglary Applications 54 Bank Safe and Vault Applications 54 Fire Applications 54 Enclosures 55 System Chart 56 System Wiring Diagrams, Issue A 57 D9412 ControVCommunicator 57 D9112 ControVCommunicator 58 D7412 Control/Communicator 59 D7212 ControVCommunicator 60 Current Rating Chart for Standby Battery Calculations 61 Standby Battery Requirements 62 Household Burglary and Commercial Burglary 62 Bank Safe and Vault 62 Central Station or Local Fire Alarm 62 Remote Station or Auxiliary Fire Alarm 62 Household Fire Warning Equipment 62 Standby Battery Calculation for NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Applications 63 Current Chart First 63 Central Station or Local Systems 63 Remote Station or Auxiliary Systems 63 Household Fire Waming Equipment 63 Specifications 64 Appendix: Point Address Chart 66 Bank 1, Points 9 -127 66 Bank 2, Points 129 - 247 67 D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 5 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Figures and Tables Figure 1: System Configuration 7 Figure 2: Enclosure Mounting 11 Figure 3: Reset Pin 12 Figure 4: Charging and Battery LEDs 17 Figure 5: Connecting D8132 Modules 19 Figure 6: Relays for Terminals 7 and 8 and Ground Start 19 Figure 7: RJ31X Wiring 21 Figure 8: Telephone Connections 22 Figure 9: Phone Monitor Select 22 Figure 10: D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher 23 Figure 11: On -board Point Sensor Loop Wiring 25 Figure 12: Connecting the D8125 POPEX to the Panel 27 Figure 13: Program Record Sheet 29 Figure 14: D8128C OctoPOPITs 32 Figure 15: D8129 OctoRelay Connections 35 Figure 16: D811 Module Wiring 36 Figure 17: Power at Command Centers 38 Figure 18: Keyswitch Wiring 39 Figure 19: Reset Pin 42 Figure 20: Programmer and Accessory Connections 42 Figure 21: Service Walk Test Flow Chart 53 Table 1: Compatible Command Centers 8 Table 2: Data Expansion Loop Wire Specifications 28 Table 3: D8128C OctoPOPIT Switch Settings 33 Table 4: D8129 Switch Settings 34 Table 5: Command Center Address Settings 37 Table 6: Command Center Connections 37 Table 7: SDI Device Connections 40 Table 8: Printer Address Switch Settings 40 • Table 9: Access Control Module Address Switch Settings 41 74-07692-000-D 12/97 D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manus/ Page 6 Introduction D8128C OctoPOPlT combines \ 8 POPIT Points in one module. / D8125 Interface for D8127/D9127 POPITS Points 9 - 127 /e D92108 modules may bei\\ I/ used for access control. (D9412/D7412 only) 11 D8129 OctoRelay provides ''. alarm and auxiliary relay output. (Other functions available.) Control/ Communicator On -board Points 1 to 8 Use Command Centers end/or keyswitches to arm the panel by area. Each panel can have up to 8 areas. Each area can have its own account number or areas can be grouped together with a common account number. Points of protection are assigned to areas. D928 module allows the \ panel to monitor two phone lines. 09131A module connects to a parallel printer to print event log. D8132 modules provide additional power for control centers and other powered devices. Figure 1: System Configuration Points The Radionics D9412/D9112 ControV Communicator panel provides up to 246 separate points of protection, and the D7412/D7212 ControVCommunicator provides up to 75 points of protection. Point programming parameters determine the panel's response to open and shorted conditions on the point's sensor loop. Points are programmed individually with several options to custom -fit the protection to your installation. Points 1 to 8 are located on the circuit board (on- board points). They are standard sensor loops. The remaining off -board points are POPIT (Point of Protection Input Transponder) points using D8128C OctoPOPITs, D8125 POPEX (Point of Protection Expander) modules and D9127/D8127 POPITs . rjV Areas and Accounts The system supports up to eight separate areas. You can assign all points to a single area or spread them out over up to eight areas. You arm and disarm the panel by area. You can arm and disarm several areas with one menu function. You can also assign a passcode an authority level that allows a user to arm an area from a remote command center in another area. Assigning each area its own account number creates eight separate accounts in one panel. Assigning the same account number to different areas, groups them together in a single account. Area options include: exit tone and delay, separate fire and burglary outputs, and multiple opening and closing windows. Area type can be used to create area interdependencies. D9000/D7000 Ser/es Operation & Installation Manual Page 7 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Communicator The ControlCommunicator uses a built-in digital communicator to send reports to the receiver. The panel transmits reports in either the Modem 111a2 M or BFSK format. Your D6500 receivers MPU and line cards must have software revision 8.00 (or greater) installed to accept Modem Illa2 TM' reports from the panel. Power your receiver down and up to print the software revision numbers. The panel connects to an RJ31 X jack for phone line seizure. Connection to the RJ31X complies with FCC regulations for using the public telephone network. You can program the panel to direct reports to four separate phone numbers. Adding the D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher module allows you to connect and supervise a second phone line. The system has routing capabilities that allow you to direct groups of event reports to four different destinations. Each of the report groups can be programmed to report to one or more of the destinations. Primary and backup reporting paths can be programmed for each of the destinations and each of the report groups. A custom option allows you to specify individual event reports to be sent. Command Centers You can connect a maximum of 32 Command Centers unsupervised to the system. The available power, number of supervised Command Centers, and number of areas you intend to use, affect the total number of Command Centers you can connect. The system can supervise up to 8 Command Centers. The panel transmits a serial device trouble report, SDI FAILURE in the Modem IIla2 hi format or TROUBLE ZN D in the BFSK format, if it loses communication with a supervised Command Center. You can add more Command Centers but only eight can be supervised. Table 1 shows the Command Centers compatible with the D9000/D7000 Series Control/Communicators. See Command Center in the 09000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000) for complete details on programming Command Center options. D1255 D720 D1256 1 16 -character alpha -numeric 8 LED 16 -character alpha -numeric 1 !l Fire/Burglary/Access Fire/Burglary Fire Table 1: Compatible Command Centers 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Keyswitch You can arm and disarm any of the eight available areas with maintained or momentary closure devices such as keyswitches and sub - control units (D279). Point programming determines loop responses and which area a keyswitch controls. • Access Control The D9412 can control eight access doors (each requiring the optional D9210B Access Control Module) with up to 996 uniquely identified cards/ tokens. The D7412 can control two access doors with up to 396 uniquely identified cards/tokens. Access can be granted from a Weigand style access control device (card reader) connected to the D9210B Access Control Module. Access may also be granted from a "request to enter" or a "request to exit" input, or from a Command Center. The access control features of the D9412 and D7412 can deny access during armed periods. It can also grant access only to certain authorized users depending on whether the area is master armed, perimeter armed, or disarmed. The alarm system can also be programmed to automatically disarm when designated authorized users are granted access. Event Memory The system uses event memory to store events for each area. You can view the events for an area at a D1255 Command Center assigned to the area. The panel clears the events for an area from event memory and starts storing new events when you master arm the area. Event Log The system stores from 500 to 1000 events and event modifiers from all areas in it's event log. Event modifiers add information about an event to the log. Some events are always followed by a modifier. For example, the system adds at least two items to the log each time you arm or disarm an area, the open (or close) event and an event modifier showing the previous arming state. All events and their modifiers can be stored even if the panel does not send a report for them. You can view the log at a D1255 Command Center, print it locally using the D9131A Parallel Printer Interface and a parallel printer, or upload it to the Remote Account Manager (RAM III). See the appendix in the User's Guide for a listing of log events and event modifiers. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 8 EMI/Lightning Transient Protection The D9000/D7000 Series ControVCommunicators maintain the Radionics high level of quality and field dependability. Their design significantly reduces electromagnetic interference and malfunction generally caused by lightning. Programming Use either the Radionics D5200 Programmer or the Remote Account Manager (RAM III) to program the D9000/D7000 Series ControV Communicators. Refer to the D9000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000) for programming options. Other Features The D9000/D7000 Series ControVCommunicator have many programmable features. A short list of some of the features follows. Complete details on all the features can be found in the D9000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000). • Supervision of AC (primary power), battery (secondary power), ZONEX and SDI buses, CPU (Central Processing Unit), up to three printers, and two telephone lines • Automatic system test reports • Remote access for programming, diagnostics, and log uploads using the Remote Account Manager (RAM III) • Fire Alarm Verification • Programmable Alarm Output • Programmable Relay Output using the D8129 OctoRelay Module • Opening and Closing Windows • Skeds (scheduled events) ControVCommunicator Assembly The Radionics Control/Communicator is shipped pre -assembled from the factory. You should receive the following parts with your panel. Literature Pack • D9000/D7000 /nstallation and Troubleshooting Quick Reference (33317) • D9412/D9112 Program Record Sheet (74- 07697-000), or D7412/D7212 Program Record Sheet (34583) • UL Smoke Detector Compatibility Technogram (33284) • Point Chart Label (79-06660-000) • Eight D105BL 1k W end -of -line resistors • Two 14", 18 AWG, color -coded battery leads Assembly: • PC board • Faceplate shield • Mounting Skirt • One #6x1/4" screw Ordered Separately Order the following to complete a basic 8 point installation. • D1255 or D720 Command Center (or keyswitch) • D1640 Transformer • D126 Battery • D161 or D162 Phone Cord (order two cords if you are using the D928 Dual Phone Switcher) • D8103, D8108A, or D8109 Enclosure Configured packages are also available. Please consult your Radionics Product Catalog. The following literature is available in a separate literature package for dealers. • D9000/D7000 Series Operation and Installation Manual (74-07692-000) • D9000/D7000 Series Approved Applications Compliance Guide (74-07693-000) • D9000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000) • D9412/D9112 Program Record Sheet (74- 07697-000), and D74121D7212 Program Record Sheet (34583) D9000/D7000 Series Operation & /nstallation Manual Page 9 74-07692-000-0 12/97 Listings and Approvals The D9000/D7000 Literature Pack includes the D9000/D7000 Series Approved Applications Compliance Guide (74-07693-000). Refer to this guide for additional guidelines for installing the ControlCommunicator in UL and Fire specific applications. Fire UL Underwriters Laboratories lists the D9412, D9112, D7412, and D7212 Control/Communicators as Signal System Control Unit for: Central Station, Local, Auxiliary, Remote Station, and Household Fire Waming. CSFM Approved by the Califomia State Fire Marshal for residential and highrise. NYC -MEA Approved by New York City's Materials and Equipment Acceptance System (requires red enclosure). 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Factory Mutual (FM) Approved by Factory Mutual. BSA Not listed. Burglary UL Underwriters Laboratories lists the D9412, D9112, D7412, D7212 Control/Communicators for: Central Station, Local, Police Connect, Bank Safe and Vault, Mercantile Safe and Vault, and Grade A Household systems, Access Control, and Proprietary. Department of Defense (DOD) The D9412, D9112, D7412, and D7212 have been granted approval for Department of Defense (DOD) installations in Sensitive Compartmented Information Facilities (SCIF). D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 10 Installation Before You Begin This Installation section contains a general installation procedure. It refers you to other sections of the manual for detailed instructions. Radionics recommends you review this manual and the D9000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000) before you begin the installation to determine the hardware and wiring requirements for the features you want to use. Have the following additional documents handy as you read through this manual: • D9412/09112 Program Record Sheet (74- 07697-000) or D7412/07212 Program Record Sheet (34583) • D9000/07000 Series Approved Applications Compliance Guide (74-07693-000) • User's Guide (74-06141-000) and User's Guide Supplement (33267) • D1255 Command Center Installation Manual (74-06118-000) or D720 Command Center Installation Manua/ (74-06935-000) Before you begin the installation of the D94121 D9112 you should be familiar with the operation of the D5200 programmer or the Remote Account Manager (RAM III). Enclosure Options Mount the Control/Communicator assembly in any of the Radionics enclosures listed below. Refer to the 09000/07000 Approved App/ications Compliance Guide (74-07693-000) to determine if your application requires a specific enclosure. • D8103 Universal Enclosure (tan) • D8109 Fire Enclosure (red) • D8108A Attack Resistant Enclosure (tan) POINT CHART LABEL MOUNTING SKIRT HOOK Beginning the Installation Mounting the Enclosure Mount the enclosure in the desired location. Be certain to use all five mounting holes. See Figure 2. Premises Wiring Run the necessary wiring throughout the premises and pull the wires into the enclosure. EMI (Electro Magnetic Interference) may cause problems: EMI may occur if you install the system or run system wires near the following: • Computer network system • Electrical lines, fluorescent fixtures or telephone cabling • Ham radio transmitter site • Heavy machinery and motors • High voltage electrical equipment or transformers • PBX telephone system • Public service (police, fire departments, etc.) using radio communications • Radio station transmitter site, or other broadcast station equipment • Welding shop If you think that EMI may be a problem, use shielded cable. The drain wire for the shielded cable must have continuity from terminal 10 on the panel to the end of the wire run. If continuity is not maintained, the shielded cable may aggravate potential noise problems rather than eliminate them. Connecting the drain wire to ground at other than terminal 10 may also produce problems. If you cut the drain wire to install devices be certain to splice it together. Solder and tape all splices. MOCULE MOUNTING LOCATIONS TAMPER SWITCH MOUNTING LOCATION MOUNTING SKIRT HOOK MODULE MOUNTING LOCATIONS SKIRT MOUNTING HOLE Figure 2: Enclosure Mounting D9000/07000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 11 MOUNTING SKIRT HOOK OPENINGS LOCK DOWN TAB 74-07692-000-0 12/97 Installing the Assembly 1. Place the assembly over the inside back of the enclosure, aligning the large rectangular openings of the mounting skirt with the mounting hooks of the enclosure. Slide the assembly down so it hangs on the hooks. See Figure 2. 2. Remove the tape from the #6x1/4" screw in the mounting tab on the assembly. The screw passes through the mounting tab and into the skirt mounting hole in the enclosure. Tighten the screw to secure the assembly in the enclosure. 3. Connect earth ground to the panel before making any other connections. See Connecting Earth Ground below. Connecting Earth Ground Terminal To help prevent damage from electrostatic charges or other transient electrical surges, connect the system to earth ground at terminal 10 before making any other connections. A grounding rod or cold water pipe are recommended earth ground references. Do not use telephone or electrical ground for the earth ground connection. Use 14-16 AWG wire when making the connection. Do not connect any other panel terminals to earth ground. Locking the Reset Pin Locking the Reset Pin disables the panel. See Figure 3. The system ignores the Command Centers and points while disabled. CALL FOR SERVICE appears in Command Center displays while the pin is locked down. On -board relays (terminals 6, 7, and 8) and off - board relays, deactivate when the panel is reset. There is power at terminal 8 when the relay is deactivated. Activation interrupts power at that terminal. The relays remain deactivated while the Reset Pin is locked in the disable position. Releasing the reset pin from the closed position resets the panel. The panel resets all its timers, counters, indexes, and buffers. Any points that restore after a reset is performed will not generate restoral reports. If you place the reset pin in the disable position when all areas are armed, there must be an entry in the AnswerAnnedprogram item. See RAM Parameters in the D9000/07000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000). Locking the pin in the disable position allows you to power up the panel and charge the battery as you install the detection devices and Command Centers. 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Figure 3 Reset Pin Finishing the Installation Earth ground and reset pin first: Make the earth ground connection to terminal 10 and lock the reset pin in the closed position if you haven't already done so. Charge the Battery as You Finish Connect the battery and then the transformer so that the panel can charge the battery as you finish the installation. See the Power Supply section for instructions. Onboard Buzzer Sounds at Power Up and Reset: The system performs a series of self diagnostic tests of its hardware, software, and program at power up and at reset. The buzzer on the panel sounds during the tests. They take about 1-3 seconds to complete. If the panel fails any of the tests, the buzzer continues sounding and a system trouble message appears at the Command Centers. See Sell Diagnostics in the Trouble Shooting section for a description of each system trouble message. Touch Terminal 10 first: If the on -board buzzer sounds briefly when you touch the panel, you're discharging any static charge you may be carrying to the panel. The panel may generate WATCHDOG RESET and/or PARAM FAIL events. See the Trouble Shooting section for a description of these events. Always touch terminal 10, the panel's earth ground connection, before beginning work on the panel. Install and Wire Detection Devices Install and wire detection devices and Command Centers at their locations throughout the premises. DO NOT make the connections at the panel end of the wiring yet. The On -Board Points section of this manual contains instructions for wiring the on -board points to detection devices. The Arming Devices section contains instructions for wiring the Command Centers. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & lnsta//abon Manua/ Page 12 Instructions for wiring the off -board point POPIT sensor loops are found in the instructions packaged with the POPIT modules. Install Modules and Relays 1. Power Down First: Power down the unit by unplugging the transformer and disconnecting the battery. Radionics recommends that you power down the unit when installing modules or relays, or when making wiring connections to the panel. 2. Install and wire any modules required for your installation as described in the module's installation instructions. Instructions for the D8125 POPEX Module, the D8128C OctoPOPIT Module, the D8129 OctoRelay Module, the D811 Arm Status Relay Module, and the D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher appear in this manual. See Off --board Points for D8125 and D8128C instructions. See Relays for D8129 and D811 instructions. See Dual Line Transmitting in the Telephone Connections section for instructions for the D928. 3. If you are using the power outputs at terminals 7 or 8, install a D136 relay in the appropriate sockets. See Programmab/e Power Outputs in the Power Outputs section for instructions. 4. If you are using a ground start phone system, insert a D136 relay in socket K6/J5 and set the ground start pin in the ground start position. See Ground Start in the Telephone Connections section. Make the Telephone Connections See Telephone Connections. If you are connecting the panel to a ground start phone system, you need to install D136 relay, see Install Modules and Relays above. Connect the On -Board Points and Command Centers Connect the on -board points and Command Center wiring to the system. See the On -Board Points and Arming Devices sections for instructions. Power Up Reconnect the battery and then plug in the transformer. Remember the buzzer sounds for 2 seconds when you first power up the panel. Leave the reset pin locked down for now. Ye/%w Charging Status LED doesn'tgo out: If the yellow charging status LED doesn't go out within 5 minutes of powering up the panel, the battery may be deeply discharged, or you may have connected too many powered devices to the panel. Combined continuous current draw for terminals 3, 8, 24, and 32, the Accessory Connector (J2), and the Expansion Port (J4) cannot exceed 1.4A. See the Power Outputs section for help. Programming the Panel If you haven't created a program for the panel, review the D9000/07000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000). Check to be certain you have all the required accessory modules installed for the features you want to use. The reset pin must be in the locked position to copy or send information to and from the panel. Use the D5200 Programmer or the Remote Account Manager (RAM III) to load your custom program into the panel. Move the reset pin to the normal position. See Figure 3. The panel transmits reboot and battery reports to the receiver if programmed for reporting. Install the Point Chart Label Radionics recommends you fill out the Point Chart Label (79-06660-000) provided in the literature pack and install it on the inside of the enclosure door for all systems. Point chart label requited for fire systems with verification points: You must install the point chart label for fire or combined fire/burglary systems using verification points. Use the program record sheet to gather the information you need to fill out the point chart. Install the label on the enclosure door as shown in Figure 2. To avoid smearing your entries on the chart, use the label's peel off backing to press the label in place. D9000/07000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 13 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Testing the System After finishing the installation and programming of the panel, make a complete functional test of the system. Test the panel and all devices for proper operation. Test after you first program the panel and after any subsequent programming session. Service Walk Test shows extra points: Use the service walk test at a panel wide Command Center to perform a complete test of the panel. The service walk test function is similar to the ordinary walk test function, with the additional ability to display points that are not properly programmed. If you test a POPIT with it's switches set for a point with a blank point index and/or no area assignment, it appears as an extra point during a Service Walk Test. 74-07692-000-D 12/97 If you test a device, and the panel doesn't respond, there may be a problem with the device, the wiring, the POPIT ID setting, or the programming for the point. If you incorrectly set the switches on a POPIT, you may create both a missing and extra point. When you find a missing point, performing a service walk test for extra points may help diagnose the problem. See the Trouble Shooting Section of this manual for complete service walk test instructions. Clear after test: To clear the event memory and report buffer, momentarily close the reset pin. Events stored in the panel's event log are not cleared. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 14 Power Supply Primary Power Terminals ( 1 i ( 2 Primary (AC) Power Circuit A 16.5 VAC, 40 VA intemally fused transformer (Radionics model D1640) is the primary power source. The AC power circuit provides 1.9 Amps of rectified AC power. The panel reserves 500 mA of this power for intemal operations leaving 1.4 Amps for powered devices. Transient suppressors and spark gaps protect the circuit from power surges. This protection relies on the ground connection at terminal 10. Make sure you connect terminal 10 to a proper ground. See Connecting Earth Ground in the Installation section. AC Power Failure The system indicates an AC power failure when the power at terminals 1 and 2 is missing. The AC Fail Time program item sets the number of seconds that AC must be missing before the panel acknowledges the failure and the number of seconds after the power retums before the panel acknowledges the restoral of power. You can program AC Fail Timefrom 1 to 90 seconds. The Radionics default sets AC Fall Time at 15 seconds. Installing the Transformer Do not short the terminals of the transformer: Shorting the terminals opens the intemal fuse causing permanent failure. Connect the transformer to terminals 1 and 2 of the panel before plugging it into the power source. Use 18 AWG (minimum) wire to connect the transformer to the panel. Wire length should be kept as short as possible. Maximum length is 50 feet. AC wiring can induce both noise and low level voltage into adjacent wiring. Route phone and sensor loop wiring away from any AC conductors, including the transformer wire. Route data wiring away from AC and phone wiring. Connect the battery and then plug in the transformer: Radionics recommends that you always connect the battery first and then plug in the transformer. Instructions for Installing the Battery appear on the next page. Only plug the transformer into an unswitched, 120 VAC, 60 Hz power outlet. Secure the transformer to the outlet with the screw provided. 08004 Transformer Enclosure required for fire systems: Use the D8004 Transformer Enclosure for the D1640 transformer in fire and combined fire/burglary applications. Check with AHJ on mounting transformers on specific circuits. Secondary Power Terminals 5 Secondary (DC) Power A 12V, 7 Ah (up to 14 Ah) sealed lead -acid rechargeable battery (D126) supplies secondary power for auxiliary and alarm outputs, and powers the system during interruptions in primary (AC) power. Lead Acid Batteries ONLY:: The charging circuit is calibrated for lead -acid batteries. Do not use gel -cell or nicad batteries. Extra Batteries increase Back-up Time: To increase battery back-up time, connect a second 12V, 7 Ah battery in parallel to the first battery to form a 12V, 14 Ah battery. Use a D122 Dual Battery Hamess to ensure proper and safe connection. Installing the Battery Place the battery upright in the base of the enclosure. Locate the red and black leads supplied in the literature pack. Connect the black battery lead to terminal 4, and then to the negative (-) side of the battery. Connect the red battery lead to terminal 5, and then to the positive (+) side of the battery. Warning, High Current Arcs Possible: The positive (red) battery lead and Terminal 5 can create high current arcs if shorted to other terminals or the enclosure. Use caution when working with the positive lead and terminal 5. Always disconnect the positive (red) lead from the battery before removing it from terminal 5. Replacement Radionics recommends battery replacement every 3 to 5 years under normal use. Exceeding the maximum output ratings, or installing the transformer in an outlet that is routinely switched off, causes heavy discharges. Routine heavy discharges can lead to premature battery failure. Record the date of installation directly on the battery. 09000/07000 Series Operation & /nstallation Manual Page 15 74-07692-000-D 12/97 08132 boosts battery backup: Adding a D8132 Battery Charger Module supports additional batteries of up to 36 Ah capacity if required. Failure to add a D8132 will cause situations that create false alarms and differential voltage levels. You can use the D8132 Battery Charger Module to connect two additional batteries for a total of four. The panel plus any connected D8132 modules and AUX power supplies must be on the same AC circuit so they will discharge evenly if AC power fails. The number of D8132 modules is determined by the number of available outlets on the same circuit. See the Standby Battery and Current Rating Chart in this manual for battery standby time calculations. Note: Dual batteries are required for fire applications. WARNING: Do not connect the D8132 module to the panel's battery terminals 4 and 5. Always connect to AUX outputs (see Figure 5 on page 23). Battery Supervision When the battery voltage drops to 13.8 VDC, the yellow Charging Status LED lights. When the battery drops to 12.1 VDC the red Low Battery LED lights and the panel, if programmed for power supervision, transmits a BATTERY LOW report in the Radionics' Modem 111a2 TM Communication Format. It transmits a TROUBLE ZN 9 report in the BFSK format. If the battery is missing or shorted, the red Low Battery LED flashes at the same rate as the green Operation Monitor LED. If the panel is programmed for power supervision, it transmits a BATTERY MISSING report in the Radionics' Modem 111a2 TM Communication Format, or TROUBLE ZN 9 report in the BFSK format. When battery voltage returns to 13.7 VDC the Low Battery LED goes out. If the panel is programmed for power supervision, it transmits a BATTERY RESTORAL report in the Radionics' Modem 111a2 TM Communication Format or RESTORAL ZN 9 report in the BFSK format. At 13.9 VDC the Charging Status LED goes out. Investigate low battery reports Immediately. If primary (AC) power is off and the discharge continues, the panel becomes inoperative when the battery voltage drops below 10.2 VDC. 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Battery Charging Circuit Float Charge The float voltage for the battery charging circuit is 13.5 to 13.9 VDC at a maximum current of 1.4 Amps. If float voltage drops lower than 13.5 VDC, the Charger LED will illuminate. Loss of AC Load Shed Relay protects battery: During an AC power loss the battery supplies all power to the security system. If the battery voltage falls below 10.2 volts during an AC power loss, a "load shed" relay isolates the battery from the panel and disables the panel. Load shed protects the battery from being damaged by deep discharge. When AC power restores, the load shed relay resets and battery voltage is again available. Overcharge Load Shed With AC Present: If more than 1.4 amps of current draw from the panel is detected, the panel shuts down. Remove all loads to the panel and disconnect AC power. Add a new battery and reconnect AC power. Reset the panel by momentarily placing the reset pin in the disable position. See Figure 3. The red Low Battery LED continues to flash until you reset the panel. A shorted battery condition is created either by a shorted cell inside the battery or by a short on terminals 4 and 5. A shorted battery may generate WATCHDOG RESET reports. Battery Discharge/Recharge Schedule Discharge Cycle AC OFF AC fail report when AC fails if panel is programmed to report AC failure at occurrence. 13.9 VDC Charging float level 13.8 VDC Charging Status LED on 12.1 VDC Low Battery & AC fail reports if programmed; Low Battery LED on 10.2 VDC Battery load shed (processing functions continue if AC is present) Recharge Cycle AC ON Load shed relay resets, battery charging begins, battery trouble and AC restoral reports sent. 13.7 VDC Battery restoral reports sent, Low Battery LED off 13.9 VDC Charging Status LED off, battery float charged 0900+0/07000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 16 Charging Status and Low Battery LEDs Charging Status LED (Yellow) The yellow LED shows the charging status of the battery. Figure 4 shows its location. Figure 4: Charging and Battery LEDs • Yellow LED off The yellow LED is off when the battery is fully charged. LED off when battery Is missing, shorted, or reversed: The charging LED is off when the battery is missing, shorted, or reversed, but the red Low Battery LED is flashing. • Yellow LED on A steadily lit yellow LED indicates the battery float voltage is below 13.8. If AC is present the battery is charging. The yellow LED also comes on when the combined current draw from all outputs exceeds 1.4 Amps. This is normal under alarm conditions for non -fire systems when sirens or bells draw more than 1.4 Amps. If the LED comes on regularly for extended periods or doesn't go out, check the current draw for devices connected to the power outputs. See the Power Outputs section in this manual for instructions. • Yellow LED flashing once per minute The yellow LED normally flashes once per minute as the system checks the battery. • Yellow and red LEDs flashing once per minute The yellow and red LEDs flash on once every minute when current draw for devices connected to the power outputs exceeds 1.4 Amps and the battery is missing. Low Battery LED (Red) The red LED shows the condition of the battery. Figure 4 shows the location of the LED. Low Battery • Red LED off The red LED is off when the battery is fully charged. When battery voltage drops below 12.1 VDC, the red LED comes on. It goes out when battery voltage reaches 13.7 VDC. • Red LED on A steadily lit red LED indicates battery voltage has fallen below 12.1 VDC. The LED goes out when battery voltage reaches 13.7 VDC. Missing Battery • Red LED flashing (same rate as green LED) The red LED flashes with the green Operation Monitor LED when the battery is missing or shorted. Missing Battery and Over Current • Red and yellow LEDs flashing once per minute The yellow and red LEDs flash once every minute when current draw for devices connected to the power outputs exceeds 1.4 Amps and the battery is missing. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 17 74-07692-000-0 12/97 Power Outputs Circuit Protection Three self -resetting thermal circuit breakers protect the panel from short circuits on both the continuous and programmable power outputs. The circuit breakers are thermal rated and open at 3 to 5 Amps. If the panel is programmed for power supervision and short is sustained on one of the power outputs, the panel transmits a BATTERY LOW or BATTERY MISSING for Radionics' Modem 111a2 TM Communication Format, or TROUBLE ZN 9 for BFSK. One thermal circuit breaker protects Terminal 3 - Auxiliary Power and Terminal 24 - ZONEX Power and the Expansion Port (J4). A short on one disrupts the power to the others. One breaker protects Terminal 6 - Alarm Power Output, Terminal 7 - Alternate Alarm Power Output, and Terminal 8 - Switched Auxiliary Power. A short on one of these terminals disrupts the power to the other two. One circuit breaker protects terminal 32 - Power +. Total Available Power The system produces up to 1.4A of combined power at 10.2 VDC to 13.9 VDC for all powered devices. The outputs listed below share the available power. These outputs are shown as red circles on the face plate. Terminal 3 - Auxiliary Power. Use this terminal to power devices requiring continuous power. To increase output by 1.4 amps, connect a D8132 module to this terminal. Terminal 6 (Relay A) - Alarm Power Output. Normally open, power on alarm. Terminal 7 (Relay B) - Alternate Alarm Power Output. Normally open, power on alarm. Terminal 8 (Relay C) - Switched Auxiliary Power. Normally open, power off on reset. Terminal 24 - ZONEX Power. Use this terminal to power ZONEX modules such as the D8125, D8128C, and D8129 modules. To increase output by 1.4 amps, connect a D8132 module to this terminal. Terminal 32 - Power + Use this terminal to power SDI (Serial Device Interface) devices such as command centers, the D9131A Parallel Printer Interface, and the D9210B Access Control Interface. To increase output by 1.4 amps, connect a D8132 module to this terminal. Accessory Connector (J2) The D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher connects to J2. Expansion Port (J4) The Expansion Port is reserved for future use. Continuous Power Outputs Terminals ( 3 4 ' (32 J2 J4 Continuous Current Draw The continuous current draw for powered devices connected to terminals 3, 8, 24, and 32, the Expansion Port (J4), and the Accessory Connector (J2) must not exceed 1.4A . Devices powered from these outputs must operate over a range of 10.2 VDC to 13.9 VDC. Power restricted for fire and combined fire/ burglary systems: Use the Fire System Power Formula to calculate the current available for fire and combined fire/burglary systems. See Programmable Power Outputs. Increasing Current Output D8132 Battery Charger Module The D8132 Battery Charger Module increases total output from 1.4 amps to 2.8 amps. Up to four D8132 modules can be connected to the panel. Figure 5 shows the terminal connections for the D8132 modules. Waming: Do not connect a D8132 module to the battery terminals 4 and 5. Ensure AC power for the panel and all connected D8132 modules is on the same circuit. Programmable Power Out uts Terminals (6) (' v ( 8) Programming The power outputs at terminals 6, 7, and 8 are programmed as relays A, B, and C. All relays are programmed in the Relays module of the program. Relays are assigned a relay type, Fire Bell for example, when they are assigned to an area. Relays can be assigned to one or more areas. 09000/07000 Series Operation & /nstallation Manua/ 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Page 18 D8132 1.4 Amps D8132 1.4 Amps aI I.) 1.4 Amps 1705121.2 Oseis "ted O" 01-4 32 IN D8132 1.4 Amps 29 (.3 Neal 0•". 0 Tnr MINE KAMM Yen I MC Pt/ I 01 NOTE: Combined Total Dispersed Current of 7.0 amps @ 12 VDC Figure 5: Connecting D8132 Modules The Radionics defaults set relay A (terminal 6) as a Steady Alarm Bell output and relay A (terminal 7) as a Pulsed Fire Bell output, and relay C (terminal 8) as a Verification/Reset output for smoke detectors. The D9000/07000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000) contains complete instructions for programming relays. Descriptions of the functional characteristics of each terminal appear on the next page. See the Bell Parameters section of the program to set the Fire Bell, Alarm Bell output responses for relays. Four annunciation patterns: Steady, Pulsed, California Standard, and Temporal Code 3 are available. Unexpected Output at Terminals 6, 7 and 8: If terminals 6, 7, and 8 don't provide the output you expect: • Check the programming for relays A, B, and C in the Relays module of the program. • Check the Bell Parameters section of the program to verify the Alarm and Fire Bell responses are programmed for the duration and pattern you expect. • Check the Point Assignments to verify each point is programmed for the local response you expect. L E F T (. — D8132 1.4 Amps Optional Relays Required Install an optional D136 plug-in relay into socket J1 to enable the output at terminal 7. Install a D136 in socket J9 to enable the output at terminal 8. The relay sockets are under the faceplate as shown in Figure 6. TOP 1® 613, NOTE: The D136 relays are inserted with the three pins on the top side. BOTTOM Figure 6: Relays for Terminals 7 and 8 and Ground Start D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 19 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Relay Installation Power down the system before inserting the D136 relays. The plug-in relays are shorter than the sockets they plug into. See Figure 6. You can install them in either the left or right end of the socket. Don't rely on relay labelling: You shouldn't rely on the labelling to install D136 relays. Check for the side with three pins. The three pins go on the top side. Incorrect insertion does not damage the relay or the system, however the related circuits do not function properly. Terminals 6 and 7 Terminals 6 (relay A) and 7 (relay B), provide positive (+) 10.2 VDC to 13.9 VDC power output when activated. Use the power at terminals 6 and 7 to power bells, siren drivers, piezo fire sounders, electronic homs, or other devices. Programming determines the format of the output and the conditions that activate it. One self - resetting circuit breaker protects terminals 6, 7, and 8 against shorts. Available Power The system combines the 1.4A of primary power produced by the power supply with the secondary power source (the battery) to produce a total of 2.0A of alarm power at 10.2 to 13.9 VDC. Terminals 6 and 7 share the available alarm power. Power restricted for fire and combined fire/ burglary systems: Fire systems are prohibited from using the battery for determining alarm power. Use the Fire System Power Formula below to calculate the current available for fire and combined fire/burglary systems. Fire System Power Formula To calculate the current available at terminals 6 and 7 for fire and combined fire/burglary systems: 1. Add together the current draws for all devices connected to terminals 3, 8, 24, and 32, the Expansion Port (J4), and the Accessory Connector (J2). This total is the total current required for the Normal Standby Condition (NSC). 2. The current available for Normal Standby Condition (NSC) is 1.4A. Subtract the NSC current required calculated in step 1 from the NSC current available, 1.4A. The difference is the Alarm Current available for terminals 6 and 7. In formula format: 1.4A — NSC current required (step 1) = Alarm Current available Refer to the Battery Standby Chart in the 09000/ D7000 Series Approved Applications Compliance Guide (74-07693-000) for module/accessory current requirements. Terminal 8 Terminal 8 provides continuous positive (+) 10.2 VDC to 13.9 VDC power. Relay C interrupts the power at terminal 8 when activated. Use terminal 8 to power smoke detectors or other devices that are reset by interrupting power. One self -resetting circuit breaker protects terminals 6, 7, and 8 against shorts. Verification/Reset Relay The default program sets relay C (terminal 8) as a verification/reset relay. See the Relay Parameters and Point Assignments modules in the 09000/ 07000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695- 000) for instructions on programming verification/ reset relays and points. Pertorming a Sensor Reset at a Command Center produces a 5 second relay activation of verification/reset relays. The panel ignores verification/reset points during the 5 seconds of relay activation. 09000/D7000 Series Operation & installation Manua/ 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Page 20 1 Telephone Connections Registration The Radionics D9412, D9112, D7412, and D7212 ControlCommunicator panels are registered with the Federal Communication Commission under part 68, for connection to the public telephone system using an RJ31X or RJ38X jack installed by your local phone company. Notification Do not connect registered equipment to party lines or coin-operated telephones. You must notify the local telephone company and supply them with the following information before connecting the panel to the telephone network. • The particular line you are going to connect the panel to • Make (Radionics), model (D9412, D9112, D7412, or D7212), and serial number of the panel • FCC registration number and ringer equivalence for the panel: FCC Registration Number: AJ9USA-18808- AL-E Ringer Equivalence: 0.1A 0.2B Location To prevent jamming of signals, wire the RJ31X jack before the in-house phone system to support line seizure. See Figure 7. Install the jack on the street side of the phone switch, wired ahead of any PBX equipment. Line seizure provides for a temporary interruption of normal phone usage while the communicator transmits data. After installation, confirm that the panel seizes the line, acquires dial tone, reports correctly to the receiver, and releases the phone line to the in- house phone system. (TIP) (RING) 012E33 RING TIP 01•40 (Woe* R/ R T Ti 1 4 5 8 1 Outside TELCO l4 51 8 t � I 4 5 8 LI Premises Telephone Figure 7: RJ31X Wiring D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 21 RJ31X Jack TELCO Connector Block Phone Cord Connection Connect one end of a D161 (7') or D162 (2') Telephone Cord to the TELCO Cord connector, J3, located on the bottom left comer of the panel. See Figure 8. Connect the other end to the RJ31X jack. Phone LED (Red) The red Phone LED lights when the panel seizes the phone line and remains lit until the panel returns the phone line. See Figure 8 for the location of the red LED. Operation Monitor LED (Green) The green LED indicates the operation of the CPU (Central Processing Unit). When the CPU is operating normally, the LED flashes 0.5 second on, 0.5 second off. The green LED also serves as a ring indicator. See Figure 8 for the location of the LED. When there is ring voltage on the phone line (the phone is ringing), the green LED flickers at a faster rate for the duration of each ring. Ring voltage must reach a minimum of 45 VAC before the system detects it. Dialing Format You can program the system to use DTMF or pulse dialing. See Phone Parameters in the D9000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74- 07695-000). Phone Line Monitor The panel has a built-in phone line monitor that tests the phone line for voltage and current. If you use the D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher to connect 2 phone lines to the panel, the panel monitors both lines. The normal voltage on a telephone line is approximately 48 VDC (24 VDC for some phone systems). The phone line monitor senses trouble when the voltage on the line falls below 4.5 to 7.5 VDC, without a corresponding current increase to 8 to 13 mA. If the monitor senses trouble, it starts a programmable phone line trouble timer. The timer continues to run as long as the monitor senses trouble. It resets to zero when the panel senses a normal line. If the timer reaches the delay time in the Phone Supervision program item, it begins a phone line trouble response. Programming determines what the response is. See Phone Parameters in the D9000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000). 74-07692-000-D 12/97 The panel stops monitoring the phone line during its phone line trouble response. If the response includes sending a report, the panel does not resume monitoring until the report is acknowledged or it goes into communication failure. Bad line may test OK: The telephone line monitor uses voltage and current levels to test the status of the phone line. In some instances a given telephone line may be out of service without affecting the voltage on the line. The phone line monitor can not recognize this trouble condition. Phone Line Test Points You can attach a telephone test set to the panel at the TELTEST points located above the TELCO jack on the lower left comer of the panel. See Figure 8. C s� 00.;:;211._ 1 OPERATOR 8077077184) LEO )07[[7) PROM YO PTO EEIECTr r r Ng' Lwa` 1117 POINTE .707E LEO TELCO C07D 070770 ET70T C077ECT07 0E) 77177 REI Figure 8: Telephone Connections Called Party Disconnect Telephone companies provide "called party disconnect" to allow the called party to terminate a call. The called party must go on hook (hang up) for a fixed interval before a dial tone is available for a new call. This interval varies with telephone company equipment. D9000/D7000 firmware revision 5.09 and higher allows for "called party disconnect" by adding a 35 second "on hook" interval to the dial tone detect function. If the panel does not detect a dial tone in seven seconds, it puts the phone line on hook for 35 seconds to activate "called party disconnect," goes off hook and begins a seven -second dial tone detect. If no dial tone is detected, the panel dials the number anyway. Each time the number is dialed, the panel records this as an attempt. Communication Failure After two attempts to reach the receiver, a COMM FAIL PH# event is generated. This event will tag along with the original event. After 10 attempts to reach the receiver, the panel goes into communication failure. The panel clears any reports in its phone buffer and COMM FAIL RT # event is generated, which appears in the display at control centers. An hour after the COMM FAIL RT # is generated, the panel attempts to send this event, if programmed. If you use the D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher, the D9000/D7000 makes a total of 10 attempts before going into communication failure. Ground Start Some telephone systems require a momentary ground input to initiate dial tone. To interface with a ground start system, insert a plug-in relay (D136) into socket K6/J5 and set the Phone Monitor Select jumper to the GND START position. Terminal 10 must be connected to an earth ground reference. Relay Installation Power down the system before inserting the D136 relay into socket K6/J5. The relay socket is in the lower left comer as shown in Figure 6. The plug-in relay is shorter than the socket it plugs into. You can install it in either the left or right end of the socket. Don't rely on relay labeling: You shouldn't rely on the labelling to install D136 relays. Check for the side with three pins. The three pins go on the top side. Incorrect insertion does not damage the relay or the panel, however the related circuits do not function properly. A ground start relay must not be inserted if the ground start jumper is in the loop start position (see below). Phone Monitor Select Jumper The Phone Monitor Select jumper is above the TELCO connector and TELTEST point at the lower left comer of the panel. Set it in the ground start position. See Figure 9. Warning: Ground start not for use in NFPA applications. You can not use ground start telephone systems for NFPA Central Station Protective Signaling or Remote Station applications. Figure 9: Phone Monitor Select D9000/O7000 Serres Operation & Installation Manua/ 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Page 22 D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher Description The optional D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher allows the panel to transmit reports over a secondary phone line when the primary phone line is faulted. The panel monitors both lines. If a signal is generated and the panel senses that the primary phone line is bad, then it will attempt to use the secondary phone line to send the message. If trouble is detected, the panel keeps the faulty phone line in memory. Set the ring count above 2 on answering machines: The line's RAM Monitor feature may not operate correctly if you connect an answering machine with a ring count of less than 2 rings, to a phone line used by the D928 module. Operation The panel always uses the primary phone line to initiate phone calls, unless it has been detected as faulted. See Phone Line Monitorin this manual for a description of the panel's phone line monitor operation. See the Phone section of the Panel Wide Parameters module of the D9000/07000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000) for phone supervision and reporting options. You must set the Two Phone Lines prompt to YES to use the D928. With the D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher installed, the panel uses two phone lines, primary and secondary, to dial up to four phone numbers. When using only a Primary Device within a Route Group #, the panel will make two attempts on the primary phone line before switching to the secondary phone line. It altemates between the two phone lines, making two attempts on each line until a total of ten attempts have been made. After ten unsuccessful attempts, the panel generates a Comm Fail event for the given Route Group #. When using a Primary and Backup Device within a Route Group #, the panel makes two attempts on the primary phone line using the Primary Device # as programmed. If these two attempts fail, the panel switches to the secondary phone line using the Backup Device # as programmed. This pattern continues for a total of ten attempts. After ten unsuccessful attempts, the panel generates a Comm Fail event for the given Route Group #. Watchdog Feature The D928 Watchdog circuit monitors the panel's CPU (Central Processing Unit) for proper operation. If the CPU fails, the buzzer on the D928 sounds as does the sounder on the panel. You cannot reset this sounder while the CPU is failed. The D928 stops sounding only when the panel's CPU retums to normal operation. Installing the D928 Mounting The D928 mounts on the lower right side of the enclosure using the screws provided with the switcher. Wiring The D928 has two flying leads. The green lead monitors AC power. The black lead provides surge protection for the two incoming phone lines. The black lead also is the ground reference for the AC LED. 1. Connect the green lead from the D928 to terminal 1. 2. Connect the black lead from the D928 to terminal 9. Phone Connections 1. Plug one end of the ribbon cable provided with the D928 into J4 on the D928. Plug the other end into J2 (ACCESSORY) on the panel. 2. Plug one end of the D162 (2') phone cord provided with the D928 into J3 on the D928. Plug the other end into J3 (TELCO) on the panel. 3. Plug one end of a D161 (7') or D162 (2') phone cord into Ji on the D928. Plug the other end into the RJ31X for the primary phone line. 4. Plug one end of a D161 or D162 phone cord into J2 on the D928. Plug the other end into the RJ31 X for the secondary phone line. Connect to ACCESSORY CONNECTOR (J2) with ribbon able Phone lack to primary phone line • RJ31X O Green to Terminal 1 Black* Terminal 10 Wav_____ 1111AC Power LEO (Green) jack to primary phone Ms - RJ31X rimary Fail LED (Yellow) Phone jack to secondary phone ane • RJ31X t -___Secondary Fai LED (Yellow) Phone jack 10 TELCO CONNECTOR 4-Communieations FAN LED (Yellow) Figure 10: D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher 09000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 23 74-07692-000-D 12/97 D928 Status LEDs Four LEDs mounted on the front edge of the D928 module show the status of AC power for the panel, the status of the two phone lines, and communication failure. See Figure 10. When programmed and operating normally, only the green AC power status LED should be lit. AC Power LED The green AC power status LED lights when there is AC power at terminals 1 and 2 on the panel. Phone Line Fall LEDs Two yellow phone line status LEDs (one for the primary phone line, one for the secondary phone line) Tight up when phone line voltage drops below 4.5 to 7.5 VDC without a corresponding 8-13 mA increase in current. The panel monitors the faulty phone line for the programmed interval before indicating a trouble condition. See Phone Line Monitorin this section for a description of phone line monitor operation. Communication Failure LED The yellow Communication Failure LED lights when the system is in communication failure. The LED is cleared when communications restores. See Communication Failure in this section. 09000/07000 Series Operation & Installation Manual 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Page 24 On -Board Points Description Terminals ( 11 ) to (22 The panel provides eight on board points. EacE point functions independently and does not interfere with the operation of the others. The panel monitors the sensor loops for normal, shorted, or open conditions between an input terminal (11, 13, 14, 16, 17, 19, 20, or 22) and any of the point common terminals (12, 15, 18, and 21). Programming for the point determines how the panel responds to those conditions. See the D9000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000) for point programming options. Point Sensor Loops When wiring the on -board points, install a 1 k ohm resistor at the far end of the sensor loop to provide a reference for supervision. You can connect dry contact sensing devices in series (normally -closed) and/or in parallel (normally - open) to any of these loops. The number of normally -open and/or normally - closed detection devices each sensor loop can supervise is limited only by the resistance on the loop. The total resistance for wire length and contacts, minus the end -of -line resistor, must not exceed 100 ohms. Ground shunts cause missed alarms: The possibility of "ground shunts" increases significantly if you don't install the resistor at the end of the line. If you install the resistor for points 1 to 8 before a detection device on the sensor loop and the loop becomes grounded after the resistor, any devices beyond the ground are "ground shunted". Alarm or trouble conditions beyond the ground are not seen by the panel. POINT INPUT TERMINAL COMMON POINT INPUT 0 TERMINAL COMMON 0 POINT INPUT (SI TERMINAL COMMON 100 OHMS MAXIMUM Point Parameters You can determine the condition of on -board points 1 to 8 by measuring the voltage across the point input terminal and one of the common terminals. The sensor loops must be connected and the 1 k ohm end of line resistor in place. Open Loop = Greater than 3.7 VDC, but less than 5.0 VDC. Normal Loop = Greater than 2.0 VDC, but less than 3.0 VDC. Shorted Loop = Greater than 0.0 VDC, but less than 1.3 VDC. Point Response Time The panel scans both on -board and off -board point sensor loops every 300 milliseconds. The Debounce Count program item in the Point Assignment module determines point response time by setting the number of scans that a point must be faulted before the panel initiates an alarm. The debounce count can range from 1 to 15. Therefore point response time ranges from 300 milliseconds to 4.5 seconds. The Radionics default for Debounce Count is 2. Warning, Increasing debounce count may cause missed alarms: If you increase the Debounce Count, detection devices may go into alarm and reset without exceeding the point response time. Radionics recommends you leave the debounce count at 2 for all points except for Interior Follower points, which should be programmed as a 3. NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACTS NORMALLY OPEN CONTACTS 1K CI BROWN — - RED BLACK COMBINATION: NORMALLY OPEN CONTACTS AND NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACTS Figure 11: On -board Point Sensor Loop Wiring RADIONICS MODEL D105F OR D105BL (UL LISTED BURGLAR APPLICATIONS) END•OF•LINE RESISTOR 09000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 25 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Off -Board Points Point (ZONEX) Bus D9412/D9112 Terminals ® to (\ 28 D7412/D7212 Terminals ® to 28 On the D9412/D9112, you can use POPIT (Point of Protection Input Transponder) modules to provide up to 238 off -board points, bringing the total number of points the D9412/D9112 can monitor to 246. The D7412/D7212 can provide up to 67 off -board points bringing the total number of points the D7412/D7212 can monitor to 75. Each off -board point requires a POPIT module. POPITs connect to supervised two -wire data expansion loops run from POPIT to POPIT throughout the premises. Data expansion loops connect to a D8125 POPEX (Point of Protection Expander) module. POPEX module(s) connect to the point buss on the panel, terminals 23 and 24 for power (3 and 9 on the D7412 and D7212), and terminals 25 and 26 (D9412/D9112 only), or 27 and 28 for data. If a POPIT is disconnected from the expansion loop, a trouble message appears immediately. See the D9000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000) for programming options. If you connect a POPIT to the expansion loop that is programmed for a point number that does not appear in the program for the D9412/D9112, it appears as a trouble condition when the data expansion loop restores from a faulted condition. A faulted condition on the data expansion loop includes: 1) Positive leg of the data expansion loop shorted to ground. 2) Negative leg of the data expansion loop shorted to ground. 3) Data expansion loop (positive or negative leg) becomes disconnected. 4) Data expansion loop becomes shorted. Placing a short on the data expansion loop generates a PT BUS TROUBLE report. The panel sees all points on the shorted expansion loop as shorted, and responds according to point programming, except for fire points. The fire points will respond locally as a trouble condition and transmit missing fire reports if programmed during this condition 74-07692-000-0 12/97 POPIT modules monitor their sensor loops for three conditions, loop normal, loop open, and loop shorted. They report these three conditions to the D9412/D9112. The D9412/D9112 uses point programming to interpret the sensor loop information reported by the POPITs and make the appropriate system response. D8125 POPEX Module D8127 and D9127 POPIT Modules D8127 and D9127 POPITs use the D8125 POPEX module to report to the D9412/D9112. Each D8125 supports up to 119 POPIT points. Connect two D8125 modules to the D9412/D9112 to bring the combined total number of POPIT and on -board points to 246. Points 9 to 127 connect to the first POPEX module. Points 129 to 247 connect to the second POPEX module. The D9412/D9112 reserves Points 128 and 248 for intemal use. The 09412/D9112 only annunciates activity for each POPIT, not each detection device connected to the sensor loop. There are two versions of the D8127 and D9127 modules. Both module enclosures are made of UL listed fire resistant material. D8127T and D9127T modules contain tamper switches. D8127U and D9127U modules come with untampered covers. Unless the module is mounted in a tampered enclosure, UL requires D8127T and D9127T modules for certificated accounts. Listings The D8125 POPEX and the D8127 and D9127 POPIT modules are UL listed for Local or Police Connected Burglar Alarm, Central Station Burglar Alarm, Household Burglar Alarm, Central Station Fire (NFPA 71), Local Fire (NFPA 72, Chapter 6), Remote Station Fire (NFPA 72, Chapter 8), Household Fire (NFPA 74) and Electrically Actuated Transmitter Applications. See the Installation Guide for UL and Fire Applications in this manual to determine the required equipment and enclosures for your application. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 26 119 POPITs 0. eeme ees9 oommO ro g.0 1.0 .0 1.0 oo8o8Oy i'0 1.0 0 a.o. 0 e� e P\c:: 1�11I II $ E • 0 0 0 0 0 0 e1' same eee D9412/D9112 only 1 o®®. sY a 00000• @I Figure 12: Connecting the D8125 POPEX to the Panel D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 27 O E O 74-07692-000-D 12/97 U LJ 0 L L. j Installing the D8125 POPEX Module Save the POPIT Labe/ Sheets: The D8125 is packaged with two sets of POPIT label, sheets. One is marked for use with the D9412/09112. Save this set. You will use it later to label the POPITs. Mounting Follow the procedure below to install the D8125 in the enclosure with the panel. 1. Align the D8125 POPEX module with any of the four mounting locations in the enclosure. See Figure 2. 2. Use the screws provided with the module to secure it in the enclosure. Wiring the D8125 to the Control/ Communicator Follow the procedure below to wire one or two D8125 modules to the panel. See Figure 12. Power down first: Power down the panel by disconnecting the positive (red) battery lead at the battery and unplugging the transformer. Warning, reversed polarity damages the 08125: Make sure you correctly wire the D8125 AUX and GND terminals to the panel. For points 9 to 127 (9 to 75 on D74121D7212): 1. Connect the GND terminal of the D8125 to terminal 23 on the D9412/D9112. Connect the GND terminal of the to terminal 9 on the D7412/D7212. 2. Connect the OUT terminal of the D8125 POPEX module to ZONEX IN 1, terminal 27. 3. Connect the IN terminal of the D8125 POPEX module to ZONEX OUT 1, terminal 28. 4. Connect the AUX terminal of the D8125 to terminal 24 on the D9412/D9112. Connect the AUX terminal to terminal 3 on the D7412/ D7212. For point numbers from 129 to 247 (D9412/D9112 only): 1. Connect the GND terminal of the D8125 to terminal 23. 2. Connect the OUT terminal of the D8125 POPEX module to ZONEX IN 2, terminal 25 . 3. Connect the IN terminal of the D8125 POPEX module to ZONEX OUT 2, terminal 26 . 4. Connect the AUX terminal of the D8125 to terminal 24. Do not connect more than one D8125 to ZONEX 1, terminals 27 and 28, or ZONEX 2 (D9412/ D9112 only), terminals 25 and 26. See Wiring POPITs to the 08125 for instructions on connecting POPITs to the D8125 POPEX module. Wiring POPITs to the Data Expansion Loop Use one 2 -wire data expansion loop or distribute the POPITs on up to three loops. Setting DIP switches on the POPIT modules assigns them to point numbers. See POPIT Module Point Assignments. Review Premises Wiring in the Installation section of this manual to determine if shielded wire is required. Determine the required wire gauge for each data expansion loop using Table 2. 1,800 2,890 4,600 7,320 11,650 Table 2: Data Expansion Loop Wire Specifications Combine data expansion loops: The maximum lengths shown in Table 1 are for all data expansion loops connected to the same POPEX module combined. Before installing the POPITs, make sure the resistance on the data expansion loop is no more than 4052. Wiring POPITs together: Do NOT connect POPITs to each other in series, or with a T -tap. Doing so may cause random missing POPIT conditions. Follow the procedure below to connect POPITs to one another in parallel. Figure 12 shows a typical configuration. 1. Connect the positive (+) Data terminal from one POPIT to the positive (+) Data terminal on the next POPIT. 2. Connect the negative (-) Data terminal from one POPIT to the negative (-) Data terminal on the next POPIT. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to connect all POPITs to the expansion loop. You don't need to wire the POPITs in any particular order on the loop. The switch setting on each POPIT assigns it a point number, regardless of its physical location. Three inch clearance for tampered POPITs: Mount tampered POPIT Modules at least three inches apart to prevent the tamper magnets from interfering with each other. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual 74-07692-000-0 12/97. Page 28 Wiring Data Expansion Loops to POPEX Modules There are two positive (+) and two negative (-) data expansion loop terminals on each POPEX module. Follow the procedure below to connect the data expansion loops to the D8125 POPEX Module. See Figure 12. Remember, you can only connect a maximum of 119 POPITs to one D8125 on the D9412/D9112 and 67 for the D7412/ D7212. 1. Connect the positive (+) Data terminal from the first POPIT on the data expansion loop to one of the D8125 module's positive (+) terminals. 2. Connect the negative (-) Data terminal from the first POPIT on the data expansion loop to one of the D8125 module's negative (-) terminals. POPIT Sensor Loops The number of normally -open and/or normally - closed detection devices each sensor loop can supervise is limited only by the resistance on the loop. Resistance on each sensor loop must be less than 100 S2 not including the End of Line Resistor. Certain UL and NFPA applications may limit the number of detection devices. Consult the appropriate UL or NFPA standards. POPITs detect open, shorted, normal, and grounded circuit conditions on their sensor loops. They transmit the condition of their loops to the panel. A ground on the sensor loop reports as a open condition. Each POPIT is programmed and transmits to the panel separately. Terminate each POPIT sensor loop with the 33k S2 end -of -line resistor [D106F) included with each POPIT. Radionics recommends you use twisted -pair wire (six twists per foot) in all POPEX/POPIT installations for both the data expansion loop wiring and the POPIT sensor loops. Run wires away from AC sources to prevent AC induction. If you suspect a noisy environment, use shielded cable. See Premises Wiring in the Installation section. POPIT Module Point Assignments Six switches on each POPIT assign the module to a point number. POPIT switch settings are found in the Point Assignment section of the Program Record Sheet. See Figure 13. Program Record Sheet The first column on the program record sheet contains the switch settings for the POPITs. Switches are numbered 1 to 6, left to right on the D8127 POPIT. Switches are numbered 0 to 6, left to right on the D9127 POPIT. Set switches whose number appears in the setting to the ON position. Set switches with a dash (-) in the switch position to the OFF position. See Figure 13 below. IMPORTANT! For the D9412/D9112, point numbers 73 to 127 and 193 to 247 must use D9127 POPITs. Points 9 to 72 and 129 to 192 may use either D8127 or D9127 POPITs. For the D7412/D7212, points 9 to 72 may use either D8127 or D9127 POPITs; however, D9127 POPITs must be used for points 73-75. The second column contains the translation of the point number into the ZONEX format. See Point User Flag in the Panel Wide Parameters module of the 09000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000) for an explanation of this feature. The third column contains the point number as it is displayed at command centers. The fourth column contains the point index. See the Point Index Parameters module in the D9412/ D9112 Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000) for an explanation of the point index. The fifth column of the Program Record Sheet shows the area the point is assigned to. The sixth column shows the Debounce Count for the point. See Debounce Count in the Point Assignments module in the D9000/07000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000). The seventh column shows the BFSK report code. It is the point number reported for this point when the panel is using the BFSK format. The eighth column contains the text displayed at command centers for the point. The text is transmitted to the receiver when the panel is using the Modem 111a2 TM format. RAO XVHrs ta+f7str 0441 jA Fp 'f Figure 13: Program Record Sheet D9000/07000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 29 74-07692-000-D 12/97 POPIT Labels Off -board points for the D9412 and D9112 are numbered 9 to 127 and 129 to 247 (D7412 and D7212 use points 9-75 only). The D9412/D9112 reserves points 128 and 248 for internal use. You must connect POPITs for points 129 to 247 to expansion loops connected to POPEX #2. Two sheets of peel -off POPIT labels are supplied with the D8125 POPEX module. Use the sheet marked Bankl for points 9 to 127. Use the sheet marked Bank2 for points 129 to 247. Each label has two parts. Place the smaller part, with just the point number on it, on the chip. Place the larger part with the switch settings on the base of the POPIT. Set the switches and cover the POPIT. Do not program two POPITs for the same point number. After you program all the points, perform a service walk test. The Troubleshooting section of this manual contains instructions for performing a service walk test. If a point does not test, check the programming for a duplicated address. Walk test does not show extra points: Only the Service Walk Test shows extra points. If you incorrectly set the point assignment switches on a POPIT or OctoPOPIT, you may create both missing and extra points. If you assign the same point number to two or more POPITs or OctoPOPITs, none of the points with that number will test correctly. D8128C OctoPOPIT Module Description The D8128C OctoPOPIT Module combines the functions of the D8125 POPEX module and the D8127/D9127 POPIT modules to provide eight off -board points in a single module. You can use OctoPOPIT and D8125 POPEX modules on the same system. WARNING: 08128, 08128A or D8128B modules are not compatible with the 09412, 09112, 07412, or 07212. Only use the D8128C OctoPOPIT module. Using D8128, D8128A or D8128B modules may cause intermittent missing and restoral reports. Review the Power Outputs section of this manual to be sure you provide enough power for the OctoPOPITs and other powered devices you wish to connect to your system. 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Listing The D8128C OctoPOPIT Module is UL listed for Local or Police Connected Burglary Alarm, Central Station Burglary Alarm, and Household Burglary Alarm applications. The D8128C is also suitable for fire supervisory applications, such as indicating circuit supervision (using the D192C Bell Circuit Supervision Module), sprinkler supervision, and valve tamper protection. Do not connect fire alarm initiating devices to the D8128C. You must use the D125B Powered Loop Interface Module or D129 Dual Class A initiation Circuit Module for fire initiation applications. Connect the initiating devices, smoke detectors for example, to the D125B powered loops or D129 Class A loops. Connect the zone outputs on the D125B or D129 to the OctoPOPIT sensor loop inputs. Installing the OctoPOPIT You can install the D8128C OctoPOPIT Module in the enclosure with the panel, or in a separate enclosure up to 200 feet from the panel. If you mount the OctoPOPIT in a separate enclosure, use shielded cable to avoid electromagnetic interference. See EMI on Long Wire Runs in the Troubleshooting section of this manual. Tampered enclosures for UL certificated systems: The D125B or D129 and the OctoPOPIT must be mounted in the enclosure with the panel or in a separate enclosure connected to the panel's enclosure by conduit not more than 20 feet in length. Mounting Follow the procedure below to install OctoPOPITs in the enclosure. 1. It is easier to set the switches on the D8128C before you mount it in the enclosure. See Line Termination and Point Assignment Switches. 2. Align the OctoPOPIT module with any of the four mounting locations in the enclosure. See Figure 2, 3. Use the screws provided with the module to secure it in the enclosure. Use the D137 Mounting Bracket to install OctoPOPITs in enclosures with no module mounting locations available. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 30 Wiring OctoPOPITs Follow the procedure below to wire D8128C OctoPOPIT Modules to the D9412/D9112. You can connect OctoPOPIT and POPEX modules to the same Point Bus terminals. The modules wire in parallel. Remember you can never assign the same point number to more than one point. 1. Power down first:: Power down the panel by disconnecting the positive (red) battery lead at the battery and unplugging the transformer. 2. Connect terminal 1 on the OctoPOPIT to terminal 23 on the D9412/D9112 (terminal 9 on the D7412/D7212). 3. Connect terminal 2 on the OctoPOPIT to terminal 28 on the panel if you are going to assign point numbers from 9 to 120 (or 9 to 75 if you are using a D7412/D7212) to this OctoPOPIT. See OctoPOPIT Point Assignments. If you are assigning point numbers from 129 to 240, connect terminal 2 on the OctoPOPIT to terminal 26 on the D9412/D9112. 4. Connect terminal 3 on the OctoPOPIT to terminal 27 on the D9412/D9112 if you are going to assign point numbers from 9 to 120 (or 9 to 75 if you are using a D7412/D7212) to this OctoPOPIT. If you are assigning point numbers from 129 to 240, connect terminal 3 on the OctoPOPIT to terminal 25 on the D9412/D9112. 5. Connect terminal 4 on the OctoPOPIT to terminal 24 on the D9412/D9112 (terminal 3 on the D74121D7212). 6. See OctoPOPIT Sensor Loops for instructions on connecting devices to the OctoPOPITs sensor loops. Line Termination If there is no D8125 POPEX module connected to ZONEX 1, terminals 27 and 28, set switch 4 on the first OctoPOPIT connected to those terminals to the ON position. If there is a D8125 POPEX module connected to ZONEX 1, terminals 27 and 28, set switch 4 on all OctoPOPITs connected to those terminals to the OFF position. [D9412/D9112 only] If there is no D8125 POPEX module connected to ZONEX 2, terminals 26 and 25, set switch 4 on the first OctoPOPIT connected to those terminals to the ON position. [D9412/D9112 only] If there is a D8125 POPEX module connected to ZONEX 2, terminals 26 and 25, set switch 4 on all OctoPOPITs connected to those terminals to the OFF position. See Figure 14 for the location of the switches on the OctoPOPIT. OctoPOPIT Sensor Loops The number of normally -open and/or normally - closed detection devices each sensor loop can supervise is limited only by the resistance on the loop. Resistance on each sensor loop must be Tess than 10052 with the detection devices connected. Certain UL and NFPA applications may limit the number of detection devices. Consult the appropriate UL or NFPA standards. The OctoPOPIT detects open, short, normal, and grounded circuit conditions on its sensor loops and transmits the conditions to the panel. A ground on the positive leg of the sensor loop transmits a shorted condition for the point. Each sensor loop is assigned a point number and transmits to the panel separately. Radionics recommends you use twisted -pair wire for the OctoPOPIT sensor loops to avoid EMI problems. Run wires away from the premises telephone and AC wiring. If you suspect a noisy environment, use shielded cable. There are two rows of terminal numbers on the OctoPOPIT. In the row closest to the terminal blocks, the positive outputs for the sensor loops are labeled P1 to P8. Sensor loop outputs P1 and P2, P3 and P4, P5 and P6, and P7 and P8 share common terminals. The common terminals for each pair are labeled COM. Terminate each OctoPOPIT sensor loop with a 1 k52 end -of -line resistor. Attach a resistor even if you don't enable the loop. The OctoPOPIT comes with a D105BL resistor for each sensor loop. Duplicated points do not function correctly. Take care not to duplicate point assignments. Points assigned to both an OctoPOPIT sensor loop and a POPIT, two OctoPOPIT sensor loops, or two POPITs do not function properly. Address Assignment Switches. Switches 0, 1, 2, and 3 assign the OctoPOPIT sensor loops to point numbers on the panel. Table 3 shows the OctoPOPIT switch settings for point assignments. Testing Off -board Points Use the Service Walk Test to test off -board points. See the Service Walk Test in the Troubleshooting section of this manual for instructions. Walk test does not show extra points: Only the Service Walk Test shows extra points. If you incorrectly set the point assignment switches on a POPIT or OctoPOPIT, you may create both missing and extra points. If you assign the same point number to two or more POPITs or OctoPOPITs, none of the points with that number will test correctly. Test to be sure that all off -board points operate properly See the Service Walk Test in the Troubleshooting section of this manual. 09000/07000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 31 74-07692-000-0 12/97 Control/Communicator Panel 28 0- 7 (2-61— (25)— l�1— (25 - -1 ---1 I — �2 4 - 23� ii ZONEX BUS 1 Switch "0" ON (Points 9 - 72) Bni / —1 TEiMINAL 9 ON 07212 / D7412 V TERMINAL 3 ON D7212 / 07412 SENSOR LOOPS no 0 O 0 O 0 0 2 0 c• 0 3 0 0 0 0 ZONEX BUS 1 Switch "0" OFF (Points 73 - 120) luau Addre+e oN 70NFX Ria I Ria I connnued SENSOR LOOPS 0 0 C 0 z 0 0 O 0 O 0 0 0 0 ZONEX BUS 2 Switch "0" ON (Points 129 - 192) Flow Amman on ZONEX Butt J Bur 2 9 SENSOR LOOPS �= O g e pit 1- 1,3 O mz 0 8N 0 g!'. 0 9..0 Si 0 ZONEX BUS 2 Switch "0" OFF (Points 193 - 240) But 2 conned SENSOR LOOPS ii Pcz 10 L7SlJ IJLN tat Addreae on ZOVEX Bue 2 8 2 0 gee 9 € O s 0 0 a. 0 Ti f 0 m� 0 D8125 POPEX 74-07692-000-D 12/97 CD (-) 0 -(-) e (+) (+) O OND OUT 0 IN e AUX 0912700 Law eeeeme POSIVE( )► NEGATIVE (-) ZONE EXPANSION LOOP Figure 14: D8128C OctoPOPITs D9412/D9112 Only D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 32 D8128C Sensor • Loop ZONEX 1 : D9412. Point .D8128C Switches : 0 1 2 3 4 ZONEX 2 D9412 Point . P1 009 193 P2 129 P2 010 P3 075 130 P3 011 076 Off On On On -- 131 P4 012 On On On On -- 197 132 P5 013 198 P7 133 P6 014 P8 080 134 P7 015 081 135 P8 016 202 136 P1 017 203 P4 137 P2 018 P5 085 138 P3 019 086 139 P4 020 On On On Off -- 207 140 P5 021 208 P1 141 P6 022 P2 090 142 P7 023 091 143 P8 024 Off On Off On -- 212 144 P1 025 213 P6 145 P2 026 P7 095 146 P3 027 096 147 P4 028 On On Off On -- 217 148 P5 029 218 P3 149 P6 030 P4 100 150 P7 031 101 151 P8 032 222 152 P1 033 223 P8 153 P2 034 P1 105 154 P3 035 106 155 P4 036 On On Off Off -- 227 156 P5 037 228 P5 157 P6 038 P6 110 158 P7 039 111 159 P8 040 232 160 P1 041 233 P2 161 P2 042 P3 115 162 P3 043 116 Off Off On Off -- 163 P4 044 On Off On On -- 237 164 P5 045 238 P7 165 P6 046 P8 120 166 P7 047 121 167 P8 048 242 168 P1 049 243 P4 169 P2 050 P5 125 170 P3 051 126 171 P4 052 On Off On Off -- 247 172 P5 053 ' " 248 " 173 P6 054 174 P7 055 175 P8 056 176 P1 057 177 P2 058 178 P3 059 179 P4 060 On Off Off On -- 180 P5 061 181 P6 062 182 P7 063 183 P8 064 184 P1 065 ' 185 P2 066 186 P3 067 187 P4 068 On Off Off Off -- 188 P5 069 189 P6 070 190 P7 071 191 P8 072 192 D7.41"21.D72.12-Mait3muttf•'.`.:`: •"" ",;:,,��„ D8128C Sensor Loop ZONEX 1 D9412: , Point . .D8128C Switches 0- 1 2 3 4 ZONEX 2 D9412 Point P1 073 193 P2 074 194 P3 075 195 P4 076 Off On On On -- 196 P5 077 197 P6 078 198 P7 079 199 P8 080 200 P1 081 201 P2 082 202 P3 083 203 P4 084 Off On On Off -- 204 P5 085 205 P6 086 206 P7 087 207 P8 088 208 P1 089 209 P2 090 210 P3 091 211 P4 092 Off On Off On -- 212 P5 093 213 P6 094 214 P7 095 215 P8 096 216 P1 097 217 P2 098 218 P3 099 219 P4 100 Off On Off Off -- 220 P5 101 221 P6 102 222 P7 103 223 P8 104 224 P1 105 225 P2 106 226 P3 107 227 P4 108 Off Off On On -- 228 P5 109 229 P6 110 230 P7 111 231 P8 112 232 P1 113 233 P2 114 234 P3 115 235 P4 116 Off Off On Off -- 236 P5 117 237 P6 118 238 P7 119 239 P8 120 240 P1 121 241 P2 122 242 P3 123 Do not use 243 P4 124 D8128C module 244 P5 125 for these points 245 P6 126 246 P7 127 247 .; P8 • " 128 Reserved for internal use ' " 248 " NOTES: a. Dipswitch 4 is not used for setting addresses. b. A D8128C OctoPOPIT cannot be installed at the end of either ZONEX (for points 121-127 or points 241-247). Use a D8125 POPEX module and D9127 POPIT modules for these points. Table 3: D8128C OctoPOPIT Address Switch Settings D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 33 74-07692-000-D 12/97 0 0 0 cJ 0 0 C C 0 0 0 C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Off -Board Relays D8129 OctoRelay The D8129 OctoRelay allows you to add relay outputs to your system in groups of eight. On the D9412/D9112, up to 128 OctoRelay outputs (relay numbers 1 to 128) can be added to your system using 16 OctoRelays. The D7412/D7212 allows up to 64 relay outputs. Review the Power Outputs section of this manual to be sure you provide enough power for the OctoRelays and other powered devices you wish to connect to your system. OctoRelays for relay numbers 1 - 64 connect to ZONEX 1, terminal 28. OctoRelays for relay numbers 65-128 connect to ZONEX 2, terminal 26 on the D9412/D9112. See Figure 17. You can assign alarm output, auxiliary relay, sensor reset, arming status, point status, alarm memory, or remote functions to the OctoRelay outputs individually. See Relay Parameters in the 09000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74- 07695-000) for programming details. 08129 restricted for fire systems: The D8129 relay outputs are not supervised and can not be used in fire or combined fire/burglary installations for primary indicating devices. Configuring the D8129 OctoRelay Five switches on the OctoRelay determine the relay numbers for the eight relay outputs. Table 3 shows the switch settings. Panel Relay Number 08129 OctoRelav Switch Setting On Panel, Connect 08129 to: 1 to 8 Off -On -On -On -On ZONEX 1 Terminal 28 9 to 16 On- Off -On -On -On ZONEX 1 Terminal 28 17 to 24 Off- Off -On -On -On ZONEX 1 Terminal 28 25 to 32 On- On -Off -On -On ZONEX 1 Terminal 28 33 to 40 Off- On -Off -On -On ZONEX 1 Terminal 28 41 to 48 On- Off -Off -On -On ZONEX 1 Terminal 28 49 to 56 Off- Off -Off -On -On ZONEX 1 Terminal 28 57 to 64 On- On -On -Off -On ZONEX 1 Terminal 28 .a X44. ^f.s 7412JL37it' l4' 11ttaiciti�url?. . �` it'll - 65 to 72 65 Off -On -On -On -On ZONEX 2 Terminal 26 73 to 80 On- Off -On -On -On ZONEX 2 Terminal 26 81 to 88 Off- Off -On -On -On ZONEX 2 Terminal 26 89 to 96 On- On -Off -On -On ZONEX 2 Terminal 26 97 to 104 Off- On -Off -On -On ZONEX 2 Terminal 26 105 to 112 On- Off -Off -On -On ZONEX 2 Terminal 26 113 to 120 Off- Off -Off -On -On ZONEX 2 Terminal 26 121 to 128 On- On -On -Off -On ZONEX 2 Terminal 26 Table 4: D8129 OctoRelay Switch Settings D9000/07000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 34 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Warning: Relay outputs may activate while setting the OctoRelay switches or programming the panel. You may wish to disconnect equipment connected to relay outputs while performing these functions. Relay Outputs Each OctoRelay output provides a Form C dry contact rated for 1.0A at 12 VDC. Normally -open, common, and normally -closed terminals are available for each relay output. When an individual output is activated, there is continuity between the normally -open and common terminals. When the output is not activated, there is continuity between the normally -closed and common terminals. Installation Set the switches on the OctoRelay before you install it in the enclosure. See Configuring the D8129 OctoRelay. You can install the OctoRelay in the enclosure with the panel (see Figure 2) or in an adjacent enclosure not more than 5 feet from the panel. Use 16 to 22 AWG wire. Follow the procedure below to install OctoRelays in the enclosure with the panel. 1. Align the module with one of the mounting locations in the enclosure. See Figure 2. 2. Use the screws provided with the module to secure it in the enclosure. Use the D137 Mounting Bracket to install OctoRelays in enclosures with no module mounting locations available. Wiring Connections Power down the panel to connect OctoRelays as shown in Figure 17. Note that OctoRelays for relay numbers 1 to 64 connect to ZONEX 1, terminal 28. OctoRelays for relay numbers 65 to 128 connect to ZONEX 2, terminal 26 on the D9412/D9112. Only one OctoRelay is shown wired to each ZONEX bus in Figure 17. Wire additional OctoRelays in parallel. Review the Power Outputs section of this manual to be sure you provide enough power for the relays. Control/Communi®tor Panel ZONEX OUT 1 28 ZONEX IN 1 27 ZONEX OUT 2 26� ZONEX IN 2 25� ZONEX POWER + ZONEX COMMON (23 24 D8125 POPEX o !-I o I'I rl 8 GND OUT IN AUX 000 D8125 POPEX 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 000 000 000 !0 00 000 000 DATA D8129 OCTORELAYS FOR RELAY AUX NUMBERS 1 TO 64. CONNECT GND OCTORELAYS IN PARALLEL. /D9412/D9112 Only 1 2 3 4 000100 0 O 0 000 5 6 7 8 00 000100 00op DATA D8129 OCTORELAYS FOR RELAY AUX NUMBERS 65 TO 128. CONNECT GND OCTORELAYS IN PARALLEL. Figure 15: D8129 OctoRelay Connections D811 Arm Status Relay Module The D811 Arm Status Relay Module allows you to add a single off -board relay output to your system. You can assign alarm output, auxiliary relay, sensor reset, arming status, point status, alarm memory, or remote functions to the D811 relay output. You, are not restricted to the arming status mode only. Relay numbers for 0811 not programmable: If you connect the 0811 to ZONEX 1, terminal 28 , you must use relay number 53 for the relay output. If you connect the D811 to ZONEX 2, terminal 26 on the D9412/D9112, you must use relay number 117 for the relay output. D811 modules connect as shown in Figure 18. Review the Power Outputs section of this manual to be sure you provide enough power for the powered devices you wish to connect to your system. See Relay Parameters in the D9000/ D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695- 000) for programming details. D811 restricted for fire systems: The D811 relay output is not supervised and can not be used in fire or combined fire/burglary installations for primary indication devices. Relay Output Each D811 relay output provides a Form C dry contact rated for 1.0A at 12 VDC. Normally -open, common, and normally -closed terminals are available. When an individual output is activated, there is continuity between the normally -open and common terminals. When the output is not activated, there is continuity between the normally -closed and common terminals. Warning: Relay outputs may activate while programming the panel. You may wish to disconnect equipment connected to relay outputs while performing these functions. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 35 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Installation You can install the D811 in the enclosure with the panel (see Figure 2) or in an adjacent enclosure not more than 5 feet from the panel. Use 16 to 22 AWG wire. Follow the procedure below to install D811 modules in the enclosure with the panel. 1. Align the D811 module with any of the four mounting locations in the enclosure. See Figure 2. 2. Use the screws provided with the module to secure it in the enclosure. Use the D137 Mounting Bracket to install D811 modules in enclosures with no module mounting locations available. Control/Communicator Panel ZONEX OUT 1 28 ZONEX IN 1 27 ZONEX OUT 2 26, ZONEX IN 2 25 ZONEX POWER +24 ZONEX COMMON 23 D8125 POPEX 0 O O a S --0 c-) (-) (*) L) GND OUT IN AUX Wiring Connections Power down the panel to connect D811 modules as shown in Figure 16. Note that the D811 for relay number 53 connects to ZONEX 1. The D811 for relay number 117 connects to ZONEX 2 on the D9412/D9112. D9412, D9112, D7412, D7212 000 DATA AUX D811 FOR RELAY NUMBER 53 GND D8125 POPEX O O O DATA AUX GND D811 FOR RELAY NUMBER 117 Figure 16: D811 Module Wiring 09000/07000 Series Operation & Installation Manual 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Page 36 D9412/D9112 Only Arming Devices Description Command Centers, maintained or momentary contact keyswitches, or a combination of the two are used to arm and disarm areas. The panel may contain up to 8 areas. See the Introduction section for a description of areas. Command Centers Terminals to The Radionics Command -nter is a 4 -wire powered device used to arm and disarm areas, annunciate complete system status, initiate system tests, and control many functions of the security system. The system can supervise up to eight Command Centers. The panel transmits a serial device trouble report, SDI FAILURE in the Modem 111a2 M format or TROUBLE ZN D in the BFSK format, if it loses communication with a supervised Command Center. CALL FOR SERVICE appears in any Command Center with text display capability that loses communication with the panel. SERVC KEYPAD appears at all other Command Centers connected to the system. You can connect a total of 32 Command Centers to the system. The number of supervised Command Centers, number of areas, and the available power affect the total number of Command Centers you can connect to the system. See Command Center in the 09000/ 07000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695- 000) for complete programming details on Command Center options. There are four Command Centers available for use with the system. The D1255 features a 16 - character alphanumeric display for general use. The D1256 is also a text display Command Center with functional keys optimized for local fire alarm control. The D1257 is a text display Command Center for fire annunciation. The D720 is an LED display Command Center appropriate for use as a single area Command Center with up to eight points. See the User's Guide (71-06150-000) for operational information. Assigning the Command Center an Address Switches on the Command Center assign an address (1 to 8) to the Command Center. The address determines if the' Command Center is supervised, the Command Center's scope, and what area the Command Center is assigned to. See Command Center Assignment in the 09000/ D7000 Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000) for a complete description of addresses. Table 5 shows the correct switch setting for each address. 1 .2 Switch 3- 4 5 6 Address #1 ON ON ON ON ON Address #2 OFF ON ON ON z ON Address #3 ON OFF ON ON 8 ON Address #4 OFF OFF ON ON z ON Address #5 , Address #6 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON °z ON ON Address #7 ON OFF OFF ON o ON Address #8 .. OFF OFF OFF ON o ON T T Table 5: Command Center Address Settings Installation Consult the Command Center installation manuals for installation and mounting instructions. Command Centers connect to the panel in parallel as shown in Table 6. . 1390 263112 I,. Command Center Terminal - Function ' :Wire Color Function 32 ' 31 30 29 POWER + DATA BUS A DATA BUS B COMMON Red Yellow Green Black 12 VDC Data -In Data -Out Common *Connect with at least 5' of 22 AWG wire (14' of 18 AWG wire) Table 6: Command Center Connections D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 37 74-07692-000-D 12/97 PANEL ONNECTIONS POWER. DATA BUS A DATA BUS 8 COMMON 12 VDC DATA D ATA COMMON Figure 17: Power at Command Centers Switching the green and yellow wires affects other Command Centers: Incorrectly connecting the green wire from the Command Center to terminal 31 and the yellow wire to terminal 30, causes other Command Centers connected to the panel to go blank and/or sound random beep tones. You can connect a maximum of 15,000 feet of 22 AWG wire for all Command Centers, printer modules, and D9210s combined to the data bus, terminals 30 and 31. You can connect parallel wire runs from the panel to each device, run wire device to device, or combine the two. It is recommended , however, that Command Centers be limited to 2,000 feet per run; D9210B modules be limited to 1, 500 feet per run (2,500 feet if using an external power supply), and the D9131A be limited to 11, 000 feet per run. Extra power needed for more Command Centers: The D1255 Command Center draws 104 mA when it is idle•. It draws 206 mA with the keys lit and the sounder activated. Review the Power Outputs section to determine the total power output requirements for your system. You may need to add one or more D8132 Battery Charger/Power Supply Modules for the number of Command Centers you want to use. Figure 17 shows the D8132 powering Command Centers in a stand-alone configuration. D8132 +12VDC COMMON For UL certificated accounts use a UL listed power supply. The D8132 is not UL listed as a stand-alone power supply. Control/Communicator and 08132 (or other power supply) must share COMMON: Note that Figure 19 shows the common from the D8132 module connected to both the Command Centers' common and the common on the Control/ Communicator. A stand-alone power supply powering any device connected to the panel must also be connected to a common terminal on the panel. Do not connect the stand-alone power supply to earth ground other than terminal 10 on the panel. D268/D269 Independent Zone Control D279 Independent Zone Control You can program any on -board or OctoPOPIT point so that the D268/D269 or D279 Independent Zone Control operates as independent point control (arms and disarms the point). See the Point Assignments in the D9000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000) for programming information. See the D268/D269 Operation and Installation Instructions (74-05439-000) or the 0279 Operation and Installation Instructions (74-05442-000) for wiring and operation instructions. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual 74-07692-000-D 12/97, Page 38 Keyswitch Description You can connect a maintained or momentary contact arming station (keyswitch) to master arm/ disarm any of the areas in the system. The keyswitch is connected to an on -board or off - board point's sensor loop. Relays can be programmed to activate arming status LEDs for keyswitch arming stations. See the Relays section of the D9000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000). Programming See the Point Assignments section of the D9000/ D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695- 000) for the correct programming for points used for keyswitches. Installation For maintained switches, connect the end -of -line resistor for the point at the keyswitch so that the switch opens the circuit when it operates. A short on the circuit produces an alarm if the area is armed and a trouble if it is disarmed. See Figure 18. For momentary switches, connect the end -of -line resistor for the point at the keyswitch so that the switch shorts the resistor when it operates. An open on the circuit produces an alarm if the area is armed and a trouble if it is disarmed. See Figure 18. MAINTAINED KEYSWITCH COMMON POINT INPUT Keyswitch Operation Maintained Contact If you program the point the keyswitch is connected to for a maintained contact, an open on the arming circuit arms the area. All faulted points are force armed, regardless of the entry in the FA Bypass Max program item. Returning the circuit to normal disarms the area. See Area Wide Parameters and Point Assignments in the D9000/ D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695- 000). Momentary Contact If you program the point the keyswitch is connected to for a momentary contact, shorting the arming circuit toggles the area's arming state between armed and disarmed. All faulted points are force armed, regardless of the entry in the FA Bypass Max program item. See Point Assignments in the D9000/07000 Series Program Entty Guide (74-07695-000). Silencing the Bell To silence the bell (stop Alarm Bell output) if the system is armed, operate the keyswitch to disarm the area. If the area is disarmed, operate the keyswitch once to start the arming process and a second time to stop the arming process and silence the bell. MOMENTARY KEYSWITCH COMMON OPEN ON CIRCUIT POINT INPUT Figure 18: Keyswitch Wiring ARMS AREA SHORT ON CIRCUIT TOGGLES ARMING STATE 09000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 39 74-07692-000-D 12/97 SDI Devices Description The panel can support a number of accessory devices off the SDI bus using terminals 29 through 32. Such devices include the D1255 Command Center (discussed in the previous section), the D9131A Parallel Printer Interface, and the D9210B Access Control Module. Installation Consult the Operation and Installation Manua/of the specific SDI device for complete installation instructions. SDI devices connect to the panel in parallel as shown in Table 7. •: D9412/D9142 ' erminal `Function" 1 �OIOi y yFUna tilow= 32 POWER + 31 DATA BUS A 30 DATA BUS B 29 COMMON Red Yellow Green Black 12 VDC Data -In Data -Out Common Table 7: SDI Device Connections These devices may share power with the panel or be powered by a stand-alone power source. IMPORTANT! A stand-alone power supply powering any SDI device must also be connected to a common terminal on the panel. Do not connect the stand-alone power supply to earth ground other than terminal 10 on the panel. D9131A Parallel Printer Interface Module The Radionics D9131A Parallel Printer Interface is a 4 -wire powered device used to connect a standard parallel printer to panel. The D9412/ D9112 can supervise three printers, and the D7412/D7212 can supervise one printer. Each printer requires a separate D9131A Printer Interface Module. The D9131A connects to the printer using a standard parallel printer cable. Switch Settings Switches on the D9131A assign a unique address (17 to 19) to each printer. The address determines if the printer is supervised, the printers scope, and what area the printer is assigned to. See Printer Parameters in the D9000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74- 07695-000) for a complete description of addresses. Table 8 shows the correct switch setting for each address. •'" .�Q�ksi :.k:• x�i}@C','6. � y�. ...re�.�• t.z.n='%r�+ p:a..�:q:, ?..r r•.... : wh.�`e^ Printet 1, 2 $'t ,ryu .rr 4.., 6, L"' 17 ON ON ON ON ON 18t OFF ON ON * ON ON 19t ON OFF ON * ON ON t D9412/D9112 only * ON = Header and Form Feed OFF = No Header and Form Feed Table 8: Printer Address Switch Settings Supervision Supervision includes proper operation of the SDI bus, proper connection of the printer cable between the printer and the D9131A, printer paper supply, printer selected (on-line), and printer power. The panel sends an SDI failure report to the receiver if it fails to communicate with the printer interface, and SERVC PRINTER displays at the Command Center. The report to the receiver includes the address of the troubled D9131A so you know which printer needs service. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual 74-07692-000-0 12/97 Page 40 • D9210B Access Control Module The Radionics D9210B Access Control Interface is a 4 -wire powered device providing connections for an access door point and door strike. The D9412 can supervise eight Access Control Modules, and the D7412 can supervise two Access Control Modules. Each Access Control Module supports one door to control access. Programming allows each access door to be configured independently. Using Weigand -style cards or tokens, the D9210B can allow access for up to 996 cards/ tokens on the D9412, 396 on the D7412. User access authority can be configured to restrict access to certain doors or to certain periods of time. The reading of access cards, in addition to granting access, can control whether the system will disarm. Used with the D9412, the D9210B recognizes 250 master users by user name, passcode, and access authority. The D9210B recognizes 99 master users when used with the D7412. Each master user will support three sub - users with unique cards/tokens having the same access level as the master user. Switch Settings Switches on the D9210B assign a unique address (1 to 8) to each module. Table 9 shows the correct switch setting for each D9210B address. CidisfeK. 6 1 ON ON ON OFF ON ON 41X1P,117. 3 ON OFF ON 4 OFF OFF ON 5 ON ON OFF 6 OFF ON OFF 7 ON OFF OFF 8 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON On ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON * Fail Safe Mode (Switch 4) ON = SDI Fail Door Open OFF = SDI Fail Door Close NOTE: Switches 5 and 6 MUST remain in the ON position. Table 9: Access Control Module Address Switch Settings D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 41 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Programmer and Accessory -Connections Programmer Connector (J7) The procedure below shows you how to connect and disconnect the programmer. Refer to D5200 Programmer Operation Manual (74-06176-000) for complete information on using the D5200 programmer. 1. Lock Reset Pin:See Figure 19 (right) and Locking the Reset Pin. 2. Connect the D5200 Data/Power cord into the programmer connector (J7). 3. Perform the desired programming function (send or receive program). 4. Disconnect the programmer. Programmer Access Reports If you send a program to the panel, the panel sends a PROG ACCESS OK report ten seconds after you exit the handler or when you disconnect the programmer. The Diagnostic Reports prompt in Routing must be programmed YES for this report to be sent. Accessory Connector (J2) Use the Accessory Connector (J2) to connect the panel to the D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher. The Accessory Connector is on the bottom right corner of the I/O board. See Figure 20. The D928 allows the panel to use two telephone lines to transmit reports. See 0928 Dual Phone Line Switcher in the Telephone Connections section of this manual for installation and operating instructions. N FOR PROGRAMMING PANEL \ OPereRen Renner Pelee When Rem, 8 Flicker. When Rinsing Roseenl% Marano AR E,eeq Betters Charging end Len, Prgner.ME REO POWER• YELLOW DATA BUS • OREER BLACK F) Figure 19: Reset Pin RESET PIN / NORMAL(OPEN) FOR NORMAL PANEL. OPERATION OWER•• DATA BUS O, DATA BUS B XO COMMON • ZONE% OUT qB) ZONEX IN I 21 ZONEX OUT 2 O ZONEX IN 2 25 ZONEX POWER• • ZONEX COMMON 0 PROG CONN J7 PROGRAMMER J2 ACCESSORY CONNECTOR Figure 20: Programmer and Accessory Connections D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual 74-07692-000-0 12/97 Page 42 D9412 FACEPLATE Zw OJ HCC <0 a_Z 00 2 RESET PIN CCcc w0 1 - awe ccz� Co aU 0 2.7 > cc - oC O H AWN UZ' 00 0 -J W m 1_0 go w 0 u_ N 7Y0- ;17 O) U 0 a 1 6 g 2 U 1— 0 0 cu Li! cc zWcc 00 JOWWU wCCn- zw zO�� =Z M"'" OZ w Z 0 0...IC) H 0 J w c 2 (nu_ LuO 1-0 gZ a1- Um u_ 09000/07000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 43 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Quick Reference Terminal Description Terminal Name Description 1, 2 CLASS 2 TRANSFORMER Connect 16.5 VAC, 40 VA transformer for primary power supply. 3 + AUX POWER Supplies up to 1.4A at 10.2 VDC to 13.9 VDC to powered devices. Use terminal 9 for common. Shares circuit breaker with terminal 24 and the Expansion Port (J4). 4 BATTERY NEGATIVE ONLY Connect 12V, 7Ah rechargeable lead acid type battery's negative terminal (-) to terminal 4. 5 (+) BATTERY POSITIVE ONLY Connect 12V, 7Ah rechargeable lead acid type battery's positive terminal (+). 6 (+) + STEADY OR PULSED ALARM POWER Supplies up to 2 A at 10.2 VDC to 13.9 VDC for steady or pulsed alarm output. Use terminal 9 for common. Programmed as Relay A. Shares circuit breaker with terminals 7 and 8. 7 (+) + ALTERNATE ALARM POWER Supplies up to 2 A at 10.2 VDC to 13.9 VDC for steady or pulsed alarm output. Use terminal 9 for common. Programmed as Relay B. Shares circuit breaker with terminals 6 and 8. D136 Plug-in Relay required: Install a D136 in socket K3 for output at terminal 7. 8 (+) + SWITCHED AUX POWER Supplies up to 1.4 Amps at 10.2 VDC to 13.9 VDC. Use terminal 9 for common. Programmed as Relay C Continuous output interrupted by RESET SENSORS or alarm verification. Shares circuit breaker with terminals 6 and 7. 0136 Plug-in Relay required: Install a D136 in socket K1 for output at terminal 8. 9 COMMON Terminal 9 is common for Auxiliary Power, Steady or Pulsed Alarm Power, Altemate Alarm Power, and Switched Aux Power (terminals 3, 6, 7, and 8). 10 EARTH GROUND Connect to earth ground. A cold water pipe or grounding rod is preferred. Do not connect to telephone or electrical ground. 11 13 14 16, 17, 19, 20, 22 ON -BOARD POINTS (Inputs) Connect normally open and/or normally closed detection devices to loop wiring. 1 k a resistor required at end of loop. 12, 15, 18, 21 ON -BOARD POINTS (Common) Loop retums for on -board points. 23 (-) 24 (+) ZONEX COMMON ZONEX POWER+ D9412/D9112 only] Use terminals 23 and 24 to power ZONEX modules such as the D8125 POPEX module, the D8128C OctoPOPIT, and the D8129 OctoRelay. Shares circuit breaker with terminal 3 and the Expansion Port (J4). 25 26 ZONEX IN 2 ZONEX OUT 2 [D9412/D9112 only] Connect ZONEX modules for points 129 to 247 and relays 65 to 128 to these terminals. 27 28 ZONEX IN 1 ZONEX OUT 1 Connect ZONEX modules for points 9 to 127 and relays 1 to 64 to these terminals. (The D7412/D7212 uses points 9 to 75.) 29 (-) COMMON Common terminal for SDI devices 30 31 DATA BUS B DATA BUS A Terminals 30 and 31 are a two wire bus that drives the command centers, printer interface, and access control modules. 32 (+) POWER + Power for SDI devices. This separate protected power output for SDI devices is not affected by shorts on any other terminal. 74-07692-000-D 12/97 D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 44 roubleshooting` Guide • Introduction Radionics provides this guide to help you troubleshoot problems with the D9412/D9112. To prevent problems from occurring, read the preceding sections of this manual and the Program Entry Guide to verify that the panel is correctly installed and programmed. Self Diagnostics The D9412/D9112 performs a series of self diagnostic tests of its hardware, software, and program at start up and reset. Buzzer sounding is norma/ at start-up: The on- board buzzer located on the lower right corner of the panel sounds as the D9412/D9112 performs its self diagnostic tests at start up and reset. The tests take Tess than two seconds. If all tests are completed successfully, the buzzer turns off. The panel continues periodic internal testing during normal operation. If a fault is detected during this testing the buzzer begins sounding. One of the system messages listed below displays at the Command Centers. CALL FOR SERVICE - Trouble at Command Center When a Command Center stops receiving data from the panel, CALL FOR SERVICE appears in the Command Center's display. No buzzer sounds at the Command Center. PANEL BROKEN - Hardware, Software Failed If a hardware or software problem causes the buzzer to sound, the green operation monitor LED stops flickering or is off. PANEL BROKEN appears in the displays of all Command Centers. Pressing "ESC" does not silence the buzzer. You must return the panel to Radionics for repair. Attach a Radionics Return Tag or call Customer Service for a return authorization. PARAM FAIL - Program Parameters Failed If a corrupted program causes the buzzer to sound, the green operation monitor LED continues to flicker. See Operation Monitor LED in the Telephone Connections section for a description of the green LED. PARAM FAIL alternates with the idle text at the Command Centers. The panel sends a PARAM FAIL report to the receiver. Pressing "ESC" may silence the buzzer. Si/ening the buzzer does not correct the prob/em: You must replace the corrupted copy of the program in the panel. Load a new copy of the complete program. The displays clears when you reset the panel after loading a new program. SERVC AC FAIL - AC Power Failed An interruption of AC Power at terminals 1 and 2 causes SERVC AC FAIL to appear in Command Center displays. You can program the panel to send an AC FAILED report to the receiver. Pressing "ESC" silences the buzzer. Restoring power clears the display. SERVC BATT LOW - Battery Voltage Low If battery voltage at terminals 4 and 5 falls below 12.1 VDC, a SERVC BATT LOW appears in Command Center displays. See Battery and Power Reports in this section for probable causes and remedies. Pressing "ESC" silences the buzzer. The display clears when battery voltage reaches 13.7 VDC. SERVC BATT MSING - Battery Missing, Shorted, or Reversed If the panel can not detect a battery at terminals 4 and 5, a SERVC BATT MSING appears in Command Center displays. You can program the panel to send a BATTERY MISSING report to the receiver. Pressing "ESC" silences the buzzer. Restoring the battery clears the display. COMM FAIL ROUTE# 1 (or 2, 3, 4) - Route Communications Failure FAIL ROUTE # appears in Command Center displays after the panel makes 10 unsuccessful attempts to report to the receiver. Pressing "ESC" silences the buzzer. The display clears when communication restores (the receiver acknowledges a report). See Communication Failure in the Telephone Connections section for a complete description. 09000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 45 74-07692-000-0 12/97 SERVC KEYPAD - Supervised Command Center Missing When the panel loses contact with a supervised Command Center, SERVC KEY PAD appears at other Command Centers connected to the panel. The panel transmits an SDI FAILURE report to the receiver. See also CALL FOR SERV/CE. Pressing "ESC" silences the buzzer. The displays clear when contact with the missing Command Center restores. SERVC 9210 # - D9210B Access Interface Module Missing When the panel looses contact with a D9210B Access Interface Module, SERVC 9210 #n appears at the other command centers connected to the panel. The panel transmits an SDI FAILURE ## report to the receiver. See also CALL FOR SERVICE. PH LINE #1: (or 2) - Phone Line Failure SERVC PH LINE #1 (SERVC PH LINE #2) appears in Command Center displays when the panel detects a phone line as faulted. Pressing "ESC" silences the buzzer. The display clears when the panel detects a normal phone line. See Phone Line Monitorin the Telephone Connections section for a complete description. SERVC PRINTER - Supervised Printer Missing When the panel loses contact with a supervised printer, SERVC PRINTER appears in Command Center displays. Pressing "ESC" silence§ the buzzer. The displays clear when contact with the missing printer restores. Phone Line Trouble Phone line problems that are not corrected can result in the panel going into Communications Failure. You can program the D9412/D9112 to monitor one or two phone lines. See the D9000/ D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695- 000) for programming instructions. If you enable the phone line monitor, SERVC PHONE LINE #1 (or 2 if two lines are used) appears in the Command Center's display when the panel detects a problem on the phone line. Symptom Diagnosis Remedy:: SERVC PH LINE #1 The panel's phone line 1. Verify that the telephone cord is correctly (or 2 if two lines are monitor detects a connected to the RJ31X and the panel. used) appears in phone line as faulted. command center 2. Verify the Ground Start Jumper is in the display. correct position. 3. If using a ground start phone line, verify D136 relay is in socket K6/J5. 4. Verify that the RJ31X jack is wired correctly. The incoming phone line must be wired to terminals 4 and 5. The in- house phone system must be wired to terminals 1 and 8. 5. Verify that all telephones are on -hook. Leaving a telephone on hold after the other party hangs up creates an off -hook condition. Verify that no phones are on hold. If completing the steps above does not restore the phone line, meter the phone lines. You should meter 4.5 to 7.5 VDC when the line is idle (on -hook). You should meter 8 to 13 mA of current when the line is active (off -hook). If your readings are below the minimum values, contact your telephone company repair service. 74-07692-000-D 12/97 09000/07000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 46 Communications Failure The panel goes into Communications Failure after ten unsuccessful attempts to reach the receiver. Follow the Phone Line Troub/e procedure to verify that there is no problem with the phone lines at the installation. If the phone lines are good, monitor the Tines (preferably at the receiver) for the symptoms listed below. Symptom Diagnosis Remedy The line rings but the D6500 receiver does not pick up. RING indicator on line card does not light. Can not hear ring with headset at receiver location. Line is not ringing at the receiver. 1. Verify that the lines are correctly connected to the receiver. 2. Verify that correct prefixes and phone numbers for the receiver have been programmed into the panel. If completing the steps above does not correct the problem, contact your telephone company repair service. The panel is unable to call out when all 248 points are faulted. The total current draw is too much for the panel. Put command centers on a separate power supply to get maximum current draw from points in alarm. The line rings but the receiver does not pick up. RING indicator on line card lights. Can hear ring with test set at receiver location. Line card in receiver may be faulty. Review receiver manuals for trouble shooting procedures. The panel reaches a busy signal for all ten attempts to reach the receiver. Calls are not reaching the receiver. 1. Verify that correct prefixes and phone numbers for the receiver have been programmed into the panel. 2. Verify that the phone lines are not shorted between the phone company's equipment and the receiver by placing a call to the number for the receiver. If you hear the line ring, but the ring detector doesn't light, or if you hear a busy signal and the green on line (OL) indicator is not lit, call the phone company for service. The receiver's call load is too great. Additional line cards and phone lines may be needed for the receiver. The receiver answers the call and provides an acknowledgment tone, but the communicator does not transmit reports. The receiver is not producing the correct acknowledgment tone. Verifythat the receiver is producing a 1400 Hz, 2300 Hz, or Modem IIIa2 acknowledgment tone. Panel does not connect to central station. The D136 relay in J10 for ground start phone systems is inserted incorrectly. Insert the D136 relay in socket J10 correctly. Also check that phone line is connected and that phone jack is wired properly. See the Relays section of this manual for instructions. The receiver answers the call and provides an initial "handshake" acknowledgment, but does not acknowledge the panel's report transmission with a "kiss -off" acknowledgment . The receiver is not compatible with the panel's transmission format. Verify that the receiver is compatible with the format the panel is using (either BFSK or Radionics Modem IIIa2TM Communications Format). See Phone in the 09000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000). The panel requires D6500 MPU and Line Card EPROM revision 8.00 or higher. Noisy phone lines are interfering with report transmission. Try making a voice call to the receiver on the line to verify the noisy condition. It may be necessary to have the phone company check the lines. D9000/07000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 47 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Problems Programming the Panel Before attempting to program the panel, you should be familiar with the basic operation of the D5200 programmer. See the D5200 Operation Manua/ (74-06176-000). If you still experience problems, check for the symptoms below. Symptom Diagnosis Remedy The programmer displays PLUG IN D9412 (or D9112 or D7412 or D7212) when you press SEND or RECV. The programmer is not correctly connected to the panel. 1. Verify that the data/power cord is plugged into the COMMUNICATOR port on the D5200. 2. Verify that the data/power cord is plugged securely into the panel's programmer connector (J7). 3. Check each conductor in the data/power cord for continuity. AC induction through the on- board point sensor loops, the DATA BUS, or the ZONEX BUS. 1. Verify a proper earth ground at terminal 10. 2 Disconnect on -board point sensor loops, the DATA BUS (terminals 30, 31), and the ZONEX BUS (terminals 25, 26,27,28). After plugging in the programmer, the panel transmits SDI trouble reports for supervised SDI devices (command centers, printer interface modules, etc.). All SDI devices stop operating. You haven't entered the panel handler within 30 seconds of plugging in the programmer. Enter the panel handler within 30 seconds of plugging in the programmer. Once the SDI reports are generated, sending or receiving a handler or disconnecting the programmer returns the SDI devices to normal operation. Problems with Points If you incorrectly set the switches on a POPIT you may create both a missing and extra point. When you find a missing point, perform a Service Walk Test to search for extra points. See the Owner's Manua/(71-06150-000) for test instructions. Symptom Diagnosis `Remedy, Point appears as missing at command centers and in reports to the receiver. POPIT is not connected or incorrectly connected to the data expansion loop. Verify that a POPIT module programmed for the missing point number is connected to the data expansion loop of the correct ZONEX module. Points 9 to 127 connect to ZONEX module 1. Points 129 to 247 connect to ZONEX module 2. Meter each POPIT to verify the polarity of the data expansion loop. Voltage should be 9 to 13 VDC at each POPIT. D8128C OctoPOPIT is installed at the last address on the ZONEX bus. Install a D8125 POPEX and D9127 POPITs for points 121-127 on ZONEX 1 and for points 241-247 on ZONEX 2. Sensor loop switch (1 to 8) is turned off on OctoPOPIT. If the sensor loop switch on an OctoPOPIT is turned off for a programmed point, the point reports as missing. POPIT is not programmed correctly. Verify that the switches on the POPIT are set for the missing POPIT number. Switches set incorrectly can cause both missing and extra POPITs. Performing a Service Walk Test to search for extra points may help diagnose the problem. Points intermittently appear as missing. Points are erratic. Problem with data expansion loop. See Problems with Data Expansion Loop. Debounce Count parameter set at 1. If an off -board point is in transition between normal and faulted conditions as the panel scans it, it appears as missing. It is recommended that the Debounce Count be left at the default of 2. Decreasing the Debounce Count to 1 may cause points to appear as missing. Increasing the Debounce may cause missed alarms. 74-07692-000-D 12/97 D9000/O7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 48 Problems with Points (Continued) Symptom .,. _ ,Diagnosis Remedy One or more points remain in trouble or alarm with all devices connected to the sensor loops normal. The sensor loop is open, shorted, or grounded. Opens, shorts, or grounds cause troubles or alarms depending on point programming. Remove the sensor loop from the panel or POPIT and meter it for continuity. There should be no more than 100 ohm resistance, plus the value of the end of line resistor on the wires. If you meter less resistance than the value of the end of line resistor, check the wiring for shorts. With the wires for the loop removed, meter them for continuity to ground. A ground before the end of line resistor on an on -board point's sensor loop is interpreted as a short. A ground on a sensor loop for a POPIT point is interpreted as an open. Faulted points do not generate alarms or troubles as programmed. Sensor Reset pressed at the time the alarm or trouble was generated. The panel ignores input from all points in the same area programmed for sensor reset during sensor reset. Two points are programmed with the same address. Points programmed with the same address do not function correctly. Check to be certain that you have not duplicated point addresses. Panel transmits PT BUS TROUBLE reports. Erroneous alarm and/or trouble reports may follow PT BUS TROUBLE report. Erroneous alarm and/or trouble events for off - board points appear at command centers. Short on D8125 POPEX module's Data Expansion Loop or short on panel's ZONEX data terminals (25 & 26, or 27 & 28). A short on either the Data Expansion Loop or the ZONEX data terminals generates a PT BUS TROUBLE report. While the short remains, the panel responds as though the sensor loop for each point connected to the POPEX module was shorted. Check wiring for shorts. The POPIT address switches are set incorrectly (for points 128 or 248) or the OctoPOPIT address switches are set incorrectly (for points 121-128 or points 241-248). Check to be certain all POPIT and OctoPOPIT address switches are set correctly. POPITs cannot be used for points 128 or 248 (these are reserved for panel functions). OctoPOPITs cannot be used for points 121-128 or 241-248. All off -board points are MISSING. Short on Aux Power, terminal 3 or ZONEX power, terminal 24. Terminals 3 and 24 share a common circuit breaker. Check wiring and devices connected to these terminals for shorts or grounds. If only one POPEX module is connected to the panel, POPEX module may be incorrectly connected to the panel or Data Expansion Loop may be disconnected from POPEX module. Check POPEX module for correct connections to the panel and the Data Expansion Loop. If you find missing points, the service walk test may help you diagnose the problem (see Extra Points below). Keyswitch points (P## Type is programmed as 4,5,6,7, or 9) report as missing. If area is armed, the point reports a MISSING ALARM. If the area is disarmed, the point reports a MISSING TROUBLE. Point is disconnected from the SDI data bus. The POPIT cover may have been removed and not replaced or the cover is not seated properly. The point will restore when the SDI bus is reconnected or when the POPIT cover is seated firmly on the POPIT. Connected points show as extra points when the point bus is shorted beyond the programmed debounce time. The points have no point index programmed. This will be corrected when the short is retumed to normal. Extra Points If the panel is not in the service walk test mode when an extra point trips, the panel responds to it as a local TROUBLE event at the Command Center or central station (see Routing in the Program Entry Guide). It displays the custom text for the point number set in the point's dipswitch or on -board point location. When an extra point is tripped during the service walk test, it reports as an EXTRA point in the panel's event log and at the local printer (if installed). Once an extra point is identified you can check the programming to see if it has a Point Index programmed. You can then determine if the point index is appropriate for the application and that the area assignment is correct. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 49 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Problems with the D8125 POPEX Data Expansion Loops EMI (Electro -magnetic Interference), excessive resistance, or intermittent grounds, shorts, or opens on the data expansion loop can cause erratic or intermittent functioning of points. Follow the procedures below to find the source of problems on the data expansion loop. EMI If you suspect EMI may be a problem, see EMI on Long Wire Runs in this section. AC induction on the data expansion loops must be less than 10 VAC. Metering the Loops Before you follow the procedures below to meter the data expansion loops, check Table 1 (on page 38) to be sure you used the correct gauge wire for the length of the data expansion loops. When you meter the loop, monitor it Tong enough to observe an intermittent problem. To meter the data expansion loop without POPITs connected to it: 1. Disconnect the loop from the POPEX module. 2. Twist the positive and then the negative wires together at each POPIT location so that the positive and negative wires are continuous to the last POPIT location. 3. At the last POPIT location twist the end of the positive wire to the negative wire to form one continuous loop. 4. Meter the loop for continuity from the point where it connected to the POPEX module. Resistance for the entire loop must be less than 60 ohm. If there is no continuity, find and repair the open on the loop. 5. Still metering for continuity, untwist the negative and positive wires at the last POPIT location. If the meter does not show an open condition, find and repair the short on the loop. 6. Twist the positive and negative wires at the last POPIT location back together. 7. Meter the loop for continuity to terminal 10 (earth ground). If there is continuity, find and remove the foreign ground on the loop. 8. Meter the loop to terminal 10 for AC voltage. AC induction on data expansion loops must be less than 1 VAC. Try using shielded cable to reduce AC induction if the AC voltage exceeds 1 VAC. Checking Shielded Cable If improperly installed, shielded cable can create problems rather than solve them. Follow the procedure below to check shielded cable for proper installation. 1. Remove the drain wire for the shield from terminal 10. 2. Meter the drain wire for continuity to terminal 10 (earth ground). If there is continuity, find and remove the foreign ground on the drain wire. 3. Reconnect the drain wire to terminal 10. 4. Meter the shield at the far end of the cable (last POPIT location on data expansion loops) for continuity to a ground reference. If there is no continuity, find and repair the open in the shield. Solder and tape all connections. EMI on Long Wire Runs EMI (ElectroMagnetic Interference) can cause problems on long wire runs for serial devices (Command Centers, POPITs, etc.). The use of shielded cable reduces the effect of this interference. Some potential sources of noise on a long wire run include: • Radio or television transmitter site. • Ham radio operator's transmitter site. • Computer network system. • Heavy machinery (large electrical motors). • PBX telephone system. • High voltage electrical equipment or transformers (arc welders, certain medical and dental equipment, etc.). • Public service office using radio communications (fire department, police department, etc.). • Close proximity to electrical lines, telephone cabling, or fluorescent lighting fixtures. There are many other possible sources of noise. If you suspect that noise may be a problem, the use of shielded wire is strongly recommended. Connect the drain wire from the shielded cable to terminal 10 on the panel. The drain wire must have continuity from the panel to the last serial device on the wire run. If you cut the cable to install devices between the last device and the panel, be certain to reconnect the drain wire to insure continuity to the last serial device. If continuity is not maintained between the panel and the last serial device, the shielded cable may aggravate potential noise problems rather than eliminate them. Connecting the drain wire to ground at other than terminal 10 on the panel may also produce problems. Do not connect the drain wire to any other ground source. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Page 50 Problems with Command Centers Symptom -Diagnosis Remedy Command centers show erratic behavior. For example, the pip that confirms you pressed a key "echoes." More than one command center has the same supervised address. Entering a supervised address in more than one command center causes erratic behavior. Use a supervised address in one command center only. Supervised addresses support only one command center per address. Data connections (yellow and green wires) on one or more command centers are reversed, or only one wire is connected. Check to be sure that the yellow and green data wires are correctly connected at all command centers. NO AUTHORITY displays at command center when you enter your passcode to perform a function. Check the User/nterfacesection of the program to be sure the function is enabled for Authority Level assigned to the passcode in the Passcode Worksheetsection of the program. Check the Passcode Worksheetsection of the program to be certain the passcode is assigned to the area where you are attempting to perform the function. Check the Passcode Worksheetsection of the program to see if the passcode is restricted by a user window. Check the Area Parameters section of the program to be certain the area you are attempting to perform the function in is turned on. Battery and Power Reports You can program the panel to transmit both battery and AC power status reports. See the D9000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74- 07695-000). If battery or AC power reports are a problem check the following. 1. Check to be sure you are not overloading the panel's power supply. Review the Power Outputs section and Overloaded Power Supp/y in this section. 2. Verify that there is at least 16.5 VAC on terminals 1 and 2. 3. The outlet the transformer is plugged into should meter between 110 VAC and 120 VAC. 4. Verify that the output for the transformer connected to terminals 1 and 2 is rated for 16.5 VAC and at least 40 VA. 5. Disconnect the transformer from terminals 1 and 2 and meter the battery at terminals 3 and 4. A fully charged battery should show 13.8 volts. 6. Make sure the battery is a 12 V sealed lead acid type. It should be rated at 7 Ah or greater, depending on the NFPA classification of the installation. 7. If it takes longer than 60 seconds to detect a missing battery, make sure you have good earth ground connection. Also check that there are no external devices that may be inducing voltage. Watchdog Reset Reports The panel sends a WATCHDOG RESET report whenever the panel's CPU (Central Processing Unit) is interrupted and has to start its normal operating sequence over. The on -board buzzer sounds briefly during the WATCHDOG reset. The panel returns to normal operation immediately after resetting. The most common cause of CPU interruption and WATCHDOG RESET reports is static discharge to the panel. Static discharges may also corrupt the panel's program. The D9412/D9112 displays a PARAM FAIL message at the Command Centers and sends PARM CKSUM FAIL report if the program is corrupted. Shorting terminals 3, 6, 7, 8, or 24, or connector J4 to ground may also cause a WATCHDOG RESET. Remove the short to continue normal operation. A single isolated WATCHDOG RESET report does not mean you have to replace the panel. If you experience frequent reports, contact Radionics Customer Service for help. Touch Terminal 10 first: If the on -board buzzer sounds briefly when you first touch the panel, you're discharging any static charge you may be carrying to the panel. The panel may generate WATCHDOG RESET and/or PARAM FAIL events. Always touch terminal 10, the panel's earth ground connection, before beginning work on the panel. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 51 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Runaway Reports to the Receiver Using the D8128 or D8128A in place of the D8128C OctoPOPIT Module may cause runaway reports to the receiver on AC failure. Be sure to replace all D8128 or D8128A OctoPOPITS with the D8128C module. Overloaded Power Supply If the Toad on the panel's power supply exceeds it's capacity, the panel follows a routine to protect itself and the battery. It sends reports to the Central Station at several points during this routine. Keep in mind that AC power remains at terminals 1 and 2 as you read the overload scenario below. • The panel is operating normally with a good battery, AC is present at terminals 1 and 2, and auxiliary power load is under 1.4A. • Combined load on terminals 3, 6, 7, 8, 24, and 32, and connector J2 and J4 exceeds and remains above 1.4A. Device failure or premises wiring ground faults might cause the increased load. • The panel begins drawing on the battery to support the increased load. The yellow charging status LED turns on. • The battery begins to drain. When voltage drops to 12.1 volts, the panels sends a LOW BATTERY report and turns on the red Low Battery LED. • When the battery drops to 10.2 volts the panel disconnects it to protect it from deep discharge. • If AC is still present, the panel removes power to terminals 3, 6, 7, 8, 24, and 32, and connector J4 to protect its power supply. The green operation monitor LED turns off, but the panel is still operating. • The panel sends BATTERY MISSING, PT BUS TROUBLE, and SDI FAILURE reports. • If a D928 module is connected to J2, it begins sounding. • After approximately 60 seconds the panel attempts to return to normal operation by returning power to terminals 3, 6, 7, 8, 24, and 32, and connector J4. • If the overload condition is still present, the panel removes power. • The panel attempts to return to normal operation approximately every 60 seconds. • The cause of the overload is removed. Combined load on terminals 3, 6, 7, 8, 24, and 32, and connectors J2 and J4 remains below 1.4A. • With the overload removed, the panel returns power to terminals 3, 6, 7, 8, 24, and 32, and connector J4. The panel sends PT Bus RESTORAL and SDI RESTORAL reports. • If a D928 module is connected to J2, it stops sounding. • If the battery voltage is below 8.4 volts, the panel does not reconnect it. You must replace the battery. • When the battery reaches 13.7 volts the panel sends a BATTERY RESTORE report and turns off the red Low Battery LED. • When the battery reaches 13.9 volts the panel turns off the yellow Charging Status LED. Service Walk Test The Service Walk Test differs from the standard Walk Test in that POPITs whose switches are set for a point number not programmed in the panel appear in the test. The Service Walk Test allows a user to walk test all 246 points (246 PTS TO TEST will appear in the D7000 Series as well even though there are a maximum of 75 points available) from a panel - wide Command Center, regardless of the point index type. Service Walk Tests may also be initiated by account -wide or area -wide Command Centers but will only test those points that fall within the scope of the Command Center that initiated the function. The Service Walk Test will not test points in areas that are currently armed. Warning: Fire and other 24-hour points do not transmit reports during Service Walk Test! The steps below outline a simple Service Walk Test procedure. The flow chart on the next page shows all the Service Walk Test options. 1. Choose a Command Center to conduct the test. Be certain the display shows the idle disarmed text. 2. Press the MENU key to enter the Function List. Press NEXT repeatedly until you reach the SERVICE WALK ?prompt. Press ENT. Or you may press 99 followed by ENT to reach the Service Menu to access the Service Walk Test. Note: The D7000 Series does NOT include the Service Walk Test in the Service Menu. Therefore, the D7000 Series must have the Service Walk Test function enabled in the Function List in order for the Service Walk Test to be accessed. 3. The display shows ### PTS TO TEST. Test the first detection device. 4. As you fault the detection devices, the Command Center emits a brief tone and D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual 74-07692-000-0 12/97 Page 52 displays the point text of the point tested for 60 seconds. After 60 seconds, the display returns to the points to test message. Extra Points display defau/t text: If you incorrectly set the switches on a POPIT to a point number that is not in your program for the panel, the default text for that point number (PT ###) displays when you fault the point. The Program Record Sheet shows the default text for all points. Faulting the point a second time produces the tone and displays the point text, but does not reduce the PTS TO TESTcount. 5. During the Service Walk Test you may want to see the points that remain untested. When point text is displayed, press "ESC". The display shows ## PTS TO TEST. Press the "ESC" key. VIEW UNTESTED ? is displayed. Press ENT. ## PTS UNTESTED is displayed. Press NEXT to see a list of the points that have not yet been tested. Move through this list by pressing the NEXT key. To resume the Service Walk Test, press "ESC". ## PTS UNTESTED is displayed. Press "ESC". ##PTS TO TESTis displayed. Resume testing points. To end the Service Walk Test, press "ESC" twice. 6. After testing the last point, 0 PTS TO TEST' displays. Press "ESC". The display momentarily shows ALL PTS TESTED before returning to idle text. *Note: The Service Walk Test, when performed on a D7412 or D7212, cannot display "0 points to test" as it is physically unable to connect to the second POPEX module (used for points 129- 247). Automatic time-out returns the system to id/e text: If there is no point or Command Center activity for 20 minutes, the walk test ends automatically. The Command Center returns to idle text. IDLE TEXT SERVICE WALK ? ENT V 246 PTS TO TEST Test a device POINT TEXT (Text displays 60 seconds) 245 PTS TO TEST 1 Test a device POINT TEXT ESC (Text displays 60 seconds) T 244 PTS TO TEST Test a device 7 POINT TEXT 1 PTS TO TEST 1 Test a device 0 PTS TO TEST VIEW UNTESTED ? ENT # PTS UNTESTED ESC NEXT POINT TEXT Figure 21: Service Walk Test Flow Chart ESC D9000/O7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 53 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Approved xApplications Compliance Guide Listings and Approvals Fire UL Underwriters Laboratories lists the D9412, D9112, D7412, and D7212 Control/Communicators as Signal System Control Units for: Central Station, Local, Auxiliary, Remote Station, and Household Fire Waming. CSFM Approved by the California State Fire Marshal. NYC -MEA Approved by New York City's Materials and Equipment Acceptance System. Factory Mutual (FM) Approved by Factory Mutual. Burglary UL Underwriters Laboratories lists the D9412, D9112, D7412, and D7212 Control/Communicators for: Central Station, Local, Police Connect, Bank Safe and Vault, Mercantile Safe and Vault, and Grade A Household systems. Department of Defense (DOD) The D9412, D9112, D7412, and D7212 have been granted approval for Department of Defense (DOD) installations in Sensitive Compartmented Information Facilities (SCIF). Introduction The System Chart references components evaluated and listed by Underwriters' Laboratories for compatibility with the Control/Communicator. These components meet the basic system requirements for the applicable standard. The System Wiring Diagram, Issue A shows the relationship between the panel and the accessory components referred to in the System Chart. Optional Compatible Equipment You can use UL listed components that do not require evaluation for electrical compatibility in many applications when installed according to the manufacturer's instructions. Burglary Applications You can use UL listed burglary alarm sensors that do not require evaluation for electrical compatibility in burglary applications. In some cases you must use a UL listed Radionics interface module in conjunction with the sensors. Consult the individual component specification and installation documents to determine suitability. Test weekly: UL Standard 1023 requires a weekly test for residential burglary applications. Bank Safe and Vault Applications You must use the UL listed Model 5110 Bell and Model 4001-42 External Line Balancer (both made by Rothenbuhler) for the bell and balanced line module in bank safe and vault applications. Modifications must be made to the Radionics D8108A enclosure to meet UL standard 681. See the Radionics Technogram D7212/09112 UL Certificated Bank Safe and Vault Applications (73- 07302-000). Test bell at arming: UL Standard 365 requires a bell test at arming for bank safe and vault applications. Fire Applications You can use UL listed fire initiating devices not requiring electrical compatibility evaluation in any application. For example: 4 -wire smoke detectors, heat detectors, water flow switches, and manual pull stations are suitable fire initiating devices. Consult the individual component specification and installation documents to determine suitability. Two -wire smoke detectors only connect to the panel through the D125B Powered Loop Interface so that an earth ground will not cause an alarm. Two -wire detectors must be evaluated for electrical compatibility, and must be UL listed for use with the panel. See the Radionics Technogram Smoke Detectors Compatible with the 09000/D7000(33284), or you may contact the detector manufacturer. Other initiating devices, including four -wire smoke detectors connect to the panel through the D129 Dual Class A Initiation Circuit Module, the D125B Powered Loop Interface, or D8127 or D9127 POPITs. When using 4 -wire smoke detectors, install a suitable power supervision unit according to the manufacturer's instructions. Use the D130 Relay Module, D8129 OctoRelay, or terminal 8, Switched Aux Power to provide reset capability. See the Off -Board Relays section of this manual for details on the installation of the D8129. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual 74-07692-000-0 12/97 Page 54 For battery calculations, refer to Current Rating Chart for Standby Battery Calculations, Standby Battery Requirements, and Standby Battery Calculation for NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Applications. Test weekly: Radionics recommends you perform a Fire Test weekly. The AC power is automatically tested as is the battery per UL 864. Enclosures Radionics offers three optional enclosures for the control/communicator. • The D8103 enclosure is suitable for residential fire and/or burglary installations and commercial burglary applications that do not require attack resistance or approval by Factory Mutual or NYC -MEA. (See the System Chart for acceptable applications.) • The D8108A is attack resistant. It is intended primarily for UL commercial burglar alarm and mercantile safe and vault applications _requiring a local bell. You can use the D8108A in any burglar or fire alarm application where the 5591 or D8109 enclosure is suitable. The D8108A, with some modification, can be used for bank safe and vault applications (see the Radionics Technogram D7212/D9112 UL Certificated Bank Safe and Vault Applications, RPN: 73- 07302-000). UL lists the D8108A for all commercial fire alarm applications. The D8108A is approved by Factory Mutual, California State Fire Marshal, and the New York City Materials and Equipment Acceptance System. • The D8109 is normally used for commercial fire alarm applications. UL lists the D8109 for all commercial fire alarm applications. The D8109 is approved by the California State Fire Marshal, NYC -MEA and FM. Note: All references to NFPA and related requirements are based upon compliance with the 1993 edition of NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. Since installation specifications are nearly always based upon a specific edition of a standard which has been legally adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), earlier editions of NFPA standards will generally apply. Consult with the appropriate AHJ for confirmation. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 55 74-07692-000-D 12/97 System Chart - 74-07692-000-D 12/97 09000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 56 re:20 V O N 2 m O 0150 713.2 g oN0 Y 0 QN N y15 0, U —=0 L y L 5 C m T m y C O @ C o D 0 C Omw �2 Wx o • cCymDU ? yU nOvO>mT 0 > Cn o- E m H v o2 03E •,;, o S'15: -S -13% -g -2-2— 'O m H mm N m N = po m N i2. v�Z E H o> d y n my 3 >D -- o m 0 A N m 3 Q 2 'x t O J n + + <. W 0 o _ r.00 Q -Y N C O O 0> E y O w n m e , jN .-y- nQ N m 0 C O] _ O L • C m: m H E 'S� V o c U O 10 N O O A p C =.0= U on� n u o m n m o m o • c211 C m R= 6 U y 0 U O ; C O • G l n C d ▪ Hef=0O m L a N d m rn v v m n y 5 o m m ^ 0 0 o C o n n E d n O N N o o O 41 C n 0 o c n ¢ u ZOxs Household Burglary Household Fire Household Fire/ Burglary Combined Central Station Burglary (Grade C) Police Connected Burglary Local Burglary Remote Station or Auxiliary Fire Local Fire/Burglary Combined Local Fire Local and Central Station Fire Combined Local and Central Station Fire/Burglary (Grade C) Central Station Fire/ Burglary Combined Central Station Fire Electrically Actuated Transmitter Minimum Hours of Standby Battery 4 24+ 4 mins alarm 24+ 4 mins alarm 4 4 4 60+ 5 mins alarm 24+ 5 mins alarm 24+ 5 mins alarm 24+ 5 mins alarm 24+ 5 mins alarm 24+ 5 mins alarm 24+ 5 m ins alarm 24+ 5 mins alarm D8103 Enclosure Choose one.. D101 lock requ red for enclosure No No No No No No No No No No D8108A Enclosure Req. Req. Choose one Req. Choose one. D8109 Enclosure No No No D122 and D122L Dual Battery Harness Calculate current draw to determine if second battery is required fleQ' Ca culate current draw to determine if second battery is required D125B Powered Loop Interface Opt. # # Opt. Opt. Opt. e - D125 or 0129 required to connect fire alarm initiating devices to zones 1-8. D125 provides two poweredloops for connecting listed 2 -wire smoke detectors. 0129 provides two non -powered Class A initiating circuits. D129 Class A Initiating Module # # D126 Battery 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ 2+ 1+ 1+ I 1+ 1+ 1+ ' 1+ 1+ D127 Reversing Relay Opt. No Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. No I Opt. No I No Opt. Opt. No No D928 Dual Phone Line Module Opt Opt Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Required for communication on two phone lines and/or CPU watchdog function. D161 Telephone Cord Required to connect panel to RJ31X TetCo. Block 2 Req. Two Required 10 connect D128 Moduleto RJ31X TelCo. Blocks D185 Auxiliary Interface Kit D192Bell Circuit Supervision S Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Required for indicating circuits. Opt. Opt. Smoke Detector/Base 1++ 1++ Opt. 1 Opt. I Opt. I Opt. I Opt. I Opt. Opt. D268/D269H Independent Zone Control Optional, only connect to zones 1 to 8. Indicating Device 1+ I 1+ 1+ Opt. I •• 1 •• 1+ 1+, "I 1+ 1 1+ 1+ I Opt. I Opt. D461 Pull Station Optional, may be required by job specifications and/or Authority Having Jurisdiction. D1255 Comnd Center 1+ 1+ 1+ 1+ I 1+ I 1+ I 1+ 1+ 1+ 1 1+ I 1+ 1 1+ Opt. D1256 Opt. I Opt. I Opt. Opt. I Opt. I Opt. I Opt. I Opt. I Opt. I Opt. Opt. I Opt. I Opt. Opt. D1257 Opt. I Opt. !Opt. Opt. !Opt. Opt. I Opt. I Opt. I Opt. I Opt. Opt. I Opt. I Opt. Opt. D1640 Transformer Required for all applications. D8004 Transformer Enclosure Opt. p Opt. p Opt. p Opt. p Opt. p Opt. p Required. . q D8122 Derived Channel S.T.U. Optional, contact TelCo. for availability of derived channel service. D8125 POPEX Module Required for D8127T/U and D9127T/U POPITs. D8127T/U & D9127T/U POPIT Modules Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. D8128C OctoPOPIT Opt. No Opt. Opt. I Opt. Opt. No Opt. No No Opt. Opt. No No 08129 OctoRelay Optional,.forremote annunciation of system functions. D8130 Release Module Optional. D8132 Battery Charger See Current' Rating Chart and Standby Battery Requirements to determine if system requires a D8132 Module for increased battery standby. D9 Parallel Printer Interface Optional, use with parallel printer to print events from panel log locally. D9210B Access Control Interface No No No Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. No 74-07692-000-D 12/97 09000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 56 re:20 V O N 2 m O 0150 713.2 g oN0 Y 0 QN N y15 0, U —=0 L y L 5 C m T m y C O @ C o D 0 C Omw �2 Wx o • cCymDU ? yU nOvO>mT 0 > Cn o- E m H v o2 03E •,;, o S'15: -S -13% -g -2-2— 'O m H mm N m N = po m N i2. v�Z E H o> d y n my 3 >D -- o m 0 A N m 3 Q 2 'x t O J n + + <. W 0 o _ r.00 Q -Y N C O O 0> E y O w n m e , jN .-y- nQ N m 0 C O] _ O L • C m: m H E 'S� V o c U O 10 N O O A p C =.0= U on� n u o m n m o m o • c211 C m R= 6 U y 0 U O ; C O • G l n C d ▪ Hef=0O m L a N d m rn v v m n y 5 o m m ^ 0 0 o C o n n E d n O N N o o O 41 C n 0 o c n ¢ u ZOxs System Wiring Diagrams, Issue A D9412 Control/Communicator ifigM a u / I \ec) aH g , /18 glg a �N N Yd001 ��Nrr� 0 m MAh t2?B nir aN i$ �m n gas; a SJId0d0130 082180 61 01d11 II S1IdOd0130 082180 41 010 ONO xrw vivo 0 v aN'J xnv lno NI Ae gis NI lno xnv ONO gi ISO v•0 ayy Mr- D9000/D7000 m D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 57 74-07692-000-0 12/97 Im Ia1 1101 1 �01 FE X101 In! ?IDI X101 .101 IInn 'PA ilia 131ElmIGIa13101Gh SJId0d0130 082180 61 01d11 II S1IdOd0130 082180 41 010 ONO xrw vivo 0 v aN'J xnv lno NI Ae gis NI lno xnv ONO gi ISO v•0 ayy Mr- D9000/D7000 m D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 57 74-07692-000-0 12/97 D9112 Control/Communicator 41 N �� � N tl d00'1 na Q, , (O 9m 0 m 00 29 R 2m• Rgis p 0 -49 C m 0 0 0 v 0 H ONO xnv vivo 01 0 ONO xnv 1110 NI O ONO 00 xnv 0® viva it, r� 0 8e0 a- m €1. 00o D9000/07000 Series Operation & Installation Manual 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Page 58 0 a WI D7412 Control/Communicator CHO 00 Y d00 CO CO CO 8 ROPS Hp $n t. <-1 v N 0 oO� e�0 5 T N y�N Slldodaao nouns t al do Eleupluei 01 6leulwial 01 D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 59 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Ib`; ••000©eo o 0 ©o; � �1 i i3 . i �' . � i MI! ® gy t. o ..,: ' i " . 4_,:.1 i:+a 41e Iiia 19 i ! i� i; " see: +i • is •� E v N _ • Pd ii. 66.00 E . I . 2 a. 0 1i Efl ,_J ;fit t 'i o L. oO� e�0 5 T N y�N Slldodaao nouns t al do Eleupluei 01 6leulwial 01 D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 59 74-07692-000-D 12/97 D7212 Control/Communicator IOU rho iy m mem 5 x O g 00 O 0 N w N a O A N §mom m 0 — 0 0 ©O ki 9K . (J N V O N tl dOO1 0 10 464 a 0 LJ' LLIJ2I=LIIL •ire ;Up! ``,!•.00 l i 6 *. 4_ :i 'i j i o•000 ' .. i ie g 2jI jii i t. 6 j 7 i ! I S•• i i E[ ` iii f ®o—,�,, e . ® '� ® " 'I it 0 i •'_ el ie :i! 3L �" i F1ti1 !:i is : liil i :'ii. c ljii! ' ty;ij ! ;li !an ife: i tij j ;[! i - =l-! ': ' j. 4.: jj i! : ji OO l 11 'A j in, i .! i N ; e ! e j ii ii. ' iij 1 SlldQd0130 08Z18a L of dll 6leulwJal 01 6lewwel 01 8 ONO y0 xnv $= viva ^' rlO 7171 N D OQ r2-- NI ino xnv ON9 0 N D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Page 60 Current Rating Chart for Standby Battery Calculations A B C AC Power On AC Power Off In Alarm Normal Current Minimum Current Maximum Current Model Quantity Each Each Each Number Used Unit* Total Unit Total Unit Total D9412/D9112/ 350 x 1 = 350 350 x 1 = 350 500 x 1 = 500 D7412/D7212 D125B 20 x Quant. = 19 x Quant. = 123 x Quant. = D127 13 x Quant. = 12 x Quant. = 45 x Quant. = D129 25 x Quant. = 25 x Quant. = 25 x Quant. = D185 120 x Quant. = 120 x Quant. = 350 x Quant. = D 192 D 15 x Quant. = 26 x Quant. = 50 x Quant. = D192C 15 x Quant. = 26 x Quant. = 50 x Quant. = D1255 104 x Quant. = 106 x Quant. = 206 x Quant. = D1256 104 x Quant. = 106 x Quant. = 206 x Quant. = D1257 104 x Quant. = 106 x Quant. = 206 x Quant. = D720 55 x Quant. = 20 x Quant. = 75 x Quant. = D8125 48 x Quant. = 48 x Quant. = 48 x Quant. = D8127T/U 3 x Quant. = 3 x Quant. = 4 x Quant. = D8128C 50 x Quant. = 50 x Quant. = 50 x Quant. = D8129 20 x Quant. = 20 x Quant. = 20 x Quant. + (25 x # of relays) = _ D8130 5 x Quant. = 5 x Quant. = 54 x Quant. = D9127T/U 0.5 x Quant. = 0.5 x Quant. = 0.8 x Quant. = D9131A 24 x Quant. = 22 x Quant. = 36 x Quant. = D9210B 100 x Quant. = 100 x Quant. = 120 x Quant. = D928 14 x Quant. = 14 x Quant. = 45 x Quant. = Ratings of other devices in the system which are not shown above: x Quant. = x Quant. = x Quant. = x Quant. = x Quant. = x Quant. = x Quant. = x Quant. = x Quant. = x Quant. = x Quant. = x Quant. = x Quant. = x Quant. = x Quant. = Total A = Total B = Total C" = NOTES: * Currents shown in milliamperes (1 ampere = 1000 milliamperes) ** If the column C total exceeds 1400 mA, a D8132 is required to provide an additional 1400 mA. You may also use a UL listed external power supply for this purpose. D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 61 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Standby Battery Requirements Household Burglary and Commercial Burglary Four hours of standby battery capacity required. Bank Safe and Vault 72 hours of standby battery capacity required (UL 365). Aux Power current for all devices, including control centers, must be limited to 300 mA or less to meet this requirement. Central Station or Local Fire Alarm 24 hours of standby plus 5 minutes of alarm operation required. See Central Station or Local Systems Ampere -Hour Calculation Formula in the Standby Battery Calculation forNFPA 72 Fire Alarm Applications section. Remote Station or Auxiliary Fire Alarm 60 hours of standby plus 5 minutes of alarm operation required. See Remote Station orAuxiliary System Ampere -Hour Calculation Formula in the Standby Battery Calculation forNFPA 72 Fire Alarm Applications section. Household Fire Warning Equipment 24 hours of standby plus 4 minutes of alarm operation required. See Household Fire Ampere - Hour Calculation Formula in the Standby Battery Calculation for NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Applications section. 09000/07000 Series Operation & Installation Manual 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Page 62 Standby :Battery Calculation for NFPA:72 Fire'Alarm :Applications'• Current Chart First See the Current Rating Chad for Standby Battery Ca/culat/onsfor totals B and C used in the formulas below. When connecting two batteries, use either the D122 Dual Battery Wiring Harness or the D8132 Battery Charger Module. Central Station or Local Systems Central Station or Local Systems require 24 hours of standby plus 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of the 24 hour period. A single battery is sometimes adequate for Central Station Systems, but you must install two batteries to meet the basic standby requirements for a Local System installation. You must use battery ampere hour (Ah) calculations to verify compliance. The following formula includes the calculation for 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of the 24 hour period, as well as a 10% contingency factor which allows for depletion of battery capacity with age. Central Stations or Local Systems Ampere - Hour Calculation Formula Total B Hours Total C Hours Contingency Total Ah ( x24)+ ( x.083)+10% _ Total Ah requirements must not exceed Ah capacity of batteries: Two D126 Batteries = 14 Ah Remote Station or Auxiliary Systems Remote Station or Auxiliary Systems require 60 hours of standby plus 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of the 60 hour period. A D8132 Battery Charger Module with additional batteries installed in a separate D8109 or D8108A enclosure may be required in the system to meet the basic standby requirements for a Remote Station or Auxiliary System installation. You must use battery ampere hour (Ah) calculations to verify compliance. The following formula includes the calculation for 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of the 60 hour period, as well as a 10% contingency factor which allows for depletion of battery capacity with age. Remote Station or Auxiliary Systems Ampere - Hour Calculation Formula Total B Hours Total C Hours Contingency Total Ah ( x60)+ ( x.083)+10% = Total Ah requirements must not exceed Ah capacity of batteries: Two D126 Batteries = 14 Ah Household Fire Warning Equipment The Household Fire Warning Equipment Standard requires 24 hours of standby plus 4 minutes of alarm operation at the end of the 24 hour period. You must use battery ampere hour (Ah) calculations to verify compliance. The following formula includes the calculation for 4 minutes of alarm operation at the end of the 24 hour period, as well as a 10% contingency factor which allows for depletion of battery capacity with age. Household Fire Ampere -Hour Calculation Formula Total B Hours Total C Hours Contingency Total Ah ( x24)+ ( x.067)+10% _ Total Ah requirements must not exceed Ah capacity of batteries: Two D126 Batteries = 14 Ah D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 63 74-07692-000-0 12/97 Specifications Voltage Input Primary Power Supply 16.5 VAC 40 VA class 2 plug-in transformer CDC) (D1640) Secondary Power Supply 5 12 VDC 7 Ah sealed lead acid rechargeable O battery. The panel supports a maximum of two 12 VDC 7 Ah batteries using the D122 Dual Battery Harness. Current Requirements Panel - 500 mA See the Standby Battery and Current Rating Chart for the current requirements of other system components. Power Outputs All external connections are inherently power limited except battery terminals. Continuous Power Outputs O3 0'10 1.4A maximum at 10.2 VDC to 13.9 VDC (continuous supply) total for all devices and outputs supplied at terminals 3,24, and 32, connectors J2 and J4. Alarm Power Output ®CD 2.0 A maximum at 10.2 VDC to 13.9 VDC output. Output may be steady or one of three pulsed patterns depending on programming. See the Relays section of the D9000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000) Switched Aux Power U 1.4 A maximum at 10.2 VDC to 13.9 VDC output. Continuous output is interrupted by Sensor Reset or alarm verification depending on programming. See the Relays section of the D9000/D7000 Series Program Entry Guide (74-07695-000) Fire and Fire/Burglary Systems To comply with UL 985 and 864 listing standards for fire alarm systems (effective March 1, 1989), the total combined continuous and alarm current draw for the system during alarm conditions must be limited to 1.4A (1400 mA) provided by the primary power supply (rectified AC). If current draw for the system exceeds 1.4A, connect a D8132 Battery Charger Module to the panel. The D8132 provides an additional 1.4 Amps of rectified AC power. Combined current draw must never exceed 2.0A. Battery Discharge/Recharge Schedule Discharge Cycle 13.9 VDC Charging float level 13.8 VDC Charging Status LED on 12.1 VDC Low Battery & AC fail reports if programmed, Low Battery LED on 10.2 VDC Battery Toad shed (processing functions continue if AC is present) Recharge Cycle AC ON Load shed relay resets battery charging begins, battery trouble and AC restoral reports sent. 13.7 VDC Battery restoral report sent, Low Battery LED off 13.9 VDC Charging Status LED off, battery float charged Minimum Operating Voltage 10.2 VDC SDI Bus SDI Bus A (+): 9 VDC (15,000' max) SDI Bus B (-): 9 VDC (15,000' max) Telephone Connections Connection RJ31 X or RJ38X jack can be interfaced with the D9412/D9112. Two TeICo Lines Radionics D928 Dual Phone Line Module required for two phone line service. Supervision supplied by the panel. Environmental Temperature: Relative Humidity: 32°-122°F (0°-50°C) 5-85% at 86°F (30°C) non - condensing Arming Stations D1255 Command Center D720 Command Center Keyswitch D9000/D7000 Series Operation & Installation Manual 74-07692-000-D 12/97 Page 64 Point Thresholds On -Board Points 1 to 8 Voltage Normal Short Open 2.3 1.85 2.93 Resistance 1k S2 0.657 S2 1.6k02 Compatible Enclosures D8103 Universal Enclosure D8109 Fire Enclosure D8108A Attack Resistant Enclosure Compatible Accessories See the Radionics Product Catalog for complete list. D122 Dual Battery Harness D125B Powered Loop Interface Module D126 12V, 7 Ah Rechargeable Battery D127 Reversing Relay D129 Dual Class A Initiation Circuit Module D130 Relay Module D136 Plug-in Relay D161 Phone Cord D162 Phone Cord D185 Reverse Polarity Module D192C Bell Circuit Supervision Module D268/ D269 Independent Zone Control (on -board and OctoPOPIT points) D279 Independent Zone Control (on -board and OctoPOPIT points) D442 (10") Bells D435, D448 12 VDC Horns D720 Command Center (Area LED) D928 D1255 Purpose) D 1255 R D1256 D1257 D1640 D5200 D5400 D8004 08121 A/ D8122 08125 D8127 D8128C D8129 D8130 D8132 D8635T D8670T Dual Phone Line Switcher Command Center (General Command Center (Red) Fire Command Center Fire Annunciator 16.5 VAC 40 VA Transformer Programmer Remote Account Manager 3 Transformer Enclosure Derived Channel S.T.U. POPEX Module POPIT Module OctoPOPIT Module OctoRelay Module Release Module Battery Charger Module PIR/Microwave Motion Sensor (35') with POPIT PIR/Microwave Motion Sensor (70') with POPIT D9127 POPIT Module D9131A Printer Interface D9210B Access Control Module D9635T PIR Motion Sensor (35') with POPIT D9650T PIR Motion Sensor (50') with POPIT D9660CMT PIR Motion Detector, Ceiling Mount (60') with POPIT D9680T PIR Motion Sensor, Long Range (80') with POPIT 09000/07000 Series Operation & Installation Manual Page 65 74-07692-000-0 12/97 c7 r-, ,, E , =1 n ,, 7-, .J E J n L '-1 n LJ r 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 Appendix: Point Address Chart ZONEX 1, Points 9 to 127 (D9412/D9112) ZONEX 1, Points 9 to 75 (D7412/D7212) Place the labels on the base of the POPIT. Do not attach label to the POPIT cover. A number in the switch column indicates that switch is set to ON. Switch Address 01 23456 009 01 1 23456 3456 456 010 01 1 2345 3 4 5 011 01 1 234 3 4 6 012 01 1 234 3 4 013 01 1 23 3 56 6 014 01 1 23 3 5 015 0123 1 2 3 6 016 01 1 23 3 017 01 1 2 3456 456 5 6 018 012 1 3 45 5 019 0 1 2 3 4 6 020 0 1 2 3 4 021 01 1 2 3 56 6 022 0 1 2 3 5 023 0 1 2 3 6 024 0 1 2 3 025 01 2345 3456 456 6 026 01 2345 345 4 5 027 0 1 234 3 4 6 028 0 1 234 3 4 029 0 1 23 3 5 6 030 0 1 2 3 5 031 0 1 2 3 6 032 0 1 2 3 033 01 1 23456 456 5 6 034 01 1 2345 45 5 035 0 1 2 3 4 6 036 0 1 234 4 037 0 1 23 5 6 038 0 1 2 3 5 039 0 1 2 3 6 040 0 1 2 3 041 0 1 23456 3456 4 5 6 042 0 1 2345 345 4 5 043 0 1 2 3 4 6 044 0 1 2 3 4 045 0 1 2 3 5 6 046 0 1 23 3 5 047 0 1 2 3 6 048 0 1 2 3 Switch Address 01 23456 049 0 1 2 3456 456 050 0 1 2 3 4 5 051 0 1 2 3 4 6 052 0 1 2 3 4 053 0 1 2 3 5 6 054 0 1 2 3 5 055 0 1 2 3 6 056 0 1 2 3 057 0 1 3456 4 5 6 058 0 1 3 4 5 059 0 1 3 4 6 060 0 1 3 4 061 0 1 3 5 6 062 0 1 3 5 063 0 1 3 6 064 0 1 3 065 0 2345 456 6 066 0 2345 4 5 067 0 234 4 6 068 0 234 4 069 0 23 5 6 070 0 2 3 5 071 0 2 3 6 072 0 2 3 073 1 23456 4 5 6 074 1 2345 4 5 075 1 2 3 4 6 076 1 234 4 077 1 23 56 6 078 1 2 3 5 079 1 2 3 6 080 1 2 3 081 1 2 3456 4 5 6 082 1 2 345 4 5 083 1 2 3 4 6 084 1 2 3 4 085 1 2 3 5 6 086 1 2 3 5 087 1 2 3 6 088 1 2 Switch Address 01 23456 089 1 3456 090 1 3 4 5 091 1 3 4 6 092 1 3 4 093 1 3 5 6 094 1 3 5 095 1 3 6 096 1 3 097 1 4 5 6 098 1 4 5 099 1 4 6 100 1 4 101 1 5 6 102 1 5 103 1 6 104 1 105 2345 6 106 2345 107 234 6 108 234 109 23 56 110 2 3 5 111 2 3 6 112 2 3 113 2 4 5 6 114 2 4 5 115 2 4 6 116 2 4 117 2 5 6 118 2 5 119 2 6 120 2 121 3456 122 345 123 3 4 6 124 3 4 125 3 5 6 126 3 5 127 3 6 128* • ' The panel reserves point 128 for intemal use. • D8127 or D9127 POPITs may be used for points 9-72; however, only D9127 POPITs may be used for points 73-127. • D8127 POPITs have dipswitches 1-6, whereas D9127 POPITs have dipswitches 0-6. 09000/07000 Series Operation & Installation Manua/ Page 66 74-07692-000-D 12/97 SECTION IV SPECIFICATION SHEETS c? Radionics' Features • Slim -Line designer styling compliments any decor • Easy to read Vacuum Fluorescent Display (D1255) or LED display (D720) • Lighted keys on entry or key press for simple operation • Easy system control with menu keys (D1255) or function keys (D720) • User friendly response tones • User controlled brightness and loudness (D1255) • Installer configured menus, text and custom functions (D1255) • Multiple or single area configurations (D1255) • Compatible with the D9412, D9124, D9112, D7412 and D7212 Control/Communicators Description The Radionics D1255 and D720 Command Centers are low profile, surface mount units which can annunciate events from the Radionics 7000 and 9000 series control/communicators. The units have number keys (from 0 to 9) and function or menu keys (including COMMAND and ENTER). These keys are used to enter personal passcodes and commands into the D9412, D9124, D9112, D7412 and D7212 Control/Communicator. Both command centers contain a sounder to annunciate several system and area conditions. These conditions include: Entry/Exit Delay, Keystroke Entry, Faulted Point Protest, Watch Tone, System Trouble Tone, Alarm Tones, and Walk Test. D1255 Command Center The D1255 features an illuminated keypad, a 16 - character vacuum fluorescent display, and programmable text annunciation of up to 246 points. A pull-up reference card and labeled keypad provide a quick reference to common command center features and system displays. The built-in speaker emits distinct warning tones. As you press each key, the speaker can emit a muted beep to indicate that your entry was accepted. D1255 Command Center and D720 LED Command Center Specifications Sheet D1255 with D55 deskstand shown. D720 LED Command Center The D720 Command Center features LED annunciation for up to eight points. The LEDs can indicate Power State (AC On/Off, Battery Good, Battery Low, and Battery Missing), Armed Status (Perimeter, Interior, and Instant), Point Status (Point Fault, Point Alarm Memory, and Bypassed Point) and Command Mode (On or Off). Listings and Approvals • UL Listed: 1610, 1076, 1023, 985, 864, 609, and 365 • CSFM: Household and Non Hi Rise • NYC -MEA: Completed • FM: Approved Application The D1255 and D720 can be mounted in secure areas for use as both system controllers and annunciators. In commercial uses, the Command Centers are typically installed in building entrances and areas with unrestricted access. Near exterior doors in hotel or business lobbies are ideal locations. This allows a responding agency, or persons evacuating the building L809 P/N 337046 10/96 ©1996 Radionics, Inc. Application (Cont'd) to quickly identify the type and location of the emergency from outside without being in danger. For residential use, the Command Centers are usually located near the front and rear entrances to the home. Additional Commands Centers are also often in a kitchen or in a bedroom. Multiple Command Centers can be used in a large building with many separate areas of security. These Command Centers can be programmed to control one or many areas. Both devices have a built in sounder that allows them to be installed in locations not in general view. Audible tones alert personnel to fire system events and assist fire fighters in locating the annunciator. Installation The D1255 and D720 Command Centers connect to the control/communicatorthrough standard four -wire cable. Shielded cable may be required where excessive EMI is a problem. The field wiring connects to a four -wire harness supplied with the unit. This harness plugs into a four - pin connector on the circuit board through the back of the D1255 or D720. Each unit has three mounting holes in the base that allow secure, correct positioning during installation. Do not install the command centers in direct sunlight. This damages the module components and makes the display less visible. Operational Data The D1255 and D720 operate through the Serial Device Interface bus of the control/communicators. Serial data and power is received by the command centers through a four -wire cable. Both devices continually show the status of the system. Changes in the normal panel condition such as alarm or trouble events are displayed in alphanumeric English text (D1255) or LED display (D720) and the appropriate sounder response tone is emitted. Resetting the unit display and sounder can be accomplished only by authorized persons. Wire Information Four -Conductor from Panel D1255 or D720 Wiring Harness 12VDC 12 VDC (Red) Date -Out Data -In (Yellow) Data -In Data -Out (Green) Common Common (Black) Ordering Information Model Description D1255 Command Center D720 LED Command Center D54B Brass Faceplate D54C Stainless Steel Faceplate D55 Desk Stand D56 Conduit Backbox Electrical Specifications Operating Voltage Nominal 12VDC supplied by the control/communicator Operating current D1255 D720 Minimum 104 mA Maximum 206 mA Minimum 20 mA Maximum 100 mA Wiring Four conductors supply: Serial data, +12VDC and panel common Display fluorescent 16 character vacuum (D1255) or LED (D720) Operating Temperature 0 to 5°C (32 to 122°F) Non -condensing Relative Humidity 5 to 85% at 30°C (86°F) Dimensions Base Measurements 8.3"L x 4.5"W x 0.8"D Specifications The contractor shall furnish and install, where indicated on the plans, Radionics D1255 Command Center and D720 LED Command Center. The D1255 shall have a 16 character vacuum fluorescent display and show all system events. The D720 shall have an eight point LED display. Alarms shall be prioritized ahead of other system events and displayed in sequence. A built in sounder shall indicate events with distinct tones for fire alarm and system trouble. The D1255 and D720 shall connect to the control/communicator through a four -wire cable. The D1255 and D720 shall be constructed of high impact plastic. The D9412, D9124, D9112, D7412 and D7212 have a nonvolatile event memory. All system events are stored in this log and can be recalled and displayed on Command Centers (D1255), printed locally or retrieved from off premises via the Remote Account Manager (R.A.M.). ISO 9002 CERTIFICATE NO. 83946 © 1994-1996 Radionics, Salinas, CA, U.S.A. All rights reserved. TM The Radionics logo is a registered trademark of Radionics, Salinas, CA, U.S.A. Radionics- Radionics, Inc., 1800 Abbott Street Salinas, CA, 93901, U.S.A. L809 P/N 33704B 10/96 n n n r:J fl n n 0 0 a 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R A D IONICS D8132 Battery Charger Module Specification Sheet Features • Provides additional standby Amp hours for control/communicators • 1200mA battery recharging circuit • Suitable for 12 VDC, 7 and 18 Amp hour batteries • Suitable as a stand alone 12 VDC, 1 Amp power supply Description The D8132 Battery Charger Module is an accessory device for Radionics D6112, D7112, D8112, D8124, and D9112 Control/Communicator panels. The D8132 uses a 16.5 VAC, 40 VA plug in transformer to supply 1200mA of battery charging current. An on board green LED remains lit to indicate the presence of AC voltage. The D8132 can be used to increase the standby battery time of a panel when installed with external batteries in an adjacent approved enclosure. The 08132 is not to be used as the sole means of standby power for a panel. One or two 12 VDC, 7 Amp -hour batteries must still be provided for the panel. The D8132 can also be used as a stand alone power supply in non UL applications. You can connect one or two 12 VDC, 7 Amp -hour batteries or one or two 12 VDC, 18 Amp -hour batteries to the D8132 in either application. The D8132 can be used to increase the available current from the auxiliary output terminal of the D6112, D7112, D8112, and D9112 panels. A maximum of one additional D8132 can be connected to the D6112 and D8112 panels to increase their available auxiliary current to 1.6 Amps and 1.2 Amps, respectively( the D8132 is not listed by UL for use with the D6112). A maximum of one D8132 can be connected to a D9112 to increase its auxiliary current to 2.0 Amps. Up to two additional D8132's can be connected to a D7112 panel to increase its available auxiliary current to 3.0 Amps. In addition to providing increased standby time and auxiliary power, batteries connected to the D8132 also filter the AC power supply. The amount of ripple which appears on the panel outputs is dependent on the charge state of the batteries. Radionics does not recommend using the D8132 to power devices that are sensitive to excessive ripple. Listings and Approvals • UL listed • CSFM and NYC -BSA approved Application The D8132 Battery Charger Module is suitable for systems requiring extended battery standby time. The D8132 is UL listed for use in Central Station, Household and Local Fire and Burglary Alarm applications, Police Connected, Remote Station, and Electrically Actuated Transmitter applications. The D8132 is not UL listed for use with the D6112. Provided with the D8132 are two cables, and two sets of lockwashers, nuts, screws, and terminal lugs. The cables connect the D8132 to the 01640 transformer, one or two batteries, and the control/communicator. Additional hardware is provided for connecting the battery cable to 12 VDC 18 Amp -hour batteries. This hardware is not required when connecting 12 VDC, 7 Amp -hour batteries. Ordering Information Model Description D126 12 VDC 7.0 Amp hour Battery D137 Mounting Bracket D1218 12 VDC 18 Amp hour Battery D8132 Battery Charger Module 75-06430-000-A 7/92 © 1992 Radionics, Inc. Electrical Specifications Operating Voltage 16 - 18 VAC supplied by plug in transformer. Operating Current 1200mA of rectified AC Float Voltage 13.9 VDC maximum current Installation The D8132 Battery Charger Module and additional batteries are typically mounted inside a separate approved enclosure such as the Radionics D8103, D8108A, or D8109. The enclosure is installed adjacent to the control/ communicator enclosure. The plug in AC transformer is installed on the same AC branch circuit as the control/communicator transformer. No other devices may be connected to the transformer. A 4 -wire harness is used to connect one or two batteries to the D8132. An additional 4 -wire harness connects to the AC transformer (2 wires) and the battery terminals of the control/communicator. The D8132 installs in the enclosure using three plated screws supplied with the unit. Radionics enclosures provide module mounting locations with knockouts. Use a Radionics D137 Mounting Bracket when installing the D8132 in a non Radionics enclosure. The D8132 should be mounted towards the top of the enclosure away from the batteries to avoid overheating. The Radionics D8103, D8108A, and D8109 enclosures provide a rectangular knockout on the door that allows the green AC power LED on the D8132 to be easily viewed. Dimensions 5.0" L x 3.0" W x .75" D Radionics` Operational Data When using the D8132 to increase your control/ communicator panel standby battery Amp hours, refer to the appropriate calculation chart contained in the D8132 Operation and Installation Manua/(74-04777-000). These charts detail the Amp hour requirements, control/ communicator Auxiliary current load, and D8132 battery recharge time. The D8132 can also be used as a stand alone, 12 VDC 1 Amp power supply. For stand alone applications the D8132 does not provide battery supervision or Toad shed capability and is not recommended for critical loads. The D8132 is not UL listed for stand alone applications. A form of battery supervision can be provided to a D8132 in stand alone configurations when connected to the same AC branch circuit as the panel. AC power failures and restorals, which would also affect the D8132 module, can be reported by the panel to a remote receiver. This supervision relies on the assumption that AC power to both devices has been affected. The Amp hour rating of batteries on the D8132 should be greater than batteries connected to the panel. This ensures that devices connected to the D8132 are powered at least as long as those on the control/communicator. The stand alone D8132 and the panel must share a common ground. Specifications The contractor shall furnish and install Radionics model D8132 Battery Charger Module where indicated on the plans. The D8132 shall provide increased standby Amp -hours for the specified Radionics control/ communicator panel. The module shall be equipped with a 16.5 VAC, 40 VA plug in transformer, two sets of connecting cables and all hardware required for proper installation. The D8132 shall have an on board green LED for indicating the presence of AC power. The D8132 shall be capable of supplying recharging current for one or two 12 VDC, 7 Amp -hour or 18 Amp - hour batteries. The module shall be mounted in the recommended Radionics enclosure or other approved enclosure. Installation shall be subject to the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. © 1992 Radionics, Inc., Salinas, CA, U.S.A. All rights reserved. TM The Radionics logo is a registered trademark of Radionics, Inc., Salinas, CA. Radionics, Inc., 1800 Abbott Street Radionics, 1 Park Gate Close, Bredbury Salinas, CA, 93901, U.S.A. Stockport, Cheshire, SK6 2SZ, England 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R ADIONICS D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher Specification Sheet Featu res • Automatic switching to alternate phone line • D9112 and D7212 CPU (Central Processing Unit) supervision • CPU failure annunciation • AC Status LED • Primary and alternate phone trouble LEDs • Communication fail LED Description Radionics D9124, D9112, and D7212 Fire Alarm Control/Communicator panels use the D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher to transmit over an alternate phone line when the primaryphone line is faulted. The D928 monitors the alternate line and the panel monitors the primary line. If a signal is generated and the panel senses that the primary phone line is bad, then it will attempt to use the alternate phone line to send the message. If trouble is detected, the panel keeps the faulty phone line in memory. If the primary line is found to be electrically faulty, the D928 switches to the alternate phone line and reports the fault. The D928 uses the primary or alternate phone line to dial a primary, backup, or duplicate phone number. Application All reporting fire alarm systems are required to have a primary and alternate means of transmitting reports to a receiver. Typical D928 applications are schools, factories, and care facilities where the ability of the system to relay information off premises is especially critical for safeguarding life and property. Listings and Approvals • UL listed • FM and NYC -MEA approved • CSFM listing no. 7165-0801:123 Installation The D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher mounts inside the fire alarm control panel enclosure. Mount the module to the inside of the enclosure as instructed in the appropriate Operation and Installation Manual. The D928 connects to the control/communicator through the interconnect wire provided. The ribbon cable attaches to the panel's accessory connector. The D928 is programmed at the control panel, using the appropriate Program Entry Guide. Electrical Specifications Idle Current 18 mA @ 13.8 VDC Maximum Current 100 mA v@ 13.8 VDC Operating Voltage 10.2 - 13.9 VDC supplied by the control/communicator Status Indicators LEDs indicate AC power, primary phone line fail, alternate phone line fail, and failure to communicate. Buzzer annunciates CPU failure. Wiring Connections Standard modular connectors. 75-07163-000-A 4/94 © 1994 Radionics Ordering Information Model Description D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher D161/D162 Dual modular phone cords Operational Data The D928 uses the primary phone line to initiate calls. If the primary line is detected to be electrically faulty, the D928 switches to the alternate line and reports the fault. When using Modem II, the panel sends a phone line failure message to the D6500, indicating which phone line is in trouble. The panel sends two distinct messages for trouble on the primary or alternate phone line. CPU Failure Annunciation The D928 module has a circuit that monitors that panel's CPU for proper operation. If the CPU fails, a buzzer on the D928 sounds, as does a sounder in the panel. This sounder cannot be reset while the CPU is failed. Status LEDs Four LEDs mounted on the front edge of the D928 display primary and alternate phone line failure, failure to communicate, and AC power status. Specifications The contractor shall furnish and install Radionics D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher Module where specified on the plans. The D928 is an accessory module for Radionics D9124, D9112, and D7212 Fire Alarm Control/ Communicators, which shall be equipped with firmware revision 2.95 or higher. The unit shall allowforthe monitoring of two incoming telephone lines by the control panel and supervise the CPU integrity. The D928 module shall be mounted inside the control/communicator enclosure with wiring connected according to the manufacturer's instructions. Dimensions 5.0" L x 3.0" W x .75" D © 1994 Radionics, Salinas, CA, U.S.A. All rights reserved. The Radionics logo is a registered trademark of Radionics, Salinas, CA, U.S.A. Radionics' Radtonics, 1800 Abbott Street Salinas, CA, 93901 U.S.A. Radionics, 1 Park Gate Close, Bredbury Stockport, Cheshire, SK6 2SZ, England 0 0 D 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R A DIONIC S D8004 Transformer Enclosure Specification Sheet Features • Self-contained 120 VAC outlet • Adequate space for low voltage transformer • Physically protects transformer and connections • Provides barrier separation between high and low voltages • Convenient side and rear knockouts • UL Listed Description The Radionics D8004 Transformer Enclosure is an accessory device for use with Radionics control/ communicators. The D8004 provides physical protection for a low voltage, plug-in AC transformer. The D8004 provides an enclosed, tamper resistant 120 VAC duplex receptacle. Transformers listed for use with Radionics control/communicators plug into the receptacle and are protected from accidental or intentional removal by the D8004's steel cover. The D8004 can be surface or semi -flush mounted and contains side and rear knockouts in its backbox for convenient conduit installation. Knockout ranges are .5" to .75" and accept all standard electrical connectors. A portion of the D8004's backbox is partitioned for the use of low voltage wiring only. This partition is also accessible through knockouts for conduit installations. All wiring and installation procedures are subject to applicable codes and the local authority having jurisdiction. Application The D8004 is suitable for use where there is a requirement to ensure protection against accidental or intentional removal of a plug-in AC transformer from its 120 VAC supply. The D8004 contains a removable metal cover for convenient servicing of the transformer and associated low voltage wiring. Listings and Approvals • UL listed • FM, CSFM, and BSA approved Installation The D8004 Transformer Enclosure back box can be surface or semi -flush mounted. Both .5" and .75" knockouts are evenly distributed on the rear and sides. Conduit connections can be made from most angles to fit specific installation requirements. A 120 VAC duplex receptacle is contained in the upper partition and connects directly to line voltage wiring. Low voltage wiring is brought into the lower partitioned area through knockouts and connects directly to the plug-in AC transformer. This wiring is separated from the line voltage wiring by a steel cover plate. The transformer and all wiring is enclosed by the D8004's steel cover. This cover conceals all wiring and components and deters unauthorized tampering. Ordering Information Model Description D8004 Transformer Enclosure 75-06345-000-A 7/92 © 1992 Radionics, Inc. Operational Data The D8004 Transformer Enclosure provides a se- cure method for protecting a control/communicator's transformer. The D8004 uses a steel cover to enclose the 120 VAC supply receptacle, This cover can be tampered for additional protection if installed in an unprotected area. Dimensions Backbox 8.62" L x 4.62" W x 1.75"D Steel cover 8.87" L x 4.75" W x 3.0" D 18 Gauge Steel .048" Thick Wiring Information Specifications The contractor shall furnish and install, where indicated on the plans, Radionics D8004 Transformer Enclosure. The unit shall provide a secure source of AC power connections when used in conjunction with a plug- in AC transformer. The D8004 shall provide a barrier separation between 120 VAC primary power and low voltage output provided by the transformer. The D8004 shall provide appropriate side and rear knock -out locations for easy conduit connections. The D8004 shall be either surface or semi -flush mounted according to job specifications. All conduit connections shall be made with approved connectors and through the knock -outs provided with the unit. Plug-in AC transformers used with the D8004 shall be listed for use with Radionics control/communicators. All wiring shall conform to applicable NFPA standards and the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. TRANSEORYER COYER DUPLEX OUTLET GANG SOX NIGH VOLTAGE SECTION ONO SOX PARTITION LOW VOLTAGE SECTION Radionics" TM © 1992 Radionics, Inc., Salinas, CA, U.S.A. All rights reserved. The Radionics logo is a registered trademark of Radionics, Inc., Salinas, CA. Radionics, Inc., 1800 Abbott Street Radionics, 1 Park Gate Close, Bredbury Salinas, CA, 93901, U.S.A. Stockport, Cheshire, SK6 2SZ, England F-0122-030-010 R ADIONICS D122 Dual Battery Harness Installation Sheet Description Installation The Model D122 Dual Battery Harness protects the installer and the battery when connecting two batteries, in parallel, to the D6112, D7112 , D8112 or D9112 Control/ Communicators. Although the control/communicator is internally protected, dangerous current overloads can result with just one of the two batteries reversed. This amount of current can be extremely hazardous to human safety. The Dual Battery Harness eliminates the hazards of batteries connected in parallel by utilizing a thermal circuit breaker to govern the circuit. The positive side (red wire) of the harness is in series with the circuit breaker. It breaks the electrical circuit of the second battery when the thermal rating is exceeded. This prevents the battery circuit from creating a potentially harmful current overload condition. When installing two batteries, follow the steps listed below. 1. Connect the battery leads and the hamess leads (stripped ends) to the control/ communicator terminals. OBSERVE POLARITY! The negative (black) wires connect to the Earth Ground terminal. The positive (red) wires connect to the Battery Positive terminal. Always connect the leads to the control/communicator before connecting the batteries! 2. Connect battery A to the battery wires, observing polarity. The battery circuit is now protected by an internal circuit breaker contained in the control/communicator. 3. Connect battery B to the battery harness slip-on spade connectors, observing polarity. The circuit for this battery is protected by the circuit breaker contained in the harness. 4. Both batteries are now properly connected. EARTH GROUND TERMINAL (BLACK LEADS) BATTERY POSITIVE TERMINAL (RED LEADS) 74-03178-000-C 7/91 BATTERY A BATTERY B MODEL D122 DUAL BATTERY HARNESS Radionics" Radionics, Inc., 1800 Abbott Street Salinas, CA, 93901, U.S.A. Technical Support: (800) 538-5807 Radionics, 1 Park Gate Close, Bredbury Stockport, Cheshire, SK6 2SZ, England Technical Support: (061) 494-0851 Standby Battery Calculations Project: Best Buy, Standby Power Required Quiescent (Ts) Alarm (Ta) South,center Parkway 24 Hours 5 Minutes Edwards Date: EST2 Series Control Panel 4-11-00 Qty Module Type Current (Amps) Quiescent Alarm Total Load Quiescent Alarm 1 2-MCM Common Control 0.1500A 0.2750A 0.1500A 0.2750A 0 2 -LCX Expander Module 0.0200A 0.1300A 0.0000A 0.0000A 1 2-LSRA-C Annunciator 0.0080A 0.0080A 0.0080A 0.0080A 21 SIGA-PS Photo Detector 0.0003A 0.0003A 0.0066A 0.0066A 0 SIGA-HRS Heat Detector 0.00005A 0.00005A 0.00000A 0.00000A 7 SIGA-278 Manual Pull Station 0.0015A 0.0024A 0.0105A 0.0168A 0 SIGA-CT1 Input Module 0.0003A 0.0004A 0.0000A 0.0000A 3 SIGA-CT2 Input Module 0.0004A 0.0007A 0.0012A 0.0020A 0 SIGA-CC1 Riser Module 0.0002A 0.0001A 0.0000A 0.0000A 1 SIGA-CR Control Module 0.00003A 0.00003A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 SIGA-IS Ion Detector 0.0003A 0.0003A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 6424 Beam Detector 0.0100A 0.0284A 0.0000A 0.0000A External Load 0 Horn/Strobe 15 Cd 0.0000A 0.1100A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Horn/Strobe 30 Cd 0.0000A 0.1450A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Horn/Strobe 110 Cd . 0.0000A 0.2590A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Mini-Horn/Strobe 15 Cd 0.0000A 0.0800A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Mini -Horn / Strobe 30 Cd 0.0000A 0.1150A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Strobe 15 Cd 0.0000A 0.0700A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Strobe 30 Cd 0.0000A 0.1050A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Strobe 60 Cd 0.0000A 0.1550A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Strobe 110 Cd 0.0000A 0.2190A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Bell 0.0000A 0.0300A 0.0000A 0.0000A Is: la: TOTAL SYSTEM STANDBY QUIESCENT CURRENT TOTAL SYSTEM ALARM CURRENT (5A Max) Amp Hour rating of system Battery Size to be used C = [Ts * Is + Ta(la+ls)] * K Where ... C = Battery Capacity Ts = Time duration in standby (Hours) Ta = Time duration in alarm (Hours) Ac ❑ per s- These plans have Prevention Bur ca;: - standards. Acca•.__ emissions - standards and adequacy of ds& Additions, deletion. this date will void resubmittal of Final acceptance iJThe Tukwila Fire Date: 4s� TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT Please call: 575-4407 and give this job No. 00-F -1P-( and exact address for shut= down or restoration approval. 4 ekexizeekv-44 cv 1444- o 44o:44.12A-41t V A GF- \I- RAL NOTI- S Is= 0.176A la= 0.308A C= 6.4 AH 12.0 AH K = 1.5 (reserve factor) Is = standby current la = Alarm Current FAC ESP ESP • Standby Battery Calculations Project: Best Buy, Tukwila WA Standby Power Required Quiescent (Ts) Alarm (Ta) 24 Hours 5 Minutes BPS 6 Remote Power Supply 1 Qty Module Type Current (Amps) Quiescent Alarm Total Load Quiescent Alarm 1 BPS 6 Power Supply 0.0750A 0.1000A 0.0750A 0.1000A External Load 2-LSRA REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR LCD 4" SQ. 1 Horn/Strobe 15 Cd 0.0000A 0.1100A 0.0000A 0.1100A 2 Horn/Strobe 30 Cd 0.0000A 0.1450A 0.0000A 0.2900A 16 Horn/Strobe 110 Cd 0.0000A 0.2590A 0.0000A 4.1440A 0 Mini-Horn/Strobe 15 Cd 0.0000A 0.0800A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Mini -Horn / Strobe 30 Cd 0.0000A 0.1150A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Mini -Horn / Strobe 110 Cd 0.0000A 0.2190A 0.0000A 0.0000A 4 Strobe 15 Cd 0.0000A 0.0700A 0.0000A 0.2800A 0 Strobe 30 Cd 0.0000A 0.1050A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Strobe 60 Cd 0.0000A 0.1550A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Strobe 110 Cd 0.0000A 0.2190A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Bell 0.0000A 0.0300A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Mini -Horn 0.0000A 0.0010A 0.0000A 0.0000A Is: TOTAL SYSTEM STANDBY QUIESCENT CURRENT la: TOTAL SYSTEM ALARM CURRENT (6A Max) Amp Hour rating of system Battery Size to be used C = [Ts * Is + Ta(la+Is)] * K Where ... C = Battery Capacity Ts = Time duration in standby (Hours) Ta = Time duration in alarm (Hours) - TO INDICATING DEVICES CIRCUIT 1-4. TO INDICATING DEVICES CIRCUIT 5-7. ELECTRICAL ROOM EQUIPMENT LAYOUT 1. Installation shall be accomplished in strict compliance with NFPA, Local & State Authorities and Contract Drawings. 2. All conduit sizing and routing by Electrical contractor per NEC or AHJ. 3. Verify all locations of devices with electrical/architectural plans. Scale and place all devices per electrical plans/architectural plans. 4. Prior to installing any wire, review of system requirements shall be confirmed with Electronic Systems field technician. Wire routing is diagrammatic in nature only, and not intended for actual conduit routing. 5. Confirmation of field device mounting, termination and quantities will be completed prior to any installation of devices. 6. Smoke Detectors shall not be located within 4'-0" of air diffusers. 7. Dust covers must be left on all smoke detectors until final construction cleanup is completed. Is= 0.075A la= 4.924A C= K = 1.5 (reserve factor) Is = standby current • la = Alarm Current 8. A set of installation as -built drawings showing actual conduit and conductor routes shall be kept by project foreman for use by Electronic Systems field technician. 9. All circuits will be properly tagged and rang out for opens, grounds, shorts, and proper end of line resistance. Each circuit's meter reading must be documented and presented to Electronic Systems field technician upon his initial arrival on site for checkout and other field services. 10. FACP shall not be energized without the presence of ESC technician. 11. Electronic Systems services include programing, central control term- ination, installation supervision assistance and checkout assistance. Notification for these services must be made ten working days in advance. 12. A contractor provided Electrician familiar with the installation will assist continously ESC field technician until project is complete. 3.3 AH 6.5 AH Standby Battery Calculations Project: Best Buy, Tukwila WA Standby Power Required Quiescent (Ts) Alarm (Ta) 24 Hours 5 Minutes BPS 6 Remote Power Supply 2 Qty Module Type Current (Amps) Quiescent Alarm Total Load Quiescent Alarm 1 BPS 6 Power Supply 0.0750A 0.1000A 0.0750A 0.1000A External Load 2-LSRA REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR LCD 4" SQ. 1 Horn/Strobe 15 Cd 0.0000A 0.1100A 0.0000A 0.1100A 2 Horn/Strobe 30 Cd 0.0000A 0.1450A 0.0000A 0.2900A 18 Horn/Strobe 110 Cd 0.0000A 0.2590A 0.0000A 4.6620A 0 Mini-Horn/Strobe 15 Cd 0.0000A 0.0800A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Mini -Horn / Strobe 30 Cd 0.0000A 0.1150A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Mini -Horn / Strobe 110 Cd 0.0000A 0.2190A 0.0000A 0.0000A 1 Strobe 15 Cd 0.0000A 0.0700A 0.0000A 0.0700A 1 Strobe 30 Cd 0.0000A 0.1050A 0.0000A 0.1050A 0 Strobe 60 Cd 0.0000A 0.1550A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Strobe 110 Cd 0.0000A 0.2190A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Bell 0.0000A 0.0300A 0.0000A 0.0000A 0 Mini -Horn 0.0000A 0.0010A 0.0000A 0.0000A Is: TOTAL SYSTEM STANDBY QUIESCENT CURRENT la: TOTAL SYSTEM ALARM CURRENT (6A Max) Amp Hour rating of system Battery Size to be used C = [Ts * Is + Ta(la+ls)] * K Where ... C = Battery Capacity Ts = Time duration in standby (Hours) Ta = Time duration in alarm (Hours) Is= 0.075A la= 5.337A K = 1.5 (reserve factor) Is = standby current la = Alarm Current C= SYMBOL LEGEND SYMBOL PART NO. DESCRIPTION MOUNTING 0 ti EST2 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL SURFACE WALL MOUNT FACP ANNUN 2-LSRA REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR LCD 4" SQ. ISI SIGA-PS SIGA-SB PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTOR BASE FOR ABOVE 4" OCT. 1-1/2" DP. CEILING MOUNT U SIGA-270 MANUAL PULL STATION S.G. 2 1/2" DP. 48" AFF -_ _ _ I"- SIGA-DH 6261-10 DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR SAMPLING TUBE DUCT MOUNT BPS 6 EXTENDED SIGNAL PANEL SURFACE WALL MOUNT ESP 1MIA SIGA-CT2 DUAL REMOTE MONITOR MODULE S.G 2-1/2" DP. WALL OR CEILING O NA SPRINKLER FLOW SWITCH CONNECTION ONLY TO NA SPRINKLER TAMPER SWITCH CONNECTION ONLY Ell 757- -TW HORN / STROBE 4" SQ. 1-1/2" DP W/ 1-1/2" EXT. \� �� 202- -TW STROBE S.G. 2" DP. IBB MBG10-24-R WM3T24-F-R EXTERIOR 10" BELL EXTERIOR STROBE WBBR WP BACKBOX R MR101\C SINGLE AUXILIARY RELAY SURFACE MOUNT WIRE LEGEND A = DATA LOOP TWISTED SHIELDED PAIR #16 GAUGE WIRE B = INDICATING CIRCUIT PAIR # 12 GAUGE WIRE C = POWER / CONTROL CIRCUIT PAIR #16 GAUGE WIRE * SHALL BE LOCATED NOT LESS THAN 80 INCHES ABOVE FLOOR LEVEL, OR 6 INCHES BELOW THE CEILING, WHICHEVER IS LOWER. AUDIVLE VISUAL DEVICE MODEL NUMBERS ARE DEPICTED BY CANDELA DESIGNATION. 3.4 AH 6.5 AH .�' An 1 9 2000 II [Scale: N/A. By: JMP ct el en O O O Revision 0 ti Sheet: Date: Of: 2 Zr-+tVM t"-- ,43•710 0 a� a� d' O t` O Gq 0 a Date: 4-11-00 [Scale: N/A. By: JMP ct el en O O O 4 0 ti Sheet: 1 Of: 2 4(;;- t /9yy7 y� , r B ONI)iaVd ON Ze (0 rf. "'AA, ° -ICU/ / / / Nir F SST EO I'!STALL 1 A,B A,B 15 O CD) RECEIVING 108 JTh A,B I I 0 110 L J RTU -1 J J 0 Lai 110 A,C 110 FII 110 1 Dt --- 1 RTU -2 J A,C 0 110 A, B ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////rl 15 A,2B L B B B -- r A,q_ RTU -4 A,C 110 110 D n MIL RTU -7 11 B B B— • n RTU -5 J A,C 110 ri D RTU -8 B—m 110 110 B—� r L- 1 I� -4-1 0 w RTU -p J 110 1 FF 1013 F 110 I I D 1 L- D J A,B EOL AgOrAr AI mmmmw A,C -1—A,2B A,3B 1 0 L J I A,C 1 A,4B A,B A, B SALES DEV. 114 COUNT DOWN 15 15 &KPI 15 COMM. R00 115 SECURITY 1161 MMO/iioigrArarderArAFAVAR iw VESTIBULE 101 0 30 ►©0 ,rim! 2A,4B,C L ---J 1 L- ?A,5B,C B I I 1 I x110 F4 4110 110 1 I 1 RTU -j6 RTU -19 J B B A,C A,C 2A, 6B A,C A,C C A,C 2A,6B,C A,C 9 A, B J 30 2B -1 STORAGE h1okL l i / I / A,2B I i 110 O A n B A RTU -11 JANITOR 11071 B L - BREAK ROOM 106 2B 30 F / / / F / 30 WOMENS/ i i 15 102 MENS / ELECTRICAL/ 11041 FACP 4111111 kIIIIN lora s �`�Arrnm,��rmAPm r � • • 41,412/10/40 2'.���•� 0 0 L 2B 0 a Date: 4-10-00 j Scale: 3/32"=1' By: JMP Job No.: 00342a Sheet: 2 Revision Date: Z. (NI M 0 a Date: 4-10-00 j Scale: 3/32"=1' By: JMP Job No.: 00342a Sheet: 2 Of: 2 \AD10\ ICS X9117 FRE COV v J\ CATO? 33 16.5 VAC 40VA TRANSFORMER D1640 ALPHA D-1255 FIRE KEYPAD OICEN EMU raOMEGALARM D7212 12VDC 7AH RECHARGABLE BATTERY 12VDC 7AH RECHARGABLE BATTERY RJ31X JACK PRIMARY U2431X JACK SECONDARY D928 TO THE PHONE •OMPANY 08125 POPEX 11 2 tom+ I I KEEP SIV ZONE 21 ZONE 20 ZONE 69 aON as <1 CN 0 0 I + LOOP ••QQ •• ..ummonar MZI MO ao MCI J7 o` 1 + LOOP 00 00 Immo 71.' LOOP •• 00 Crvi\O 0 \ z DRY CONTACT OUTPUTS PROVIDED BY FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR ALEX X1005 FAC3 334 33K\ SUPERVISIORY 0 \ 0 \ c3 z o z ALARM TROUBLE -SEE POINT ADDRESS SHEET FOR EXACT DIP SWITCH SETTINGS. TO 928 DUAL LINE PHONE MODULE CO v v J \ I CATO� CO\ N MODEL # ECTIO\ DETAIL F— \\Chek-mn-srv2\vo11\DES\DWG\JOBS ACTIVE\195050\195050F0.dwg NO SCALE COMMUNICATOR CONNECTION PROJECT NOTES ALL COMPONENTS ARE UL LISTED AND MEET OR EXCEED ALL CODE REQUIREMENTS. 0 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FOR BEST BUY IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR. CHECKPOINT IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CONNECTING THE FACP (BY OTHERS) TO A RADIONICS COMMUNICATOR FOR CENTRAL STATION MONITORING. O COMMUNICATOR IS A RADIONICS U.L. LISTED FIRE CONTROL/COMMUNICATOR. O MONITORING OF THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IS THROUGH CHECKPOINT U.L. LISTED MONITORING STATION, U.L. #S4993-1. A RADIONICS D928 DUAL PHONE LINE SUPERVISION 4 MODULE WILL BE INSTALLED PER NEPA TO SUPERVISE TWO PHONE LINES. O SYSTEM HAS TRANSPONDERS FOR SUPERVISION OF N/0 LOOPS UTILIZING A 33K RESISTOR. COMMUNICATOR ZONES ZN-69 FIRE SUPERVISORY ZN-20 FIRE ALARM ZN-21 FIRE TROUBLE ACCEPTED 0 Without Comments As Noted In Red Per The Attached Letter These plans have been reviewed by The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau for COnisl `'�with current city standards. Acceptance is sub_i` :t to erre-rs, and omissions which do not author is ;. vi . .ior s cr adopted standards and cilli:,.:,“_ mac;. 1 c Ti :;:C7,._.: t'r for the ac1.,�C t�1,JaCy Oti uvCiji: r 1t” t,.. ' r. Additions, deletions nJor revisions the - ...c 0.::.,:wings a,;:cs a!!r r E'.'JiS...; 6 this date will void tills acceptance and w' i require a resubmittalof revised drawings ;or subsequent approval. ^F• iS Final acceptance is subject to field test and inspection The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. Date: .OMMC J (UKWILA FIRE -EPA:i 1 ,r1tN1 Please call: 575-440/ and give this job No. CSO k and exact address for shut= down or restoration approval. 90vneL 51ve•LL o z y o—k fi t 1A L P -lr t..i:VM f1m10 L.L. nqui, ,kUtc SL.aL 1aR L� b� S e �s , 1.� 7 F1 ff APR 19 2000 -E-711-1-1) ara r vi 0 W } Z Ct Q�> to U)0z0 Oa O Q z U 1--d fx O f O WCi)00 0 U - I - i FIRE DEPARTMENT SPRINKLER PLAN REVIEW COMMENTS Project Name: Best Buy 17364 Southcenter Py Permit No.: 08-S-461 Date: September 25, 2008 Reviewer: Al Metzler Fire Protection Project Coordinator (206)575-4407 • Lateral sway bracing is required at a maximum spacing of 40' for all mains, cross mains, and branch lines 2.5" and larger. Bracing is provided for the last length of pipe but within 6' of the end of a feed or cross main. Bracing is required unless all the pipe is supported by rods Tess than 6" or by 30 ° wrap-around U -hooks for any size pipe, 9.3.5.3. • Minimum clearance around pipes: 2 " for 1"-3.5", 4" for 4" and larger, see 4 exceptions, 9.3.4. • Longitudinal sway bracing is a maximum of 80' for mains and cross mains and within 40 ' of the end of the line, 9.3.5.4. • Provide lateral and longitudinal bracing for changes in pipe direction per section 9.3.5.11.2 for pipe size 2 '/z inches and larger. • Restrain branch lines at the end sprinkler of each line, restrain against vertical and lateral movement, 9.3.6.3. • Restraints for branch lines shall be at intervals per table 9.3.6.4 and section 9.3.6.4, and restrain sprig ups greater than 4', 9.3.6.6. • Comply with ASCE 7-02, section 9.6.2.6.2 (e). • Ceilings used for flex drop attachments shall comply with ASTM C 635 and ASTM C 636 per section 9.2.1.3.3.2. • Where flexible sprinkler hose fittings exceed 6ft. in length and are supported by a suspended ceiling, a hanger(s) attached to the structure shall be required to ensure that the maximum unsupported length does not exceed 6 ft.(9.2.1.3.3.3). • Provide sprinkler protection beneath all obstructions greater than 4 ft. in width. • Extend sprinkler protection to all combustible concealed spaces. • Comply with NFPA 13 obstruction tables. • Sprinkler heads spaced closer than 6 ft. apart must be baffled. • Modifications involving 30 or more sprinkler heads require hydrostatic test and system isolation if necessary. • These conditions apply to any sprinkler piping exposed as necessary to accomplish the permitted scope of work. All code references are NFPA 13, 2007 Edition. TYPICAL FLEXABLE SPRINKLER CONNECTION FLEXHEAD PIPE NIPPLE SPRINKLER BRANCHLINE FLEXABLE CONNECTING HOSE IN STANDARD LENGTHS MOUNTING BRACKET t }— REDUCING FITTING 0 400 SUSPENDED T -BAR GRID SPRINKLER HEAD CEILING TILE FLEXHEAD DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 1. Western States Fire Protection to add new pendent heads in tenant space. FlexHead Brand flexheads will be used to pipe heads to ceiling 2. The building is constructed with non-combustible materials and qualifies as unobstructed construction. 3. All hanger assemblies shall be spaced and installed in accordance with NFPA & manufacturer's specifications. 4. Branchline and arm -over pipe is black Schedule 40 pipe. 5. All new threaded fittings are cast iron class 125 or ductile iron class 150. 6. The owner is responsible for all appropriate maintenance of sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA, as well as state & local codes. 7. The owner is responsible for the freeze protection of all sprinkler system piping and components that are not designed for freezing conditions. 8. Existing fire sprinkler system to remain. Western States Fire Protection will modify the existing system only in the areas of work. All other areas are not in contract and WSFP is not responsible for existing conditions. General Notes NOT TO SCALE Retaining Strap Rounded to Nearest Inch - Hanger No. 12S Top Beam C -Clamp with Retaining Strap (Beam) Steel I -Beam or Bar Joist i Swivel Ring 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O C MI 11111111 Model 300 Michigan Top Beam C -Clamp or Equal with Lock Nut All Thread Rod Pipe Note on Plan: Hanger Number and "A" Dimension 0 SYMBOL LEGEND 2 -WAY EARTHQUAKE BRACE 4 -WAY EARTHQUAKE BRACE HYDRAULIC REFERENCE POINT HANGER DETAIL NOT TO SCALE NO. REVISIONS DESCRIPTION DATE PRACTICE ROOM 12'-0" AFF 12-8 DRUM ROOM 12'-0" AFF 23-0 JAM ROOM @ 12'-0" AFF kk 1q-0 1q-0 8-0 • 12-8 Q '4.0" AOS ACOUSTIC ROOM @ 14'-0" AFF 9-2 2-9'/2 VICINITY MAP DETAIL NOT TO SCALE HANGER SYMBOL BRANCHLINE RESTRAINT FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM Sprinkler Legend 12-4 1 1 A 10-6 it 1 t 1 1 1 ADD = A Exsting = E Plug = P Relocate = R LEGEND DETAIL NOT TO SCALE SYM. SIN QTY. K SPRAY ORIF. FIN. TEMP. 9 11.2 Pendent 17/32" Chrome 155°F MFR./MODEL Reliable Model J112 Total = 9 APPROVAL: City of Tukwila CONT. NO.: KS0542 DRAWN BY: Adam Kantner SPRK ON SHEET: SEE LEGEND SPRK ON JOB: DATE 09/25/08 I �l 0 Wtheut Comments Nc- Per The A Le `er nese plans have been r_ _ I-''re'v'er-to The Tukwila Fire current cit of adopted • 41, for the :. require a s..:;sequent approval. _ of T=inN l aceTpIAnce ;s sues: ect to field test and inspection b` he TukvAa Fi,-e Prevention Bureau. [Date: -.), S--- 0By: r Please call: 575.4407. TUI.WILA FIRE DEPARTNIL€dl and give this job adiress for shut' or rst .ratiOf BDDrOvt✓d: Western States Fire Protection Company 7102 180th AVE NE, STE A-105 - REDMOND, WA - 98052 Lic. #: WESTESF136QF 1 1 t TAIRS OTICE OecaLse of creased demand our inspectors' ors' s edules are booked 3-7 days ahead. Therefore, you w4.1 need to call 206-575-4407 to schedule your inspections a minimum of 48 hours in advance of#ria, d-. tia you want an ;n_ ane NOTICE Weld stamps must be inspected before pipe is hung. Bo not paint piping prior to hydrostatic test approval. FILE COPY w z 0 Adam Kantner 0 NT a) 0 CONTRACTOR: WESTERN STATES FIRE PROTECTION COMPANY -OFFICES LOCATED ALBUOUEROUE /AUSTIN / DALLAS/DECATUR / DENVER / DULUTH / HOUSTON / KANSAS CITY IAS VEGAS /MINNEAPOLIS / PHOENIX I PORTLAND/RAPID CITY/ ST. PAUL / SALT LAKE CRY /SEATTLE Phone: 425-881-0100 Fax: 425-881-3030 Best Buy 17364 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila Na 98188 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHEET FP -1 OF 1 in \ ,O 1 9-7'/2 a4 ==='- A® O ttv JAM ROOM @ 12'-0" AFF kk 1q-0 1q-0 8-0 • 12-8 Q '4.0" AOS ACOUSTIC ROOM @ 14'-0" AFF 9-2 2-9'/2 VICINITY MAP DETAIL NOT TO SCALE HANGER SYMBOL BRANCHLINE RESTRAINT FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM Sprinkler Legend 12-4 1 1 A 10-6 it 1 t 1 1 1 ADD = A Exsting = E Plug = P Relocate = R LEGEND DETAIL NOT TO SCALE SYM. SIN QTY. K SPRAY ORIF. FIN. TEMP. 9 11.2 Pendent 17/32" Chrome 155°F MFR./MODEL Reliable Model J112 Total = 9 APPROVAL: City of Tukwila CONT. NO.: KS0542 DRAWN BY: Adam Kantner SPRK ON SHEET: SEE LEGEND SPRK ON JOB: DATE 09/25/08 I �l 0 Wtheut Comments Nc- Per The A Le `er nese plans have been r_ _ I-''re'v'er-to The Tukwila Fire current cit of adopted • 41, for the :. require a s..:;sequent approval. _ of T=inN l aceTpIAnce ;s sues: ect to field test and inspection b` he TukvAa Fi,-e Prevention Bureau. [Date: -.), S--- 0By: r Please call: 575.4407. TUI.WILA FIRE DEPARTNIL€dl and give this job adiress for shut' or rst .ratiOf BDDrOvt✓d: Western States Fire Protection Company 7102 180th AVE NE, STE A-105 - REDMOND, WA - 98052 Lic. #: WESTESF136QF 1 1 t TAIRS OTICE OecaLse of creased demand our inspectors' ors' s edules are booked 3-7 days ahead. Therefore, you w4.1 need to call 206-575-4407 to schedule your inspections a minimum of 48 hours in advance of#ria, d-. tia you want an ;n_ ane NOTICE Weld stamps must be inspected before pipe is hung. Bo not paint piping prior to hydrostatic test approval. FILE COPY w z 0 Adam Kantner 0 NT a) 0 CONTRACTOR: WESTERN STATES FIRE PROTECTION COMPANY -OFFICES LOCATED ALBUOUEROUE /AUSTIN / DALLAS/DECATUR / DENVER / DULUTH / HOUSTON / KANSAS CITY IAS VEGAS /MINNEAPOLIS / PHOENIX I PORTLAND/RAPID CITY/ ST. PAUL / SALT LAKE CRY /SEATTLE Phone: 425-881-0100 Fax: 425-881-3030 Best Buy 17364 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila Na 98188 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHEET FP -1 OF 1 CohverJnt TECHN©LOG ES Best Buy T.I. Fire Alarm System Project Submittal CONVERGINT JOB NUMBER: 301 -FN -8400 Steve O'Connell Sales Engineer Rob Fisk Project Manager 425.272.2250 425.272.2250 Convergint Technologies LLC 450 Shattuck Ave S, Suite 100 Renton, WA 98057 Phone 425.272-2250 Fax 425.251-0949 www.convergint.com F Cohg/mECHNOLOGES CONTENTS SECTION 1: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES: GC-HDVM Genesis Multi -Candela Ceiling Horn -Strobes Convergint Technologies LLC 450 Shattuck Ave S, Suite 100 Renton, WA 98057 Phone 425.272-2250 Fax 425.251-0949 www.comvergint.com SECTIOIO 1 GE Security Overview Genesis ceiling horn -strobes are small, compact, and attractive _ audible -visible emergency signaling devices. Protruding no more than 1.6" (41 mm) from the ceiling, Genesis horn -strobes blend with any decor. Thanks to patented breakthrough technology, GE Security Genesis strobes do not require bulky specular reflectors and lenses. Instead, an exclusive cavity design conditions light to produce a highly controlled distribution pattern. Significant development efforts em- ploying this new technology have given rise to a new benchmark in strobe performance - FullLighttechnology. FullLight strobe technology produces a smooth light distribution pattern without the spikes and voids characteristic of specular reflectors. This ensures the entire coverage area receives consistent illumination from the strobe flash. As a result, Genesis strobes with FullLight technology go well beyond the minimum UL -required "cross" pattern. Depending on the model, Genesis horn -strobes feature 15 to 95, or 95 to 177 candela output (see ordering information), which is selectable with a conveniently -located switch on the front of the device. The candela output setting is clearly visible even after final installation, yet it remains locked in place to prevent unauthorized movement after installation. Genesis horn -strobes feature textured housings in architecturally neu- tral white or eye-catching fire alarm red. An ingenious iconographic symbol indicates the purpose of the device. This universal symbol is code -compliant and is easily recognized by all building occupants regardless of what language they speak. Models with "FIRE" mark- ings are also available. EST Fire & Life -Safety Notification Appliances Standard Features • Field configurable - no need to remove the device! - 15/30/75/95 cd and 95/115/150/177 cd models available - Switch settings remain visible even after the unit is installed - Low/high dB settings • Unique low -profile design - 30 per cent slimmer profile than comparable signals - - No visible mounting screws - - Available with white or red housings • Easy to install - Fits all standard 4" square electrical boxes with plenty of room behind the signal for extra wire - no extension ring or trim plate needed - Pre -assembled with captive hardware - no loose pieces - #18 to #12 AWG terminals - ideal for long runs or existing wiring • Unparalleled performance - Exclusive FullLight strobe technology produces the industry's most even light distribution - - Single high -efficiency microprocessor controls both horn and strobe - - Low current draw minimizes system overhead - - - Independent horn control provided over a single pair of wires - Highly regulated in -rush current allows the maximum number of strobes on a circuit - 100 dB peak - multiple frequency tone improves wall penetration Field Configurable Ceiling Horn -Strobes Genesis Series ®®CE FM Pending MEA One or more patents pending. Data Sheet 85001-0559 Issue 8 Not to be used for installation purposes. Page 1 of 4 Application Genesis strobes are UL 1971 -listed for use indoors as ceiling - mounted public -mode notification appliances for the hearing im- paired. Prevailing codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise conditions exceed 105 dBA (87dBA in Canada), where occu- pants use hearing protection, and in areas of public accommoda- tion as defined in the Americans with Disabilities Act (see application notes - USA). Combination horn -strobe signals must be installed in accordance with guidelines established for strobe devices. Strobes Genesis strobes are UL 1971 -listed for use indoors as wall -mounted public -mode notification appliances for the hearing impaired. Prevail- ing codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise conditions exceed specified levels, where occupants use hearing protection, and in areas of public accommodation. Consult with your Authority Having Jurisdiction for details. All Genesis strobes exceed UL synchronization requirements (within 10 milliseconds other over a two-hour period) when used with a synchronization source. Synchronization is important in order to avoid epileptic sensitivity. _ NOTE: The flash intensity of some visible signals may not be adequate to alert or woken occupants in the protected area. Research indicates that the intensity of strobe needed to awoken 90% of sleeping persons is - approximately 100 cd. GE Security recommends that strobes in sleeping rooms be rated at at least 110 cd. WARNING These devices will not operate without electrical power. As fires 'i frequently cause power interruptions, further safeguards such as backup power supplies maybe required, Horns - Genesis horn output reaches as high as 99 dB (peak) and features a unique multiple frequency tone that results in excellent wall penetration and an unmistakable warning of danger. All models may be configured for either coded or non -coded signal circuits. They can also be set for low dB output with a jumper cut that reduces horn output by about 5 dB. The suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone used with alert or alarm signals is at least 15 dB above the average ambient sound level, or 5 dB above the maximum sound level having a duration of at least 60 seconds, whichever is greater, measured 5 feet (1.5 m) above the floor. The average ambient sound level is, A -weighted sound pressure measured over a 24-hour period. Doubling the distance from the signal to the ear will theoretically result in a 6 dB reduction of the received sound pressure level. The actual effect depends on the acoustic properties of materials in the space. A 3 dBA difference represents a barely noticeable change in volume. Dimensions 6.8" dia. (173 mm) 0.60"(15 mm) t Installation and Mounting All models are intended for indoor wall or ceiling applications only. Horn -strobes mount to any flush North -American 4" square electri- cal box. Genesis ceiling horn -strobes simply unlatch and twist to open. This gains access to mounting screws and the selectable candela switch. The shallow depth of Genesis devices leaves ample room behind the signal for extra wiring. Once installed with the cover in place, no mounting screws are visible. GE Security recommends that these fire alarm horn -strobes always be installed in accordance with the latest recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes. Field Configuration Depending on the model, Genesis horn -strobes may be set for 15 to 95, or 95 to 177 candela output (see ordering information). The output setting is changed by simply opening the device and sliding the switch to the desired setting. The horn -strobe does not have to be removed to change the output setting. The setting remains visible through a small window on the front of the device after the cover is closed. The horn -strobe comes factory set for high dB output. Low dB out- put may be selected by cutting a jumper on the circuit board. This reduces the output by about 5 dB. Wiring Field wiring terminals accommodate #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm2 to 2.5 mm2) wiring. Horn/strobes are interconnected with a single pair of wires as shown below. - 0 Polarity shown in alarm condition 0 To next device or end of line device Note: Strobes must have continuous voltage. Data Sheet 85001-0559 Issue 8 Not to be used for installation purposes. Page 2 of 4 Current Draw GC-HDVM Temporal Horn -strobe: High dB Setting til 15 cd 30 cd 75 ed Rating - RMS 16 vac 147 95 cd RMS RMS - RMS: - 190 316 372 16 Vfwr GC-HDVMH High cd Temp 95cd = 11 RMS 341399 ral Horn -strobe: High dB Setting 150 cd 177 Cd RMS RMS _ 506 570 189 253 417 451 487 578 670 711 - GC-HDVM Temporal Horn -strobe: High dB Setting GC-HDVMH High Typal 15 cd 30 cd 75 cd 95 ed- 95 cd Current RMS Mean RMS Mean RMS - '#eon RMS -- Mean RMS Mean 16 Vdc 111 95 152 143 281 276 333 328 20 Vdc 91 80 124 117 219 214 257 251 24 Vdc 80 71 108 101 185 180 212 207 33 Vdc-- 69 62 89 84 144 140 160 156 16 Vfwr 153 81 218 123 388 240 20 Vfwr 141 70 190 100 325 188 24 Vfwr 135 64 176 90 280 154 420 378 310 268 219 180 33 Vfwr 139 61 167 80 241 122 254 133 GC-HDVM Temporal Horn -strobe: Low dB Setting Typical 15 cd 30 cd 75 cd Current RMS Mean RMS Mean RMS Mean 16 Vdc 108 91 149 139 275 269 20 Vdc 87 75 120 113 214 209 95cd RMS Mean 327 322 250 245 24 Vdc 33 Vdc 16 Vfwr 20 Vfwr 24 Vfwr 76 66 103 97 180 175 205 201 64 57 85 80 138 135 153 150 141 76 204 118 384 239 418 265 127 65 176 95 312 181 371 214 118 60 162 82 262 149 301 171 33 Vfwr 127 56 155 73 229 118 249 129 cd Temporal Horn -strobe: High 115 cd 15flcd RMS Mean RMS Mean 324 322 258 256 220 217 172 169 463 265 392 211 346 179 296 142 377 374 477 474 299 296 369 366 252 249 304 301 188 185 223 535 312 665 439 240 517 382 212 458 323 152 358 220 400 287 246 178 dB Setting 17.7 cd RMS - Meah _ 554 551____ __ 417 414_ 341 338 244 241 718 442 587 334 498 271 387 194 GC-HDVMH High cd Temporal Horn -strobe: Low dB Setting 95 cd I15 cd 150 cd 177 cd RMS Mean RMS Mean RMS Mean RMS Mean 317 315 378 376 480 477 544 542 252 250 292 290 364 362 414 411 212 211 245 243 297 295 334 332 159 157 181 179 215 213 234 232 461 265 521 305 656 396 705 432 381 208 437 242 508 285 576 3-26-- 335 172 370 195 440 235 485 264 285 134 308 149 349 169 373 186 Notes and Comments - 1. Current values are shown in mA. - 2. UL Nameplate Rating can vary from Typical Current due to measurement methods and instruments used. - 3. GE Security recommends using the Typical Current for system design including NAC and Power Supply loading and voltage drop calculations. 4. Use the Vdc RMS current ratings for filtered power supply and battery AH calculations. Use the Vfwr RMS current ratings for unfiltered power supply calculations. 5. Fuses, circuit breakers and other overcurrent protection devices are typically rated for current in RMS values. Mast of these devices operate based upon the heating affect of the current flowing through the device. The RMS current (not the mean current) determines the heating affect and therefore, the trip and hold threshold for those devices. 6. Our industry has used 'mean' currents over the years. However, UL will direct the industry to use the 2004 RMS values in the future. - dBA output High dB Setting UL464 Temporal S 16 Vdc 24 Vdc 33 Vdc 85 79.8 Low de Setting 16 Vdc 24 Vdc 33 Vdc 83.3 Aver Temporal Steady Steady 90.6 93.6 87.8 95.7 83.2 85.4 Peak- Temporal} Steady 93.6 96.6 98.7 UL464 Average Peak Temporal Steady Temporal/ I Temporal/ Steady Steady 79.3 86.3 88.7 78 83 88.8 92.4 80.9 85.9 91.8 95.1 75 Notes 1. All values shown are dBA measured at 10 feet (3.Olm); 2. UL464 values measured in reverberation room; 3. Average and Peak values are measured in anechoic chamber. Light output - (effective cd) Percent of UL rating versus angle A 1. ,0, 01 00 50 40 00 10 0 10 20 90 M 50 e0 A 110 W 100 110 100 so 15* Data Sheet 85001-0559 Issue 8 Not to be used for installation purposes. Page 3 of 4 e GE Security U.S. T 888-378-2329 F 866-503-3996 Canada T 519 376 2430 f 519 376 7258 Asia T 852 2907 8108 F 852 2142 5063 Australia T 61 3 9259 4700 F61 3 9259 4799 Europe T3227251120 - F3227218613 Latin America T 305 593 4301 F 305 593 4300 wwwgesecurity.com © 2007 General Electric Company All Rights Reserved. Genesis Series is a trademark of GE Security. Specifications Housing Textured UV stabilized, color impregnated engineered plastic Exceeds 94V-0 UL flammability rating. Red and white models available. Lens Optical grade polycarbonate (clear) Mounting North -American 4" square box, 21/8" (54 mm( deep (indoor wall or ceiling applications only). Wire connections Screw terminals: single input for both horn and strobe. #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm2 to 2.5 mm2)wire size Operating environment Indoor: 32-120°F (0-49°C) ambient temperature. 93% relative humidity Meets or exceeds ULC -S541, year 2004 UL requirements for standards Agency listings/approvals UL1638 and UL1971, and complies with UL1480. All horn -strobes comply with ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapter 28 Part 36 Final Rule. CSFM, MEA. FM pending. Operating voltage Strobe output rating GC-HDVM series temporal -tone horn -strobes: non -coded, filtered 16-33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR (or coded (audible NAC only) when used with optional G1M Genesis Signal Master) UL 1971, UL 1638, ULC S526: selectable 15/30/75/95 cd (GC-HDVM) and 95/115/150/177 cd (GC-HDVMH) Strobe flash rate GC-HDVM series temporal -tone horn -strobes: one flash per second synchronized with optional G1M Genesis Signal Master indefinitely within 10 milliseconds (or self -synchronized within 200 milliseconds over thirty minutes on a common circuit without G1M Genesis Signal Master) Temporal setting (private mode only): synchronized to temporal output of horns on same circuit Synchronization Sources G1M-RM, SIGA-CC1S, SIGA-MCC1S, BPS6A, BPS10A Horn pulse rate GC-HDVM series temporal -tone horn -strobes: temporal rate synchronized with optional G1M Genesis Signal Master indefinitely within 10 milliseconds (or self -synchronized within 200 milliseconds over thirty minutes on a common circuit without G1M Genesis Signal Master) Temporal audible pattern 'h l sec ON, sec OFF, V2 sec ON, 'h sec OFF, ' sec ON, 1' sec OFF, then repeat cycle Ordering Information Catalog Housing Marking Description Number - Color GC- HDVM White None Genesis Ceiling/Wall Horn -Strobe GCF- HDVM White "FIRE" -- — with selectable 15, 30, 75, or 95 cd output GCFR- HDVM Red "FIRE" GC- HDVMH White None Genesis Ceiling/Wall Horn -Strobe GCF- HDVMH White "FIRE" with selectable 95,115, 150, or 177 cd output 0.82 (1.8) Accessories G1M- RM SIGA- CC1S SIGA- MCC1S Genesis Signal Master- Remote Mount (1 -gang) Intelligent Synchronization Output Module (2 -gang) Intelligent Synchronization Output Module (Plug-in UIO) 0.2 (0.1) 0.5 (0.23) 0.18 (0.08) White Field Configurable Ceiling Horn -Strobes may be - ordered with or without optional 'FIRE' marking. Red Horn -Strobes come with 'FIRE" marking. imagination at work Data Sheet 85001-0559 Issue 8 Not to be used for installation purposes. Page 4 of 4 F r GENERAL NOTES: 1) ALL WIRE AND CONDUIT MUST BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS, AND MUST MEET ALL APPLICABLE CODES. 2) ALL WIRE AND CABLE MUST BE RATED FOR FIRE ALARM USE PER THE LATEST REVISIONS OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE SECTION 760. THIS IS A POWER LIMITED FIRE ALARM SYSTEM, ALL CABLE MUST BE MARKED FPL, FPLR, CI OR FPLP. 3) ALL CONDUCTORS MUST TEST FREE OF GROUND BEFORE MAKING CONNECTION TO THE ARE ALARM CONTROL PANEL 4) TO RETAIN WARRANTY, THE ARE ALARM EQUIPMENT MUST BE POWERED UP UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A QUAUF1ED MANUFACTURERS TECHNICIAN. 5) THE LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM IS A COMPLETELY SUPERVISED SYSTEM. 6) INSTAWNG ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL FIELD CHANGES MTh THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR INCLUDING CHANGES IN DEVICES, WIRE, CONDUIT RUNS AND OPERATION IN THE SYSTEM. FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR UNDOCUMENTED CHANGES, OR THE RESULTS CAUSED BY THOSE CHANGES. 7) LIFE SAFETY AUDIBLE SHALL BE AUDIBLE THROUGHOUT THE SPACE AND SHALL HAVE A SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL NOT LESS THAN 15db ABOVE AMBIENT NOISE LEVEL MEASURED AT 4'0' ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. 8) MAIN BUILDING FIRE ALARM & SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS SHALL BE CLASS 'B' IN CONFIGURATION. PRE—ACTION & DELUGE ALARM SYSTEMS SHALL BE CLASS 'A' IN CONFIGURATION. CLASS 'A' APPLICATIONS SHALL MAINTAIN A MINIMUM SEPARATION OF 4 FEET BETWEEN FEED AND RETURN CIRCUITS. 9) LOCATE ALL PULL STATIONS AND HORN/STROBE UNITS AT SPECIFIED HEIGHTS PER NFPA 72 AND ADA SEE DETAIL SHEET. 10) SMOKE C =TECTOR LOCATIONS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY AND SHALL BE INSTALLED PER NFPA 72. 11) ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL ROUGH—IN INSTALLATION WITH THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR. 12) SMOKE DETECTORS ON CEILINGS MUST BE NO MORE THAN 15' FROM A WALL AND/OR NO MORE THAN 30' FROM EACH OTHER. REDUCED SPACING MAY ALSO BE REQUIRED. SEE PLAN DRAWINGS FOR PROJECT—SPECIFIC LOCATIONS. 13) ALL FIRE ALARM DEVICES SHALL BE RIGIDLY AND SECURELY FASTENED TO WALLS OR CEILINGS. 14) NO SMOKE DETECTOR SHALL BE LOCATED CLOSER THAN 36' TO ANY AIR REGISTER OR DIFFUSER. 15) NO HEAT DETECTOR SHALL BE LOCATED CLOSER THAN 24' TO ANY AIR REGISTER OR DIFFUSER. 16) NO HEAT DETECTOR SHALL BE LOCATED CLOSER THAN 36' TO ANY PART OF ANY HEAT GENERATING DEVICE (FUSES, BOILERS, WATER HEATERS, ECT.) IN MECHANICAL ROOMS. 17) NO HEAT DETECTOR SHALL BE LOCATED CLOSER THAN 18' TO ANY PART OF ANY LIGHT FIXTURE 18) INITIATING AND SIGNALING CIRCUITS ARE SEPARATE YET MAY BE RUN IN SAME CONDUIT. 19) ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE LABELED BY ZONE AND ALL COLOR CODES SHALL MATCH. 20) DEVICES THAT ARE UNABLE TO BE INSTALLED PERMANENTLY DURING DEVICE TRIM SHALL BE SPLICED THROUGH TO ALLOW DEVICES AND CIRCUIT DOWNSTREAM TO BE PRE—TESTED. THIS INCLUDES ALL CIRCUITS (SPEAKER CIRCUITS, STROBE CIRCUITS, ADDRESSABLE LOOP CIRCUITS, 24VDC CIRCUITS, FIREFIGHTERS TELEPHONE CIRCUITS, ETC.) 21) THESE DRAWINGS DO NOT SUPERSEDE THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, THEY ARE INTENDED AS A SUPPLEMENT ONLY AND MUST BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THEY DO NOT MODIFY THE CONTRACTORS OBLIGATIONS TO CONFORM TO THE PROJECTS ORIGINAL DESIGN CRITERIA. WIRE CODE ALL WIRING AND INSTALLATION METHODS SHALL BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH CURRENT RELEVENT NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE ARTICLES AND RELATED SECTION CODE REQUIREMENTS. WIRING INSTALLATION NOTES: * LABEL ALL ZONE WIRES WITH ZONE NUMBER TAG AND DESCRIPTION. * LABEL ALL SIGNAL CIRCUIT WIRES WITH SIGNAL CIRCUIT NUMBER TAG AND DESCRIPTION. * LABEL ALL NETWORK,_ ANNUNCIATOR AND I/O CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING WITH CIRCUIT NUMBER TAG AND DESCRIPTION.---- * VERIFY WITF& OWNER AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR THAT OPEN CABLE IS ALLOWED ON SPECIFIC SITE. * VERIFY WITH OWNER AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR ANY SPECIFIC SITE REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF WIRING. Letter Qty Open Wiring Cable Type Conduit Wiring Cable Type Size Function C 1 Pair FPL(P) Red/Blk Red/Blue THHN 14 Horn / Strobe SYMBOL LEGEND SYMBOL QTY DESCRIPTION MODEL # 4 SYNC NULTI-CANDELA CEILING HORN/STROBE GC-HDVM (WHITE) GCF-HWVM (-FIRE') BACK BOX / DIMENSIONS 4' SO, 2.125' DEEP BY EC MOUNTING HEIGHTS A/C SUPPLY DIFFUSER 3' (MIN) NOTE: DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE TO THE CLOSEST FLUORESCENT EDGE OF THE DETECTOR LIGHT CEILING I U K//////////r////iii/////// ////y////////////ll \\\//i //////////4//// 24" MIN ACCESSIBLE OOM STROBE AUDIO/VISUAL —& VISUAL ONLY DEVICES SYNCHRONIZED MORE THAN TWO VISUAL APPLIANCES IN ANY FIELD OF VIEW. 80" MIN 96" MAX FACP 66" AFF CEILING MOUNTED SMOKE/HEAT DETECTOR MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDER L FI RE PHON JACK 3' PERMITTED HERE 4" //// /////////'/, NOT ERMITTED HERE DOOR WIDTH LESS 3" PERMITTED HERE 6" MANUAL PULL STATION 48" MAX (ADA) 42"MIN/54" MAX (NFPA) 0 4" 12" MAX J J w z L V////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// FINISHED FLOOR * DEVICES SHOWN DEPICT DEVICE TYPES ONLY. r f v C- C- • HEil 0 0 0 0 .4 F=i= 3 FE.S FE.8 Ii 1I15cd I i N1-4 IEOL 1 uI DROP SHIP O _Oi L I 1 30cd N1-4 ftza, I! II Ii Ii 1 I I II 11 15cd N1-4 v v Ili 1 1 li 11 LI! 111 IL' 1i '4. 1 1 + e'tJ151cnI iBub 1 ,1 I L — ,SBR.1 317 1ST FLOG PLA\ 'S, TO EXISTING, NAC PANEL , [ED.3 'SCOPE OF WORK (BEST BUY T.I.) r T 1141-7 1041 ui ( n 1 /8" = 1'-0" Voltage Drops - NAC Panels Part Description Ceding HomlStrobe @ 15cd Ceding Hom/Strobe @ 30cd_ ACCEPTED. _- J vs '" Wthou't Comre is _ S Noted In Red n - Pfir The Attached Letter i nese p .- s have br:., r . i1 n t + I_t"..I'a Fire sPrevei to;� Bu -e2 ;' -, -- , - r- ., ._rtG,:Y t om'ss;v .s 1,` v„ c.. -. _ - _ _ ^{�� `LI _'," eb-:r",..;-i- ,- i ,---.j -c.`s.= - - ' i adeC,,»u �may c= _ I -z,-,- . - . - -_ -----:-.--.r Ac4.c.; :lcns c_ ...1. _ _, . - _ _ s _ �. _ - �.4,-3, aitsr a re.s..br; tt oi:i:r'..,: �--'a, _ a.s_----.rtE-;,,o4�.! Final accspY s _..' -_,t. :: .�,7:. ci ir'=rect1Cn �. The Tu; villa Fie P:ee-.e•): on Ei4�/a,; Date: l°,7 -°d By / k', Jif DATE: NOTICE A cornp!eted; signed, Tukwila Fire Department Pre-test Certificate must be presented to the Inspector prior to commencement of Acceptance Testing of any Fire Alarm and Detection Systems. Failure of test will result in a Re -inspection Fee and termination of the testing. REV DESCRIPTION Part Model # GC-HDVM GC-HDVM ISSUED FOR PERMIT 9-24-08 Current (mA)I I 080'0 o o' Circuit # Description Current (Amps) Distance (Feet) Voltage Drops Total N1-1 EXISTING 1 450 0 00 N1-2 EXISTING 0 145 0.00 N1-3 EXISTING 1 970 0 00 3 1 N1-4 BEST BUY 11 - HORN/STROBES 0 348 1001 0 11 3 1 Total Current Draw for NAC #1 - 3 913 Capacities Used - 60 200% 1 N �x x Battery Calculations - Nac Panel #1 Qty Part Number Description Standby Total Alarm Total Current (A) Standby (A) Current (A) Alarm (A) 1 BPS -6 3 GC-HDVM 1 GC-HDVM EXISTING NAC Panel Ceiling Horn/Strobe @ 15cd Ceiling Horn/Strobe @ 30cd EXISTING HORN/STROBES 0 0700 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0700 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 1900 0 0800 0.1080 3.5650 0.1900 0 2400 0 1080 3 5650 Total Standby= 0 0700 Total Alarm= 4 1030 Total Standby Current Required= 0.0700 Total Alarm Current Required= 4.1030 Total= 20% Depletion Factor= - Total Amp/Hour Required= Total Amp/Hour Batteries Provided= Time (Hrs) X 24 0000 1.6800 X 0.0833 0.3418 2.0218 0.4044 2.4261 (1) set 7.0000 r FILE COPY r TUKWILA FIRE DEPART:'LEM Please call: 575-440Z ertd give this job No. 03 -F 7) a.Jress for shut. cr :r,-,cn aooroval, 1 R v'777---‘' -->:sa —rnt� _r11lg CA IR ; Pr -17R -- yI IIT, CEEEEp u; i1 ' —^1 4VI I TEC i�nt ES 450 Shattuck Avenue South, Renton, Washington 98055 Phone: 425-272-2250 Fax: 425-251-0949 This document and the information/depictions contained/shown is the exclusive property of Convergint Technologies LLC and shall be handled as proprietary and confidential information and must be returned upon request. This document cannot be reproduced by any means without the written authorization of Convergint Technologies LLC. 1 1 PROJECT MANAGER: ROB F. ' ACCEPTED. _- J vs '" Wthou't Comre is _ S Noted In Red n - Pfir The Attached Letter i nese p .- s have br:., r . i1 n t + I_t"..I'a Fire sPrevei to;� Bu -e2 ;' -, -- , - r- ., ._rtG,:Y t om'ss;v .s 1,` v„ c.. -. _ - _ _ ^{�� `LI _'," eb-:r",..;-i- ,- i ,---.j -c.`s.= - - ' i adeC,,»u �may c= _ I -z,-,- . - . - -_ -----:-.--.r Ac4.c.; :lcns c_ ...1. _ _, . - _ _ s _ �. _ - �.4,-3, aitsr a re.s..br; tt oi:i:r'..,: �--'a, _ a.s_----.rtE-;,,o4�.! Final accspY s _..' -_,t. :: .�,7:. ci ir'=rect1Cn �. The Tu; villa Fie P:ee-.e•): on Ei4�/a,; Date: l°,7 -°d By / k', Jif DATE: NOTICE A cornp!eted; signed, Tukwila Fire Department Pre-test Certificate must be presented to the Inspector prior to commencement of Acceptance Testing of any Fire Alarm and Detection Systems. Failure of test will result in a Re -inspection Fee and termination of the testing. REV DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED 0 ISSUED FOR PERMIT 9-24-08 DRAWN BY: BEN N. PROJECT ENGINEER: JHOEL B. PROJECT MANAGER: ROB F. JOB NUMBER: 30I -FN -8400 SCALE: 1/8"=1'-0" DATE: BEST BUY T.I. @ 17364 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WA 98188 1ST FLOOR PLAN FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DRAWING: FA -1 -1 PAID SEP S 0 2008 Tukwila Fire ‘7W 2s )ELh - 17364 SOUTHCENTER PKWY ASSOCIATED PERMITS 19-5-060 16-S-039 SITE LOCATION CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE MARSHAL'S OFFICE 206-575-4407 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. **PLEASE PRINT** Site Address: 17364 Southcenter Parkway Tenant Name: Best Buy 0447 New Tenant? ❑ - Yes ®- No King Co. Assessor's Tax No.: 262304-9110 Suite Number: N/A Floor: 1 Property Owner's Name: KIR Tukwila 050 LLC Mailing Address: PO Box 5020 New Hyde Park NY 11042 City State Zip CONTACT PERSON -if there are questions about the submittal. Name: Jim Stewart Day Telephone: 425.881.0100 Company Name: Western States Fire Protection Mailing Address: 14690 NE 95th Street, Unit 101 - Redmond, WA 98052 E-mail Address: jim•stewart@wsfp.us City Fax Number: 425'881'3 SW 6t NICET III number: 3636-1100-C Contractor's City of Tukwila Business License number: X Zip Total number of new/relocated devices or sprinkler heads: 1 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 3,129.00 Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): Add one new dry pendent sprinkler into the existing trash chute located at the SE portion of the building. 4,4 PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Fire Marshal to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review -Every permit issued shall become invalid unless the work on the site authorized by such permit is commenced within 180 days after its issuance, or if the work authorized on the site by such permit is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days after the time the work is commenced. The Fire Marshal is authorized to grant, in writing, one or more extensions of time, for periods not more than 180 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OR WAStj�1, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. ��jj�J BUILDIN NER OI UTHORIZED AGENT: MAR 1'5 M9 Signature: Print Name: Jim Stewat Plan Permit App.doc TUKWILA FIRE Date: 03.14.2019 Day Telephone: 425.881.0100 8/22/14 TFD FP Form 8 pATRIOT RE PROTECTION Fire Sprinklers Save Lives! 2707 70TH Avenue East Tacoma, WA 98424 February 29, 2016 To: Al Metzler Tukwila Fire Department 444 Andover Park E Tukwila, WA Re: Best Buy Tukwila 17364 SouthCenter Parkway Tukwila, WA 98188 Mr. Metzler: TEL: (253) 926.2290 FAX: (253) 922.6150 Patriot Fire Protection, Inc. is requesting a shut down number so we can shut down the sprinkler system at the above project location to plug off (11) upright heads along a full height wall and (10) recessed heads in a ceiling that is being removed in the northeast corner of the showroom. No new walls are being built and all coverage is going back to original design of existing system exposed to the metal deck. Please feel free to call with any questions. Sincerely, PATRIOT FIRE PROTECTION, INC. John Dacca Project Manager Phone: 253-284-3467 Fax: 253-922-6150 VANCOUVER, WA OFFICE TEL (360) 699.4403 PORTLAND (503) 222.6001 FAX (360) 699.4485 UKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT Nese call 206-5754407 and give go S o35Permit Na. and exact address for shut- down or restoration approval. www.patriotfire.com PATRIFP099CF SPOKANE, WA OFFICE TEL (509) 926.3428 FAX (509) 926.3708 Western States Fire Protection .0_3u2Iq�sc y -s-� 14690 NE 95th Street, Unit 101 Redmond, WA 98052 Phone (425) 881-0100 Fax (425) 881-3030 Project Name BS" ` e4()%i 0441 "reASK !14u1E Subject ;WE, S4 KLER. 9KE r it-% - pL,tA& ViEW Project No. 14 018'5 v. Date 3f 4 I By Sheet of 1 ‘.9 WASHINGTON sum CERTIFICATE OF CONORTINCY FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER $Y$TErls Richard J. Stewart 3636-1100-C Level 3 Westem States Fire Protection Company WESTESF136QF „,.; 03/14/2019 1 , 1. WA CL# WESTESF136QF t WESTESF906P1 PAID &i,jwi9 TUKWILA FIRE L i ACCEPTED Without Comments o As Noted in Red I Per The Attached Letter nese plans have been reviewed by The Tukwila Fire :vention Bureau for conformance with current City ndarris. Acceptance is subject to errors and fissions which do not authorize violations of adopted :indards and ordinances. The responsibility for the iequacy of design rests totally with the designer. ddItions, deletions or revisions to these drawings after -r 15 date will void this acceptance and will require a resubmittal of revised drawings for subsequent approval. Final acceptance Is subject to field test and inspection by The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. Date: Lf -3-1 I By: } 1 TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT Please call 206-575-4407 and give this Fire Permit No. /9 -S -oto and exact address for shut- down hutdown or testoratlOn approval.